CN1073328C - Method for communicating in a wireless communication system - Google Patents
Method for communicating in a wireless communication system Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CN1073328C CN1073328C CN94118667A CN94118667A CN1073328C CN 1073328 C CN1073328 C CN 1073328C CN 94118667 A CN94118667 A CN 94118667A CN 94118667 A CN94118667 A CN 94118667A CN 1073328 C CN1073328 C CN 1073328C
- Authority
- CN
- China
- Prior art keywords
- message
- mobile station
- channel
- frame
- dcc
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Expired - Fee Related
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04J—MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
- H04J3/00—Time-division multiplex systems
- H04J3/16—Time-division multiplex systems in which the time allocation to individual channels within a transmission cycle is variable, e.g. to accommodate varying complexity of signals, to vary number of channels transmitted
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W48/00—Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
- H04W48/20—Selecting an access point
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/24—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field for communication between two or more posts
- H04B7/26—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field for communication between two or more posts at least one of which is mobile
- H04B7/2643—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field for communication between two or more posts at least one of which is mobile using time-division multiple access [TDMA]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/24—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field for communication between two or more posts
- H04B7/26—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field for communication between two or more posts at least one of which is mobile
- H04B7/2643—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field for communication between two or more posts at least one of which is mobile using time-division multiple access [TDMA]
- H04B7/2656—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field for communication between two or more posts at least one of which is mobile using time-division multiple access [TDMA] for structure of frame, burst
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
- H04L1/0045—Arrangements at the receiver end
- H04L1/0046—Code rate detection or code type detection
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
- H04L1/0056—Systems characterized by the type of code used
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
- H04L1/0056—Systems characterized by the type of code used
- H04L1/0057—Block codes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
- H04L1/0056—Systems characterized by the type of code used
- H04L1/0059—Convolutional codes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
- H04L1/0056—Systems characterized by the type of code used
- H04L1/0061—Error detection codes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
- H04L1/0056—Systems characterized by the type of code used
- H04L1/0071—Use of interleaving
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
- H04L1/0072—Error control for data other than payload data, e.g. control data
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/0078—Avoidance of errors by organising the transmitted data in a format specifically designed to deal with errors, e.g. location
- H04L1/0083—Formatting with frames or packets; Protocol or part of protocol for error control
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/08—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by repeating transmission, e.g. Verdan system
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/12—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
- H04L1/16—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
- H04L1/1607—Details of the supervisory signal
- H04L1/1614—Details of the supervisory signal using bitmaps
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/12—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
- H04L1/16—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
- H04L1/1607—Details of the supervisory signal
- H04L1/1685—Details of the supervisory signal the supervisory signal being transmitted in response to a specific request, e.g. to a polling signal
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/12—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
- H04L1/16—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
- H04L1/18—Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/12—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
- H04L1/16—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
- H04L1/18—Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
- H04L1/1803—Stop-and-wait protocols
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/12—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
- H04L1/16—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
- H04L1/18—Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
- H04L1/1809—Selective-repeat protocols
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/12—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
- H04L1/16—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
- H04L1/18—Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
- H04L1/1829—Arrangements specially adapted for the receiver end
- H04L1/1848—Time-out mechanisms
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/12—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
- H04L1/16—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
- H04L1/18—Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
- H04L1/1867—Arrangements specially adapted for the transmitter end
- H04L1/188—Time-out mechanisms
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/20—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received using signal quality detector
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L9/00—Cryptographic mechanisms or cryptographic arrangements for secret or secure communications; Network security protocols
- H04L9/40—Network security protocols
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W48/00—Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
- H04W48/16—Discovering, processing access restriction or access information
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
- H04W68/02—Arrangements for increasing efficiency of notification or paging channel
- H04W68/025—Indirect paging
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/0001—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff
- H04L1/0002—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff by adapting the transmission rate
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L2001/0092—Error control systems characterised by the topology of the transmission link
- H04L2001/0093—Point-to-multipoint
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W48/00—Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
- H04W48/08—Access restriction or access information delivery, e.g. discovery data delivery
- H04W48/10—Access restriction or access information delivery, e.g. discovery data delivery using broadcasted information
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. Transmission Power Control [TPC] or power classes
- H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
- H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
- H04W52/0212—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices managed by the network, e.g. network or access point is leader and terminal is follower
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. Transmission Power Control [TPC] or power classes
- H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
- H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
- H04W52/0225—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal
- H04W52/0245—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of external events, e.g. the presence of a signal according to signal strength
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W88/00—Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
- H04W88/02—Terminal devices
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
- Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
- Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
- Quality & Reliability (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
- Small-Scale Networks (AREA)
- Communication Control (AREA)
- Time-Division Multiplex Systems (AREA)
- Heterocyclic Compounds Containing Sulfur Atoms (AREA)
- Pyrane Compounds (AREA)
- Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
- Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
- Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)
- Investigating Or Analysing Biological Materials (AREA)
- Heterocyclic Compounds That Contain Two Or More Ring Oxygen Atoms (AREA)
- Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)
- Organic Low-Molecular-Weight Compounds And Preparation Thereof (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本申请所包含的主题涉及于1992年10月2日提交的申请号为No.07/955,591、名称为“在无线电话系统中用于通信控制的方法与设备”的共同未决美国专利申请;于1992年10月5日提交的申请号为07/956,640、名称为“数字控制信道”的共同未决美国专利申请和于1993年4月19日提交的申请号为No.07/047,452、名称为“用于随机接入信道和接入响应信道的第二层协议”的共同未决美国专利申请。这三个共同未决申请援引于此以资参考。This application contains subject matter related to co-pending U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 07/955,591, filed October 2, 1992, entitled "Method and Apparatus for Communication Control in a Wireless Telephone System"; Co-pending U.S. Patent Application No. 07/956,640, filed October 5, 1992, entitled "Digital Control Channel," and Application No. 07/047,452, filed April 19, 1993, entitled Co-pending US patent application for "
本发明涉及无线通信系统,更具体地讲,涉及在包括例如蜂窝无线系统的无线通信系统中用于传送信息的方法与设备。蜂窝电话业备The present invention relates to wireless communication systems, and more particularly to methods and apparatus for communicating information in wireless communication systems including, for example, cellular wireless systems. cellular phone equipment
在世界范围的电信市场中,蜂窝移动电话是发展最快的项目之一。例如在1984年与1992年之间在美国移动电话用户的数目从大约两万五千个增长为超过一千万个。到1995年底,估计用户的数目将上升到接近两千贰百万个和到2000年将上升到九千万个。Cellular mobile phones are one of the fastest growing items in the worldwide telecommunications market. For example, between 1984 and 1992 the number of mobile phone subscribers in the United States increased from approximately 25,000 to over 10 million. By the end of 1995, it is estimated that the number of users will rise to nearly 22 million and by the year 2000 to 90 million.
蜂窝电话业务操作非常类似于在家中和办公室中的固定的有线电话业务,除了不是用电话线而是利用无线频率将电话呼叫连接到各移动用户和从各移动用户连接电话呼叫之外。分配给每个移动用户一个专用(10个数字)电话号薄号码,和根据他或她每月在蜂窝电话上讲话所花的“空中时间”的总量来计费。许多可用于陆地电话用户的业务特点,例如呼叫等待、呼叫转移、三方呼叫等等通常也可以用于移动用户。Cellular telephone services operate much like fixed wireline telephone services in homes and offices, except instead of telephone lines, radio frequencies are used to connect telephone calls to and from mobile subscribers. Each mobile subscriber is assigned a private (10 digit) directory number and is billed based on the amount of "air time" he or she spends talking on the cell phone each month. Many of the service features available to landline users, such as call waiting, call forwarding, three-way calling, etc., are often also available to mobile users.
在美国,联邦通信委员会(FCC)根据将全国划分为地理上的服务市场的许可方案授权了蜂窝许可,所述市场划分是按照1980的调查结果。对于每个市场仅授权了两种蜂窝许可。在每个市场中两种蜂窝系统通常被分别称为“A”系统和“B”系统。两种系统的每个系统在800MHz频段分配了不同的频段(分别称为A段和B段)。至今,FCC为蜂窝业务已配发了总数50MHz的频率(每个系统25MHz)。In the United States, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) authorizes cellular licenses under a licensing scheme that divides the nation into geographic service markets as per the 1980 findings. Only two cellular licenses are authorized for each market. The two cellular systems are commonly referred to as the "A" system and the "B" system, respectively, in each market. Each of the two systems is assigned different frequency bands (referred to as segment A and segment B respectively) in the 800 MHz frequency band. To date, the FCC has allocated a total of 50MHz of frequency (25MHz per system) for cellular services.
移动用户具有接受来自A系统或B系统话务员(或者两者)的服务的自由度。预定业务的本地系统称为归属系统。当移动(“漫游”)出归属系统以外时,如果在归属系统与“所访问”的系统的操作员之间存在有协议的话,则移动用户能够得到远地系统的服务。蜂窝系统Mobile subscribers have the freedom to receive service from either the A-system or the B-system operator (or both). The local system for booking services is called the home system. When moving ("roaming") out of the home system, the mobile subscriber can be served by the remote system if there is an agreement between the operators of the home system and the "visited" system. cellular system
有典型的蜂窝无线系统中,一个地理区域,例如一个大城市区域被分为若干较小的相邻接的称为“网孔”的无线复盖区。这些网孔由一系列称为“基站”的固定无线电站服务。基站被连接到和受控于一个移动业务交换中心(MSC)。而MSC又连接到陆地(有线)公用交换电话网(PSTN)。在蜂窝无线系统中的电话用户(移动用户)装备有便携的(手持的)、可搬运的(手搬动的)、或移动的(车载的)电话装置(移动站),这些电话装置通过附近的基站与MSC进行话音和/或数据通信。MSC交换各有线线路与移动用户之间的呼叫,控制发往各移动站的信令,收集计费统计和提供该系统的操作、维护和测试。In a typical cellular radio system, a geographic area, such as a metropolitan area, is divided into a number of smaller contiguous radio coverage areas called "cells". These cells are served by a series of fixed radio stations called "base stations". The base stations are connected to and controlled by a Mobile Services Switching Center (MSC). The MSC is in turn connected to the land (wired) Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). Telephone users (mobile subscribers) in cellular radio systems are equipped with portable (hand-held), transportable (hand-carried), or mobile (vehicle-mounted) telephone The base station performs voice and/or data communication with the MSC. The MSC switches calls between the wireline lines and the mobile subscribers, controls signaling to the mobile stations, collects billing statistics and provides for operation, maintenance and testing of the system.
图1表示按照先进的移动电话业务(AMPS)标准所建造的常规蜂高无线系统的结构。在图1中,任意的地理区域可以被分为多个相邻的无线复盖区,或网孔C1-C10。虽然图1的系统由为了说明的目的仅表示包括10个网孔,但在实际中网孔数目可以多得多。与每个网孔C1-C10相联系和位于其中的是表示为对应多个基站B1-B10之一的一个基站。每个基站B1-B10包括多个信道单元,每个单元中包括正如现有技术所公知的发射机、接收机和控制器。Figure 1 shows the architecture of a conventional Honeycomb wireless system built in accordance with the Advanced Mobile Phone Service (AMPS) standard. In FIG. 1, an arbitrary geographic area can be divided into a plurality of contiguous wireless coverage areas, or cells C 1 -C 10 . Although the system of Figure 1 is shown to include only 10 cells for purposes of illustration, in practice the number of cells may be much greater. Associated with and located within each cell C1 - C10 is a base station denoted as a corresponding one of the plurality of base stations B1 - B10 . Each base station B1 - B10 comprises a plurality of channel units, each unit comprising a transmitter, receiver and controller as known in the art.
在图1中,基站B1-B10分别位于网孔C1-C10的中心,和装备有无方向性无线,在全方位均等地进行发射。在这种情况下,在每个基站B1-B10中的所有信道单元都连接到一个天线。然而,在其他的蜂窝无线系统的组成中,基站B1-B10可能位于周边附近,或相反地远离网孔C1-C10的中心和可以定向地以无线信号发射到网孔C1-C10。例如,基站可以装备三个方向性天线,如图2所示的,每个天线复盖120度的扇区网孔。在这种情况下,一些信道单元将被连接到复盖一个扇区网孔的天线上,另外一些信道单元将被连接到复盖另外的扇区网孔的天线上,和剩余的信道单元将被连接到复盖剩余的扇区网孔的剩余的天线上。因此,在图2中,该基站为三个扇区网孔服务。但是,并不总是需要存在三个扇区网孔,而仅一个扇区网孔需要用于复盖例如道路或高速公路。In Fig. 1, base stations B 1 -B 10 are located at the centers of cells C 1 -C 10 respectively, and are equipped with non-directional radios, which transmit equally in all directions. In this case, all channel elements in each base station B 1 -B 10 are connected to one antenna. However, in other cellular radio system compositions, the base stations B1 - B10 may be located near the perimeter, or conversely remote from the center of the cells C1 - C10 and may transmit radio signals directionally to the cells C1 -C10 . C 10 . For example, the base station can be equipped with three directional antennas, as shown in FIG. 2 , each antenna covers a sector cell of 120 degrees. In this case, some channel elements will be connected to antennas covering one sector cell, other channel elements will be connected to antennas covering another sector cell, and the remaining channel elements will are connected to the remaining antennas covering the remaining sector cells. Thus, in Figure 2, the base station serves three sector cells. However, it is not always necessary that there be three sector cells, but only one sector cell for covering eg roads or highways.
回到图1,每个基站B1-B10通过话音或数据链路连接到移动交换中心(MSC)20,所述中心再连接到在公共交换电话网(PSTN)中的中心局(未示出)或类似的设施,例如综合业务数字网(ISDN)。在移动与交换中心MSC20与基站B1-B10之间,或在移动交换中心MSC20与PSTN或ISDN之间相应的连接和传输模式,对于本专业的普通技术人员是公知的,可以包括双绞线对、同轴电缆、光缆或者工作在模拟或数字模式的微波无线信道。另外,话音和数据链路可以由话务员提供,或者从电话公司(telco)租用。Returning to Fig. 1, each base station B1 - B10 is connected to a mobile switching center (MSC) 20 by a voice or data link, and said center is connected to a central office (not shown) in the public switched telephone network (PSTN). out) or similar facilities such as the Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN). Between the mobile and switching center MSC20 and the base stations B1 - B10 , or between the mobile switching center MSC20 and the PSTN or ISDN, the corresponding connection and transmission modes are well known to those skilled in the art and may include twisted pairs Wire pair, coaxial cable, fiber optic cable or microwave radio channel operating in analog or digital mode. Alternatively, voice and data links can be provided by an operator, or leased from a telephone company (telco).
继续参照图1,在网孔C1-C10中可以发现多个移动站M1-M10。再有,虽然在图1中只表示了10个移动站,但在实际中,移动站的实际数目可以多得多和将大大超过基站的数目。还有,虽然在网孔C1-C10的某些网孔中可能找不到移动站M1-M10,在网孔C1-C10中的任何一个具体网孔中存在或不存在移动站M1-M10取决于每个移动用户的个别需要,该移动用户可能从一个网孔中的一个位置移动到另一位置,或从一个网孔移动到相邻的或邻近的网孔。With continued reference to FIG. 1, a plurality of mobile stations M 1 -M 10 may be found in cells C 1 -C 10 . Again, although only 10 mobile stations are shown in Figure 1, in practice the actual number of mobile stations can be much greater and will greatly exceed the number of base stations. Also, while mobile stations M1-M10 may not be found in some of the cells C1-C10 , the presence or absence of The mobile stations M1 - M10 depend on the individual needs of each mobile subscriber, which may move from one location in one cell to another, or from one cell to an adjacent or neighboring cell .
每个移动站M1-M10正如在现有技术所公知的那样,包括发射机、接收机、控制器和用户接口,例如电话手机。每个移动站M1-M10被分配一个移动识别号(MIN),在美国该号是一个移动用户电话号薄号码的数字表示。MIN限定了在无线通路上的该移动用户的预订和在呼叫始发时从移动站发送到MSC20和在呼叫终结时从MSC20发送到该移动站。每个移动站M1-M10还由一个电子序号(ESN)识别,该序号是由工厂设置的、“不可以改变的”号码,用于防止未经授权使用该移动站。例如,在呼叫始发时,移动站将把ESN发送到MSC20。MSC20将接收的ESN与已报告被偷的移动站的“黑名单”的ESN进行比较。如果发现相一致,则将拒绝接入该被偷移动站。Each mobile station M1 - M10 includes a transmitter, a receiver, a controller and a user interface, such as a telephone handset, as is known in the art. Each mobile station M1 - M10 is assigned a Mobile Identification Number (MIN), which in the United States is a numerical representation of a mobile subscriber directory number. The MIN defines the mobile subscriber's subscription on the radio path and is sent from the mobile station to the
每个网孔C1-C10被分配给由相关政府机构,例如在美国的联邦通信委员会(FCC)指定给该整个蜂窝系统的无线频率(RF)信道的一个子集。每个RF信道的子集被分为若干话音或语音信道,这些信道被用于话音交谈,和至少一个寻呼/连接或控制信道,该控制信道被用于在其复盖区内的每个基站B1-B10和移动站M1-M10之间传送管理数据消息。每个RF信道包括在基站与移动站之间的双工信道(双向无线传输通路)。RF信道包括一对独立的频率,一个频率由基站用于发送(由移动站接收)和一个频率由移动站用于发送(由基站接收)。在基站B1-B10中每个信道单元通常工作在分配给该相应网孔的一个预选的无线信道上,即信道单元的发射机(TX)和接收机(RX)被分别调谐到不能改变的一对发射和接收频率上。但是,每个移动站M1-M10的收发信机(TX/RX)可以调谐到系统所规定的任何无线信道上。Each cell C1 - C10 is assigned to a subset of the radio frequency (RF) channels assigned to the overall cellular system by a relevant government agency, such as the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) in the United States. Each subset of RF channels is divided into several voice or voice channels, which are used for voice conversations, and at least one paging/connection or control channel, which is used for each Management data messages are communicated between base stations B1 - B10 and mobile stations M1 - M10 . Each RF channel comprises a duplex channel (two-way radio transmission path) between a base station and a mobile station. The RF channel consists of a pair of independent frequencies, one frequency used by the base station for transmission (received by the mobile station) and one frequency used by the mobile station for transmission (received by the base station). In the base stations B 1 -B 10 , each channel unit usually works on a pre-selected radio channel assigned to the corresponding cell, that is, the transmitter (TX) and receiver (RX) of the channel unit are respectively tuned to cannot be changed of a pair of transmit and receive frequencies. However, the transceiver (TX/RX) of each mobile station M1 - M10 can be tuned to any radio channel specified by the system.
取决于容量的需要,一个网孔可以具有15个话音信道,而另外一个网孔可以具有超过100个话音信道,和相应的信道单元。然而,一般来说,在每个无方向性网孔或由一个基站服务的扇区网孔中仅有一个控制信道(CC),即服务于无方向性的网孔的基站(图1)将具有一个控制信道单元,而服务于三个扇区网孔的基站(图2)将具有三个控制信道单元。已分配给任何已知网孔的RF(控制和话音)信道按照现有技术中公知的频率再用的方案可以再分配给远距离的网孔。为了避免无线干扰,在同一网孔中的所有无线信道将工作在不同的频率上,进而,在任何一个网孔中的无线信道将工作在与任何邻近网孔所使用的频率不同的一组频率上。Depending on capacity needs, one cell may have 15 voice channels, while another cell may have more than 100 voice channels, and corresponding channel units. In general, however, there is only one control channel (CC) in each non-directional cell or sector cell served by one base station, i.e. the base station serving the non-directional cell (Fig. 1) will With one control channel element, a base station (FIG. 2) serving three sector cells will have three control channel elements. RF (control and voice) channels already assigned to any known cell can be reassigned to distant cells according to frequency reuse schemes known in the art. In order to avoid wireless interference, all wireless channels in the same cell will operate on different frequencies, and in turn, the wireless channels in any one cell will operate on a different set of frequencies than those used by any adjacent cells superior.
当在空闲状态(接通电源但未使用),每个移动站M1-M10调谐到和然后连续监视最强的控制信道(一般地讲,此刻移动站所在的网孔的控制信道)和可以通过与移动交换中心MSC20相连的对应于基站B1-B10中的一个基站接收或开始一个电话呼叫。当在网孔之间移动时,同时处于空闲状态时,该移动站将最终“失去”在“老的”网孔的控制信道的无线连接并转到“新的”网孔的控制信道。控制信道的初始调谐和改变两者都是在蜂窝系统操作中通过扫描所有控制信道寻找“最佳”控制信道自动实现的(在美国在每个AMPS系统中有21个“专用”控制信道,即它们的TX/RX频率被预先确定和不能改变的,这意味着移动站必须扫描最大数目21个信道)。当找到一个具有良好接收质量的控制信道时,该移动站仍然调谐到这个信道,直到质量重新变坏为止。在这种方式中,所有移动站总是与系统“相接触”。When in the idle state (powered on but not in use), each mobile station M 1 -M 10 tunes to and then continuously monitors the strongest control channel (generally, the control channel of the cell the mobile station is in at the moment) and A telephone call can be received or initiated via a corresponding one of the base stations B1 - B10 connected to the mobile switching center MSC20. While moving between cells, while idle, the mobile station will eventually "lose" the radio connection on the control channel of the "old" cell and switch to the control channel of the "new" cell. Both the initial tuning and the change of control channels are performed automatically during cellular system operation by scanning all control channels for the "best" control channel (there are 21 "dedicated" control channels in each AMPS system in the United States, i.e. Their TX/RX frequencies are predetermined and cannot be changed, which means that the mobile station has to scan a maximum number of 21 channels). When a control channel with good reception quality is found, the mobile station remains tuned to this channel until the quality deteriorates again. In this manner, all mobile stations are always "in touch" with the system.
当在空闲(备用)状态时,每个移动站M1-M10不断地确定是否已经接到了通过控制信道对它寻址的寻呼消息。例如,当一个普通(陆线)用户呼叫一个移动用户时,该呼叫从PSTN被传送到MSC20,在MSC20对所拨号码进行分析。如果所拨号码是有效的,则MSC20请求一些或全部基站B1-B10通过它们相应的网孔C1-C10寻呼该被叫移动站。每个收到来自MSC20请求的基站B1-B10则将通过相应网孔的控制信道发送包含在该被叫移动站的MIN中的寻呼消息。每个空闲移动站M1-M10将通过正被监视的控制信道接收的寻呼消息中的MIN与在移动站存储的MIN相比较。与MIN相符合的被叫移动站通过控制信道自动向基站发送寻呼响应,该基站再向MSC20发送寻呼响应。While in the idle (standby) state, each mobile station M1 - M10 continuously determines whether a paging message addressed to it via the control channel has been received. For example, when a normal (landline) subscriber calls a mobile subscriber, the call is transferred from the PSTN to the
当收到寻呼响应时,MSC20在网孔中选择一个接收寻呼响应的可用话音信道,接通所选择的话音信道的收发信机,和经控制信道要求在该网孔中的基站指令移动站调谐到所选话音信道上(MSC在任何时间都保持在其服务区中所有信道的表和它们的状态,即空闲、忙、阻塞等等)。一旦该移动站调谐到所选择的话音信道上就接通了连接。When a paging response is received, the
另一方面,当一个移动用户例如通过拨普通用户的电话号码和按下在移动站电话手机上的“发送”键开始一个呼叫时,该移动站的MIN和ESN和所拨的号码通过控制信道被发送到基站,并且传送到批准该移动站的MSC20,分配一个话音信道,和如前所述为交谈建立一个接通连接。On the other hand, when a mobile subscriber initiates a call by, for example, dialing a regular subscriber's telephone number and pressing the "send" key on the mobile station's telephone handset, the MIN and ESN of the mobile station and the dialed number pass through the control channel is sent to the base station and communicated to the
如果在谈话状态下该移动站在网孔之间移动,MSC将执行从老的基站向新的基站的呼叫的越区切换。MSC在新的网孔中选择一个可用话音信道,然后命令老的基站在老的网孔中的当前的话音信道上向移动站发送一个越区切换消息,该消息通知移动站调谐到在新的网孔中所选择的话音信道上。越区切换消息是以“空格和脉冲串”模式发送的,引起短的但在谈活中很难发现的中断。当收到越区切换消息时,移动站调谐到新的话音信道上和由MSC经由新的网孔建立一个接通连接。在老的网孔中的老的话音信道在MSC中被标志为空闲和可以用于另外的谈话。If the mobile station moves between cells while in conversation, the MSC will perform a handoff of the call from the old base station to the new base station. The MSC selects an available voice channel in the new cell, and then orders the old base station to send a handover message to the mobile station on the current voice channel in the old cell, which notifies the mobile station to tune to the new cell. on the selected voice channel in the cell. Handoff messages are sent in a "space and burst" mode, causing short but hard-to-find interruptions during conversations. When the handover message is received, the mobile station tunes to the new voice channel and a connected connection is established by the MSC via the new cell. The old voice channel in the old cell is marked as free in the MSC and can be used for further conversations.
除了呼叫始发和寻呼响应外,AMPS移动站可以接入蜂窝系统进行登记。在AMPS中可能有两类登记:(ⅰ)周期登记,是根据时间,或者更具体地讲是根据由基站发送的REGIP值(“当前时间”)和REGINCR值(“登记周期”)以及存储在移动站中的NXTREG值(“唤醒时间”),和(ⅱ)根据所在位置的系统区域登记,或更具体地讲根据在正在服务的蜂窝系统中发送的系统识别(SID)。周期登记可用于确定是否一个移动站是有效的(在无线电范围内并被接通)或不在蜂窝系统中。系统区域登记可专用于确定何时一个移动站已跨越一个蜂窝系统到另外一个系统的边界。In addition to call origination and page response, AMPS mobile stations can access the cellular system for registration. Two types of registrations are possible in AMPS: (i) Periodic registrations, which are time-based, or more specifically based on the REGIP ("current time") and REGINCR values ("registration period") sent by the base station and stored in The NXTREG value ("wake-up time") in the mobile station, and (ii) based on the system area registration of the location, or more specifically the system identification (SID) transmitted in the serving cellular system. Periodic registration can be used to determine whether a mobile station is active (in radio range and switched on) or not in the cellular system. System area registration may be used exclusively to determine when a mobile station has crossed the boundary from one cellular system to another.
当在正向控制信道(基站到移动站)上收到REGID消息时,如果在正在服务的蜂窝系统中登记是允许的,则移动站比较REGID值与NXTRECT值,和比较最后收到的SID与移动站最后寄存的蜂窝系统的SID值。如果REGID值大于或等于NXTREG值,表示周期寄存是正确的,或者最后接收的SID值不同于最后存储的SID值,表示该移动站已从一个蜂窝系统移动到另一个蜂窝系统,因为最后的成功的登记,该移动站将通过反向控制信道(移动站到基站)自动地发送一个登记接入消息和在接收到在正向控制信道上的登记证实消息以后用最后收到的REGID值与REGINCR值之和更新NXTREG值(在每次呼叫始发或寻呼响应后移动站也更新NXTREG值)。无线传输的格式When a REGID message is received on the forward control channel (base station to mobile station), the mobile station compares the REGID value with the NXTRECT value, and compares the last received SID with the NXTRECT value if registration is permitted in the serving cellular system. The SID value of the cellular system where the mobile station was last registered. If the REGID value is greater than or equal to the NXTREG value, indicating that the periodic registration is correct, or the last received SID value is different from the last stored SID value, indicating that the mobile station has moved from one cellular system to another because the last successful registration, the mobile station will automatically send a registration access message over the reverse control channel (mobile station to the base station) and after receiving the registration confirmation message on the forward control channel with the last received REGID value and REGINCR The sum of the values updates the NXTREG value (the mobile station also updates the NXTREG value after each call origination or page response). Format of wireless transmission
从其开始,在蜂窝系统中的无线传输格式已经是模拟频率调制(FM)。在每个网孔中,话音信号(模拟)和数据(数字)信号形成到发射机(在基站或移动站)的输入信号,产生具有对应于分配给该网孔的频率之一的一个恒定频率的正弦载波。利用FM,载波频率以正比于输入信号的瞬时幅度被调制(变化)。已调载波占有额定中心频率(未调载波频率)的相当窄的频谱范围。产生的在未调制(中心)频率周围的已调载波频率的频偏通常被限制在某一带宽之内(利用带通滤波器),例如在美国是30KHz,以避免邻近RF信道的重叠和引起邻近信道干扰。因此,每个模拟话音信道占30KHz频谱,而话音会话要求60KHz。Since its inception, the wireless transmission format in cellular systems has been analog Frequency Modulation (FM). In each cell, voice (analog) and data (digital) signals form the input signal to the transmitter (at the base or mobile station), resulting in a constant frequency corresponding to one of the frequencies assigned to that cell sine carrier. With FM, the carrier frequency is modulated (varied) in proportion to the instantaneous amplitude of the input signal. The modulated carrier occupies a relatively narrow spectral range of the nominal center frequency (the unmodulated carrier frequency). The resulting frequency offset of the modulated carrier frequency around the unmodulated (center) frequency is usually limited to a certain bandwidth (using a bandpass filter), e.g. 30KHz in the US, to avoid overlapping of adjacent RF channels and causing Adjacent channel interference. Therefore, each analog voice channel occupies 30KHz of spectrum, while a voice session requires 60KHz.
因此,在常规的AMPS系统中,模拟话音信号调制用于通过无线信道传输的载波。AMPS系统利用模拟调频(FM),该系统是一种每载波单信道(SCPC)系统,即每个RF信道有一个话音电路(电话会话)。在HMPS系统中的无线信道接入方案是频分多址(FDMA)方案,在FDMA中,多个用户具有到同一组RF信道的入口,根据要求每个用户分配一个可用RF信道,和不同用户分配不同的RF信道。从模拟向数字转移Thus, in a conventional AMPS system, an analog voice signal modulates a carrier for transmission over a wireless channel. The AMPS system utilizes analog frequency modulation (FM), which is a single channel per carrier (SCPC) system, ie, one voice circuit (telephone conversation) per RF channel. The wireless channel access scheme in the HMPS system is a frequency division multiple access (FDMA) scheme. In FDMA, multiple users have access to the same group of RF channels, and each user is assigned an available RF channel according to requirements, and different users Assign different RF channels. Moving from Analog to Digital
最近的发展已开创了蜂窝通信的新的数字时代。转至数字背后的主要推动力是希望增加频谱效率,以满足对系统容量日益增长的需要。由于每个蜂窝系统被分配有限数量的无线频谱,通过降低每个话音信道所要求的带宽量或者相反通过几个话音会话之间共享每个RF信道可以增加容量。利用数字技术这是有可能实现的。Recent developments have ushered in a new digital era of cellular communications. The main driving force behind the move to digital is the desire to increase spectral efficiency to meet the growing demands on system capacity. Since each cellular system is allocated a finite amount of radio spectrum, capacity can be increased by reducing the amount of bandwidth required for each voice channel or conversely by sharing each RF channel between several voice sessions. This is possible with digital technology.
通过在调制和传输之前对来自几个话音电路的话音进行编码(数字化和压缩),不是仅由一个模拟话音信道(一个话音会话)所占用,而是单个RF话音信道可以由几个数字话音信道所共享。以这种方式,无须增加话音信道的带宽,信道容量和整个系统容量即可显著增加。作为一种必然结果,蜂窝无线系统能够以相当低的成本,例如在基站中要求较少数量的信道单元(收发信机)为相当大量的移动站服务。另外,数字格式容易形成数字网络形式的蜂窝网。By encoding (digitizing and compressing) the voice from several voice circuits before modulation and transmission, instead of being occupied by only one analog voice channel (one voice session), a single RF voice channel can be occupied by several digital voice channels shared. In this way, the channel capacity and overall system capacity can be increased significantly without increasing the bandwidth of the voice channel. As a corollary, cellular radio systems are able to serve a relatively large number of mobile stations at relatively low cost, eg requiring a relatively small number of channel elements (transceivers) in the base station. In addition, the digital format readily forms a cellular network in the form of a digital network.
在美国,已经在电子工业协会(EIA)和电信工业协会的带领下从模拟向数字转移,EIA/TIA已经承担了系统地提出公共空中接口标准的任务以满足下一代数字蜂窝系统的工业要求。迄今,EIA/TIA已出版了根据不同无线信道多址方案的两种单独的空中接口标准。第一个EIA/TIA阶段性标准(IS)是建立在时分多址(TDMA)方案基础上的,并且称为“双模式移动站-基站兼容标准”(IS-54B)。第二个标准是建立在码分多址方案(COMA)基准上的,并且称为“双模式宽带扩频蜂窝系统的移动站-基站兼容标准”(作为IS-95出版的PN-3118)。这些标准援引在此供参考(IS-54B和PN-3118的各种修订版本的付本可从电子工业协会得到,地址为:2001 Pennsylvania Avennue,N.W.,Washington D.C.20006。)In the United States, the transition from analog to digital has been led by the Electronics Industries Association (EIA) and the Telecommunications Industry Association, and EIA/TIA has taken on the task of systematically proposing common air interface standards to meet the industry requirements for next-generation digital cellular systems. To date, EIA/TIA has published two separate air interface standards based on different wireless channel multiple access schemes. The first EIA/TIA Interim Standard (IS) is based on the Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) scheme and is called the "Dual Mode Mobile Station-Base Station Compatible Standard" (IS-54B). The second standard is based on the Code Division Multiple Access scheme (COMA) benchmark and is called "Mobile Station-Base Station Compatible Standard for Dual-Mode Wideband Spread Spectrum Cellular Systems" (PN-3118 published as IS-95). These standards are hereby incorporated by reference (copies of various revisions of IS-54B and PN-3118 are available from the Electronic Industries Association, 2001 Pennsylvania Avenue, N.W., Washington D.C. 20006.)
在这两个标准中的术语“双模式”表示系统工作在模拟或数字模式的能力。模拟的操作模式使用模拟FM和利用以AMPS标准为基础的老的EIA/TIA-553标准。数字操作模式使用TDMA(IS-54B)或CDMA(PN-3118)。双模式能力通过逐渐减少模拟能力容易推广应用数字系统,即把RF信道的模拟FM业务去掉以提供数字业务。这被认为是容易从模拟向数字转变合乎要求的一步和提供称之为与现存模拟系统的“落后的”的兼容性。虽然模拟和数字操作模式可以单独存在,但目的是使它们共存,至少在短的时期内,为了允许在现存系统中漫游,这些系统不能推广新的数字技术。在转变阶段,现存的仅是模拟的移动站将继续提供服务,而同时有数字能力的移动站和基站的使用变得更加广泛。The term "dual mode" in both standards refers to the ability of a system to operate in either analog or digital mode. The analog mode of operation uses analog FM and utilizes the old EIA/TIA-553 standard based on the AMPS standard. Digital modes of operation use TDMA (IS-54B) or CDMA (PN-3118). The dual-mode capability facilitates popularization and application of digital systems by gradually reducing analog capabilities, that is, removing analog FM services from RF channels to provide digital services. This is considered a desirable step to ease the transition from analog to digital and to provide what is known as "backward" compatibility with existing analog systems. While analogue and digital modes of operation can exist separately, the aim is for them to co-exist, at least in the short term, in order to allow roaming within existing systems that cannot promote new digital technologies. During the transition phase, existing analog-only mobile stations will continue to provide service, while the use of digital-capable mobile stations and base stations becomes more widespread.
遵循规定的规范(IS-54B或PN-3118)的移动站可以从仅是模拟的基站、仅是数字的基站或模拟-数字(双模式)基站得到服务。服务移动站的系统类型将取决于该移动站的地理区域中的数字服务(TOMA或CDMA)的可利用性和该移动用户的选择。在呼叫建立或越区切换时,双模式移动站可以接入模拟话音信道(AVC)或可以选择地接入数字话务信道(DTC)。然而,仅是模拟的或仅是数字的移动站仅能分别指定为AVC或DTC。TDMA系统A mobile station following the specified specification (IS-54B or PN-3118) can be served from an analog-only base station, a digital-only base station, or an analog-digital (dual mode) base station. The type of system serving a mobile station will depend on the availability of digital services (TOMA or CDMA) in the mobile station's geographic area and the mobile subscriber's choice. A dual-mode mobile station can access an analog voice channel (AVC) or optionally a digital traffic channel (DTC) during call setup or handoff. However, analog-only or digital-only mobile stations can only be designated as AVC or DTC, respectively. TDMA system
TDMA是一种多址方案,它根据早已用于陆线电话网的时分复用(TDM)技术,实现在一个实际信道上同时进行多个电话交谈。在有线电话网络中,由本地电话用户通过单独线路(用户环路)向本地电话公司(电信公司)的中心局发送的模拟话音信号被连续取样和样值的幅度被量化,然后在一种称为脉冲编码调制(PCM)的处理过程中被编码为由恒定幅度脉冲代表的二进制数。预定数目PCM信道(数字话音信道)以一系列帧的形式被发送,每帧包含有来自每个PCM信道的信息脉冲串(编码的样值)。在实际信道上,例如铜线设备发送的每个帧中来自不同PCM信道的脉冲串占有不同的时隙(时间间隔)。多数长途电话呼叫是使用TDM的交换体系发送的。这种技术也可以应用到蜂窝无线系统的RF信道的传输。TDMA is a multiple-access scheme that enables multiple simultaneous telephone conversations on one physical channel, based on time-division multiplexing (TDM) techniques already used in landline telephone networks. In the wired telephone network, the analog voice signal sent by the local telephone user to the central office of the local telephone company (telecom company) through a separate line (subscriber loop) is continuously sampled and the amplitude of the samples is quantized, and then in a method called Processes for Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) are encoded as binary numbers represented by pulses of constant amplitude. A predetermined number of PCM channels (digital voice channels) are transmitted in a series of frames, each frame containing a burst of information (encoded samples) from each PCM channel. On an actual channel, for example, bursts from different PCM channels occupy different time slots (time intervals) in each frame sent by copper wire equipment. Most long-distance telephone calls are routed using the TDM switching system. This technique can also be applied to the transmission of RF channels in cellular radio systems.
以TDM模式操作的RF信道被分为一系列重复的时隙(周期性的时间间隔串),每个时隙含有来自不同数据源的信息脉冲串,例如来自话音电路源编码器的编码话音。时隙被分组为预定持续期间的帧。每帧的时隙数目随着在给定数字信道的编码速率、RF信道的调制电平和带宽的RF信道上试图容纳的数字信道数而变化。在一帧中的每个时隙通常代表不同的数字信道。因此,在RF信道上每个TDM帧的长度是同一数字信道(分配给同一用户)所用的两个重复时隙之间的最小时间量。换言之,每个TDM帧包含每个用户不多于一个时隙。An RF channel operating in TDM mode is divided into a series of repeating time slots (periodic trains of time intervals), each time slot containing a burst of information from a different data source, such as encoded speech from a voice circuit source encoder. Timeslots are grouped into frames of predetermined duration. The number of time slots per frame varies with the number of digital channels one is trying to accommodate on the RF channel given the coding rate of the digital channel, the modulation level of the RF channel, and the bandwidth of the RF channel. Each time slot in a frame usually represents a different digital channel. Thus, the length of each TDM frame on the RF channel is the minimum amount of time between two repeating time slots used by the same digital channel (assigned to the same user). In other words, each TDM frame contains no more than one time slot per user.
按照IS-54B,取决于每个数字话音信道所用的话音编码器的源速率(调制电平和信道宽度按IS-54B设置),每个TDM RF信道能够传送三到六个数字话信道(三个到六个电话会话)。每个数字话务信道(DTC)的话音编码器可以工作在全速率或半速率(全速率话音编码器期望用于不久的将来,直至半速率编码器已发展产生可以接收的话音质量为止)。全速率的DTC在给定时间周期中要求半速率DTC两倍那么多的时隙。在IS-54B中,每个TDM RF信道能传送多达三个全速率DTC或六个半速率DTC。According to IS-54B, each TDM RF channel can carry three to six digital voice channels (three to six phone sessions). The vocoder for each digital traffic channel (DTC) can operate at either full rate or half rate (full rate vocoders are expected to be used in the near future until half rate coders have been developed to produce acceptable voice quality). Full rate DTC requires twice as many slots in a given time period as half rate DTC. In IS-54B, each TDM RF channel can carry up to three full-rate DTCs or six half-rate DTCs.
IS-54B的TDC RF信道的帧结构如图3所示。TDM信道占用现存模拟系统的一个30KHz信道。在TDM RF信道的每个“帧”中,包括6个相等大小的时隙(1-6),其帧长度为40ms(每秒25帧)。每个全速率DTC利用如图3所示的帧的两个相等间隔的时隙,即时隙1和4,或时隙2和5,或时隙3和6。当工作在全速率时,TDM RF信道被分配给三个用户(A-C),即用户A分配图3所示帧的时隙1和4;用户B分配图3所示帧的时隙2和5;和用户C分配图3所示帧的时隙3和6(因此,对于全速率,每个TDM帧实际上包括三个时隙而不是六个时隙,是20ms长而不是40ms长)。每个半速率DTC利用图3所示帧的一个时隙。在半速率中,TDM RF信道可以分配给六个用户(A-F),每个用户A-F分配图3所示帧的六个时隙中的一个时隙(对于半速率,每TDM帧实际包括六个时隙,与在IS-54B中“帧”的定义相符合)。The frame structure of the TDC RF channel of IS-54B is shown in Figure 3. The TDM channel occupies a 30KHz channel of the existing analog system. In each "frame" of a TDM RF channel, there are 6 equally sized time slots (1-6) with a frame length of 40ms (25 frames per second). Each full rate DTC utilizes two equally spaced time slots of the frame as shown in FIG. 3, namely
因此,与模拟FDMA蜂窝系统不同,在上述系统中基站和移动站通过一个RF信道连续发送和接收,而TDMA蜂窝系统工作在缓冲和脉冲串不连续传送模式。每个移动站在RF信道的指定时隙上发送(和接收)。例如,在全速率下,用户A的移动站将在时隙1发送,时隙2保持,在时隙3接收,在时隙4发送,时隙5保持,和在时隙6接收,然后重复该循环(发送和接收的时隙彼此错开以避免利用双工器电路,否则将需要双工器来允许移动站的发射机和接收机同时工作)。因此,移动站在部分时间发射(或接收)(对于全速率是1/3时间,对于半速率是1/6时间),能够在其余时间关断以节电。CDMA系统Thus, unlike an analog FDMA cellular system, in which base stations and mobile stations continuously transmit and receive over one RF channel, a TDMA cellular system operates in a buffered and burst discontinuous transmission mode. Each mobile station transmits (and receives) on assigned time slots of the RF channel. For example, at full rate, user A's mobile station will transmit on
CDMA是一种多址方案,该方案是根据长期用于对抗无线频率干扰和防止对方截获的军事通信中的扩频通信技术而发展的。与FDMA和TDMA系统不同,其中的每个传输(信号)在任何给定时间被限制在其自己的单独频率上和与邻近信道相隔离的其自己的不同信道上,CDMA系统在同一频谱段同时发送多个信号。两种主要扩频技术是跳频扩频和直接序列或噪声调制扩频。CDMA is a multiple access scheme based on the spread spectrum communication technology that has long been used in military communications to combat radio frequency interference and prevent interception by the opponent. Unlike FDMA and TDMA systems, where each transmission (signal) at any given time is confined to its own separate frequency and its own distinct channel isolated from adjacent channels, CDMA systems simultaneously Send multiple signals. The two main spread spectrum techniques are frequency hopping spread spectrum and direct sequence or noise modulated spread spectrum.
在跳频扩频中,一个相当宽的频段(例如几兆赫)被分为大量的窄得多的信道。发射机从一个信道“跳”到另一个信道,即一个信道接一个信道地发送一个非常短的脉冲串。跳频序列是按照可用于发射机和接收机两者的一个键(密钥)而产生的伪随机序列。在整个传输过程中,从整个一段较长时间而不是从个别的脉冲串来看,显出占用整个的带宽,因此“扩展”频谱,虽然在任何瞬间,对于任何一个脉冲串,它仅占用信道的很小的百分数。许多用户能够遵循一种跳频的正交伪随机序列而共享同一信道进行每个用户的传输。In frequency hopping spread spectrum, a fairly wide frequency band (eg several megahertz) is divided into a large number of much narrower channels. The transmitter "hops" from channel to channel, that is, sends a very short burst from channel to channel. The hopping sequence is a pseudo-random sequence generated according to a key (secret key) that is available to both the transmitter and receiver. Appears to occupy the entire bandwidth, and thus "spread" the spectrum, as seen over a longer period of time throughout the transmission, rather than in individual bursts, although at any instant, for any one burst, it only occupies the channel a very small percentage. Many users can follow a frequency hopping orthogonal pseudo-random sequence and share the same channel for each user's transmission.
PN-3118标准利用直接序列或直接编码扩频,这是一种数字形式的噪声调制。在噪声调制中,原始信号被加到(与之相混合)具有已知特性的较强的类似于噪声的信号上。合成的信号调到一个载波,传输到接收机。在接收机中,输入到发射机的类似噪声的复份从接收信号中提取出来恢复原始信号。在直接序列中,一个高速率伪随机二进制序列用于类似噪声信号。这个伪噪声(PN)序列被加到数字信息信号(例如数字话音)上,合成的比特流被发送。在接收机中,该PN序列被提取产生信息信号。由于发射的信号具有高比特率(例如,100Mbps),所以与跳频扩频一样,要求“扩频”(即,宽带)(例如,100MHz)。然而,与跳频扩频不同,直接序列扩频传输在占用全部时间的整个信道带宽上。这里也是许多用户可利用每个用户被分配的用于产生正交随机序列的码而使许多用户共享同一信道,该序列与信息信号相混合。该信号通过利用相关器或者匹配滤波器在每个接收机中被分离出来,所述相关器或滤波器仅接收来自指定二进制序列的信号能量,以便进行扩频。The PN-3118 standard utilizes direct sequence or direct coded spread spectrum, which is a digital form of noise modulation. In noise modulation, the original signal is added to (mixed with) a stronger noise-like signal with known properties. The synthesized signal is tuned to a carrier and transmitted to the receiver. In the receiver, a noise-like replica of the input to the transmitter is extracted from the received signal to restore the original signal. In direct sequence, a high-rate pseudorandom binary sequence is used for a noise-like signal. This pseudo-noise (PN) sequence is added to a digital information signal (eg, digital speech) and the resulting bit stream is transmitted. In the receiver, this PN sequence is extracted to generate the information signal. Since the transmitted signal has a high bit rate (eg, 100 Mbps), "spread spectrum" (ie, wide band) is required (eg, 100 MHz), as with frequency hopping spread spectrum. However, unlike frequency hopping spread spectrum, direct sequence spread spectrum transmits over the entire channel bandwidth at all times. Here too, many users can share the same channel with each user being assigned a code for generating an orthogonal random sequence, which sequence is mixed with the information signal. The signal is separated in each receiver by using a correlator or matched filter which accepts only the signal energy from the designated binary sequence for spreading.
图4表示在PN-3118中规定的正向CDMA信道(基站到移动站)的整个结构。正向CDMA信道占用中心位于现存模拟系统的一个30KHz信道上的1.23MHz的频谱数。按照PN-3118,正向CDMA信道包括分配给不同用户的多达64个码信道(W0-W63),例如,一个引导信道(W0),一个同步信道(W32),七个寻呼信道(W1-W7),和五十五个话务信道(W8-W31和W33-W63)。这些码信道的每一个信道以1.23Mcps的固定时隙速(一个“PN时隙(chip)”是PN序列的一个比特)由正交PN序列扩频。多个正向CDMA信道可以由基站以频分复用方式传送。FIG. 4 shows the overall structure of the forward CDMA channel (base station to mobile station) specified in PN-3118. The forward CDMA channel occupies 1.23MHz of spectrum centered on a 30KHz channel of the existing analog system. According to PN-3118, forward CDMA channels include up to 64 code channels (W0-W63) assigned to different users, for example, one pilot channel (W0), one synchronization channel (W32), seven paging channels (W1 -W7), and fifty-five traffic channels (W8-W31 and W33-W63). Each of these code channels is spread by an orthogonal PN sequence at a fixed slot rate of 1.23 Mcps (a "PN chip" is one bit of the PN sequence). Multiple forward CDMA channels can be transmitted by the base station in a frequency division multiplexed manner.
引导信道传送一个未调制直接序列扩频信号,该信号在基站的每个有效正向CDMA信道中连续地发送。正在该基站的复盖区内工作的移动站利用这个信号进行同步(探测、定时和用于相关解调的相位参考)和用于在各基站间的信号强度比较,以确定什么时候越区切换。每个基站利用引导PN序列的时间偏移识别各正向CDMA信道。因此,不同的基站由不同的引导PN序列偏移来识别。The pilot channel conveys an unmodulated direct-sequence spread spectrum signal which is transmitted consecutively on each active forward CDMA channel of the base station. Mobile stations operating within the base station's coverage area use this signal for synchronization (sounding, timing, and phase reference for correlation demodulation) and for signal strength comparisons between base stations to determine when to handoff . Each base station uses the time offset of the pilot PN sequence to identify each forward CDMA channel. Therefore, different base stations are identified by different pilot PN sequence offsets.
同步信道是由移动站用来得到系统配置和定时信息(例如,系统识别、系统时间、引导PN序列偏移、寻呼信道数据率等等)的。每个话务信道(用户)是由一个区别的长码序列(1.23Mcps)识别的,该序列是在PN序列扩频之前加到信息比特上的。每个寻呼信道被分为多个80ms时隙。移动站可以工作在“分时隙的”或“不分时隙的”的任何一种模式,以便为在寻呼信道上接收寻呼和控制消息。在分时隙的模式中,移动站仅在某些指定时隙期间监视寻呼信道。在不分时隙的模式中,移动站监视寻呼信道的所有时隙。混合系统The synchronization channel is used by mobile stations to obtain system configuration and timing information (eg, system identification, system time, pilot PN sequence offset, paging channel data rate, etc.). Each traffic channel (user) is identified by a distinct long code sequence (1.23Mcps) which is added to the information bits before the PN sequence is spread. Each paging channel is divided into multiple 80ms time slots. The mobile station can operate in either "slotted" or "unslotted" mode in order to receive paging and control messages on the paging channel. In the slotted mode, the mobile station monitors the paging channel only during certain designated time slots. In the unslotted mode, the mobile station monitors all slots of the paging channel. hybrid system
某些系统利用混合的接入方法。例如,在IS-54B数字蜂窝标准中,利用FDMA与TDMA的组合。更具体地讲,IS-54B利用30KHz FDMA信道,该信道再细分为用于TDMA传输的3或6个时隙(每30KHz带宽3或6个话音呼叫)。类似地,CDMA系统也能是FDMA和CDMA技术的混合,在这种系统中,总系统带宽被分为一组宽带信道,每个信道含有大量CDMA信号。个人通信业务(PCS)Some systems utilize mixed access methods. For example, in the IS-54B digital cellular standard, a combination of FDMA and TDMA is utilized. More specifically, IS-54B utilizes a 30KHz FDMA channel subdivided into 3 or 6 time slots (3 or 6 voice calls per 30KHz bandwidth) for TDMA transmissions. Similarly, a CDMA system can also be a hybrid of FDMA and CDMA technologies, in which the total system bandwidth is divided into a set of wideband channels, each channel containing a large number of CDMA signals. Personal Communications Service (PCS)
蜂窝技术其起源在于汽车电话服务设施。然而,最近已向在家中、办公室和公共会议场所中使用轻型便携电话以及实际上在任何其他场所用户都能获得服务的方向发展。这种发展的下一步是出现“个人通信业务”(PCS)概念,或有时被称为“行走速度”的业务。这个概念是不仅电话呼叫,而且传真、计算机数据、寻呼消息和甚至视频信号都可以由移动中的用户发送和接收,例如,可在建筑物、工厂、仓库、购物中心、会议中心、机场或开阔地区内移动。Cellular technology has its origins in car telephone service facilities. Recently, however, there has been a move towards the use of lightweight portable phones in homes, offices and public meeting places, and virtually any other place where users can obtain services. The next step in this evolution was the concept of "Personal Communication Services" (PCS), or what is sometimes called "walking speed" services. The concept is that not only telephone calls, but also faxes, computer data, paging messages and even video signals can be sent and received by users on the move, for example, in buildings, factories, warehouses, shopping centers, conference centers, airports or Move in open areas.
PCS系统以低功率工作,和利用比常规的宽域(车辆的)蜂窝系统小的蜂窝结构,提供商业和其他应用所需要的高质量、高容量的无线复盖。通过减小基站的发射功率、网孔的大小(或网孔的半径)(为此,频率再用距离也被减小),使每个地理区域有更多信道。较小网孔的附加好处包括用户有较长的谈话时间(电池寿命时间),因为移动站将使用比较大网孔中明显低的发射功率。The PCS system operates at low power and utilizes a smaller cellular structure than conventional wide-area (vehicular) cellular systems, providing the high-quality, high-capacity wireless coverage required by commercial and other applications. By reducing the transmit power of the base station, the size of the cell (or the radius of the cell) (for this reason, the frequency reuse distance is also reduced), more channels per geographical area. Additional benefits of smaller cells include longer talk time (battery life time) for the user since the mobile station will use significantly lower transmit power than in larger cells.
工业界逐渐习惯利用术语“宏网孔”、“微网孔”、和“微微网孔”来区别对于特定应用(户内或户外)所要求的网孔的相对大小。术语“宏网孔”一般指在大小上可与常规蜂窝电话系统相比较的网孔(例如,1公里或更大半径)。宏网孔服务于快速移动的用户和复盖低的到中等的利用率的区域。而术语“微网孔”和“微微网孔”指逐渐小的网孔,这种网孔例如用于PCS系统。微网孔服务于慢速移动的用户和可以复盖公共的户内或户外区域,例如,会议中心或繁忙的街道。微微网孔可以复盖办公室走廊或高层建筑的楼层。微网孔和微微网孔还可以复盖高密度行人区或在常规蜂窝系统中的繁忙的大街(街道或高速公路)。The industry has grown accustomed to using the terms "macrocell," "microcell," and "picocell" to distinguish the relative sizes of cells required for a particular application (indoor or outdoor). The term "macrocell" generally refers to a cell comparable in size to a conventional cellular telephone system (eg, 1 kilometer or greater radius). Macrocells serve fast-moving users and cover low to moderate utilization areas. Instead, the terms "microcell" and "picocell" refer to progressively smaller cells, such as are used in PCS systems, for example. Microcells serve slow-moving users and can cover public indoor or outdoor areas, such as convention centers or busy streets. Picocells can cover office corridors or the floors of high-rise buildings. Microcells and picocells can also cover high-density pedestrian areas or busy avenues (streets or highways) in conventional cellular systems.
现已清楚,未来的蜂窝系统很可能实现一种宏网孔、微网孔和微微网孔的分层网孔结构。从一个系统(MSC)的观点看,在微网孔和微微网孔中的基站可以看作在毗邻的或重叠的宏网孔基站的延伸。在这种情况下,微网孔和微微网孔基站可以经过例如数字传输线路连接到宏网孔的基站上。另一方面,微网孔和微微网孔可以如宏网孔一样地看待和直接连接到MSC。It is now clear that future cellular systems are likely to implement a hierarchical cell structure of macrocells, microcells and picocells. From a system (MSC) point of view, base stations in microcells and picocells can be seen as extensions of adjacent or overlapping macrocell base stations. In this case, the microcell and picocell base stations may be connected to the macrocell base station via digital transmission lines, for example. On the other hand, microcells and picocells can be treated like macrocells and connected directly to the MSC.
从无线复盖的观点看,宏网孔、微网孔和微微网孔可以彼此区分,或者从另一方面讲,为了处理不同话务模式或无线电环境,使一个重叠在另外一个的上面。例如,各微网孔间的越区切换有时在街道角落附近执行起来可能是困难的,特别是用户移动得如此之快,以至于每秒信号强度变化超过20dB。在这种状态下,有可能以一种“伞形”宏网孔用于快速移动的用户和以微网孔用干慢速移动的用户。通过以不同方式管理不同类型的用户,微网孔间的越区切换可以避免快速移动用户所遭受的严重的街道角落效应。From a radio coverage point of view, macrocells, microcells and picocells can be differentiated from each other or, alternatively, superimposed one on top of the other in order to handle different traffic patterns or radio environments. For example, handoffs between microcells can sometimes be difficult to perform near street corners, especially if the user is moving so fast that the signal strength varies by more than 20 dB per second. In this state, it is possible to use a kind of "umbrella" macrocell for fast-moving users and a microcell for slow-moving users. By managing different types of users differently, handover between microcells can avoid the severe street corner effect suffered by fast-moving users.
可以很容易地理解到,寻求下一代蜂窝系统容量的改善可以由更先进的宏蜂窝技术来实现,例如,数字TDMA或CDMA,或通过将微网孔和微微网孔引入需要增容的特定的地区,或者利用两种方法的组合。因此,例如,模拟微网孔可以实现复盖“死点”(由于地形、地区、或其他限制阻止无线电信号穿透的地区)或热点(话务繁忙的地区)。在这个例子中,对于模拟移动站的现存用户基础可以改善复盖或容量。但是,微蜂窝概念在增容上的有效性通过使用要求有新的数字能力的移动站的数字技术可达到最大。控制信道It can be easily understood that seeking to improve the capacity of next-generation cellular systems can be achieved by more advanced macro-cellular technologies, such as digital TDMA or CDMA, or by introducing microcells and picocells into specific region, or use a combination of the two methods. Thus, for example, analog microcells may enable coverage of "dead spots" (areas where radio signals are prevented from penetrating due to terrain, region, or other constraints) or hot spots (areas with heavy traffic). In this example, coverage or capacity can be improved for the existing subscriber base of analog mobile stations. However, the effectiveness of the microcell concept in increasing capacity is maximized through the use of digital technology requiring mobile stations with new digital capabilities. control channel
继续需要服务现存的仅是模拟的移动站已导致订立在模拟控制信道(ACC)的IS-54B和PN-3118中的规范,这些规范是从原先的AMPS或等效的EIA/TIA-553标准继承而来的。按照EIA/TIA-553,在从基站向移动站的下行链路上的模拟正向控制信道(FOCC)以如图4所示的格式传送连续的消息(字)数据流。几种不同类型(功能分类)的消息可以在模拟的FOCC上发送。这些消息包括系统参数总开销消息(SPOM)、全局操作总开销消息(GAOM)、登记识别消息(REGID)、移动站控制消息例如寻呼消息和控制填充消息。SPOM、GOAM和REGID是总开销消息,它们将为在该基站的复盖区中全部移动站所用。总开销消息是按称为总开销消息序列(OMT)而以组进行发送的。每个OMT的第一个消息总是SPOM,该消息每0.8±0.3秒发送一次。The continuing need to serve existing analog-only mobile stations has led to the specification in IS-54B and PN-3118 of the Analog Control Channel (ACC), which is derived from the original AMPS or equivalent EIA/TIA-553 standard inherited. According to EIA/TIA-553, the analog forward control channel (FOCC) on the downlink from the base station to the mobile station carries a continuous stream of message (word) data in the format shown in FIG. Several different types (functional classes) of messages can be sent on a simulated FOCC. These messages include System Parameter Overhead Messages (SPOM), Global Operation Overhead Messages (GAOM), Registration Identification Messages (REGID), mobile station control messages such as paging messages, and control fill messages. SPOM, GOAM and REGID are overhead messages that will be used by all mobile stations in the base station's coverage area. Overhead messages are sent in groups called overhead message sequences (OMTs). The first message of each OMT is always SPOM, which is sent every 0.8±0.3 seconds.
如图4所示的模似FOCC的格式要求空闲的移动站侦听FOCC,以读出在每个OMT中所发送的全部消息(不是正在寻呼的消息),尽管包含在这些消息中的信息从一个OMT到下一个OMT可以是不变的。这一要求势必无必要地限制了移动站电池的寿命。然而,下一代数字蜂窝系统的一个目的是延长用户的“谈话时间”,即移动站电池的寿命。为此目的,序号为No.07/956,640的共同未决美国专利申请(援引于此供参考)公开了一种数字FOCC,该FOCC可以传送为模拟FOCC所规定的那类消息,但在一种格式中,允许空闲移动站当锁入该FOCC时读总开销消息,而之后仅当信息改变时读总开销消息,和在所有其他时间进入“休眠模式”。而在休眠模式中,该移动站关断大多数内部电路以节约电池功率。The FOCC-like format shown in Figure 4 requires an idle mobile station to listen to the FOCC to read all messages sent in each OMT (not the one being paged), although the information contained in these messages It may be constant from one OMT to the next. This requirement unnecessarily limits the life of the mobile station battery. However, one goal of next-generation digital cellular systems is to extend the user's "talk time," ie, the life of the mobile station battery. To this end, co-pending U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 07/956,640 (hereby incorporated by reference) discloses a digital FOCC that can transmit the type of messages specified for an analog FOCC, but in a In the format, an idle mobile station is allowed to read overhead messages when locked into the FOCC, and then only when the information changes, and to enter "sleep mode" at all other times. While in sleep mode, the mobile station turns off most internal circuits to conserve battery power.
上面引用的序号为07/956,640的共同未决美国专利申请表示一个数字控制信道(DCC)如何可以限定在IS-54B中规范的数字话务信道(DTC)旁边。参照图3,半速率DCC将占用每个410ms帧的6个时隙中的1个时隙,而全速率DCC将占用其中的两个时隙。为了附加DCC容量,附加的半速率或全速率DCC可以被限定在各DTC位置,直至载波上没有更多可用时隙为止(如果需要,DCC可以被限定在另外的载波上)。因此,每个IS-54B RF信道上可以仅传送DTC,仅传送DCC、或者DTC与DCC两者混合传送。在IS-54B帧结构中,每个RF信道可以具有多达3个全速率DTC/DCC,或者6个半速率DTC/DCC或它们之间的任何组合,例如,一个全速率和四个半速率DTC/DCC。Co-pending US Patent Application Serial No. 07/956,640 cited above shows how a Digital Control Channel (DCC) can be defined alongside the Digital Traffic Channel (DTC) specified in IS-54B. Referring to FIG. 3, half-rate DCC will occupy 1 of the 6 slots in each 410 ms frame, and full-rate DCC will occupy two of them. For additional DCC capacity, additional half-rate or full-rate DCCs can be defined at each DTC position until no more time slots are available on the carrier (DCCs can be defined on additional carriers if desired). Therefore, only DTC, only DCC, or a mixture of DTC and DCC can be transmitted on each IS-54B RF channel. In IS-54B frame structure, each RF channel can have up to 3 full rate DTC/DCC, or 6 half rate DTC/DCC or any combination between them, for example, one full rate and four half rate DTC/DCC.
然而,总的来说,DCC的传输速率不需要与在IS-54B中规定的半速率和全速率一致,DCC时隙的长度可以不是均匀的和可以不与DTC时隙的长度一致。图6表示按照一系列时隙组成的更一般的正面DCC的情况。这些DCC时隙可以按IS-54B RF信道限定,可以包括例如在TDM码流中的所有的第n个时隙。在这种情况下,每个DCC时隙的长度可以等于也可以不等于IS-54B的DTC时隙长度6.66ms(在每个40ms帧中有6个DTC时隙)。在另一方案(和不限制其他的各种方案)中,这些DCC时隙可以被限定在PN-3118规定的寻呼信道上,但是可以是也可以不是80ms长,这一长度是按照PIN-3118的每个寻呼信道时隙的长度。However, in general, the DCC transmission rate does not need to be consistent with the half rate and full rate specified in IS-54B, and the length of the DCC time slot may not be uniform and may not be consistent with the length of the DTC time slot. Figure 6 shows the more general case of frontal DCC organized as a series of time slots. These DCC slots may be defined per IS-54B RF channel and may include, for example, all nth slots in a TDM code stream. In this case, the length of each DCC slot may or may not be equal to the IS-54B DTC slot length of 6.66 ms (6 DTC slots in each 40 ms frame). In another approach (and without limitation to other alternatives), these DCC slots may be limited to the paging channel specified by PN-3118, but may or may not be 80 ms long, which is based on the PIN- 3118 The length of each paging channel slot.
如图6所示的DCC时隙可以被组成称为“超帧”的较高级的结构。每个超帧由传送不同种类信息的逻辑信道组成。在超帧中,一个或多个DCC时隙可以分配给每个逻辑信道。图6表示的示例性超帧至少包括三个逻辑信道,即广播控制信道(BCCH)、寻呼信道(PCH)和接入响应信道(ARCH)。在这个例子中,BCCH被分配6个DCC时隙,传送总开销消息。PCH被分配一个DCC时隙,传送寻呼消息。ARCH也被分配一个DCC时隙,传送信道分配和其他消息。图6的示例性超帧可以含有其他逻辑信道,包括附加寻呼信道。如果规定一个以上的PCH,则由不同序列(例如,MIN的最后数字)识别的不同移动站群可以分配不同的PCH。DCC slots as shown in Figure 6 may be organized into a higher level structure called a "superframe". Each superframe consists of logical channels that carry different kinds of information. In a superframe, one or more DCC slots may be allocated to each logical channel. The exemplary superframe shown in FIG. 6 includes at least three logical channels, namely Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH), Paging Channel (PCH) and Access Response Channel (ARCH). In this example, BCCH is assigned 6 DCC time slots to transmit overhead messages. PCH is assigned a DCC time slot to transmit paging messages. The ARCH is also assigned a DCC time slot to carry channel assignments and other messages. The exemplary superframe of Figure 6 may contain other logical channels, including additional paging channels. If more than one PCH is specified, different groups of mobile stations identified by different sequences (eg, the last digit of the MIN) may be assigned different PCHs.
为了有效的休眠模式操作和快速网孔选择的目的,BCCH可以分为多个子帧。申请号为No.07/956,640的共同未决美国专利申请公开了一种BCCH结构,在能接入系统之前(发出或接收一个呼叫),在加电源时(锁入DCC),它允许移动站仅读出最少信息量。在加电源以后,空闲移动站仅须有规律地监视在超帧中分配给它的PCH(寻呼时隙),在其他时隙期间可以返回休眠模式。For the purpose of efficient sleep mode operation and fast cell selection, the BCCH can be divided into multiple subframes. Co-pending U.S. Patent Application No. 07/956,640 discloses a BCCH structure that allows a mobile station to Only the minimum amount of information is read out. After power up, an idle mobile station only has to regularly monitor its assigned PCH (Paging Time Slot) in a superframe and can return to sleep mode during other time slots.
在一个方面,本发明提供了一种向远端站传送信息的方法,该方法包括将信息分组为多个时隙的步骤;将时隙分组为多个超帧的步骤;将超帧分组为多个寻呼帧的步骤;将在每个寻呼帧的多个时隙中的一个时隙分配给该远端站,所分配的时隙被用于寻呼该远端站的步骤;和在所分配的时隙中向远端站发送一个在寻呼帧中改变的指示的步骤。In one aspect, the present invention provides a method of transmitting information to a remote station, the method comprising the steps of grouping the information into a plurality of time slots; grouping the time slots into a plurality of superframes; grouping the superframes into the steps of a plurality of paging frames; allocating one of the plurality of time slots in each paging frame to the remote station, the allocated time slot being used for paging the remote station; and The step of sending an indication of the change in the paging frame to the remote station in the allocated time slot.
在另一个方面,本发明提供了一种一个远端站登记到一个通信系统的方法,该方法包括从系统向远端发送登记号码的步骤;在远端站中将接收的登记号码与存在存储器中的登记号码表相比较的步骤;如果在表中找到该登记号码则从远端站向系统发送一个登记消息的步骤;从系统向远端站发送一个登记号码表的步骤;和用从系统接收的登记号码表取代存储在远端站的登记号码表。In another aspect, the present invention provides a method of registering a remote station with a communication system, the method comprising the steps of sending a registration number from the system to the remote station; the steps of comparing the list of registration numbers in the list; the steps of sending a registration message from the remote station to the system if the registration number is found in the table; the steps of sending a list of registration numbers from the system to the remote station; and using the slave system The received list of registration numbers replaces the list of registration numbers stored at the remote station.
在另一个方面,本发明提供了一种用于确认各远端站登记的方法,每个远端站利用通信系统分配一个识别号码,包括接收各远端站发送的多个登记消息的步骤;和向至少两个远端站发送包含至少两个远端站的识别号码的确认消息。In another aspect, the present invention provides a method for validating the registration of remote stations, each remote station assigned an identification number using a communication system, comprising the steps of receiving a plurality of registration messages sent by the remote stations; and sending an acknowledgment message including the identification numbers of the at least two remote stations to the at least two remote stations.
在另一个方面,本发明提供了一种用于向远端站传送信息的方法,该方法包括将信息分组为多个重复的时隙的步骤;将多个时隙分组为多个超帧的步骤;将在超帧中的时隙分配到多个逻辑信道的步骤;和在至少一个逻辑信道中变化所发送的消息的重复速率的步骤。In another aspect, the present invention provides a method for transmitting information to a remote station, the method comprising the steps of grouping the information into a plurality of repeated time slots; grouping the plurality of time slots into a plurality of superframes steps; a step of allocating time slots in a superframe to a plurality of logical channels; and a step of varying a repetition rate of transmitted messages in at least one logical channel.
在另一个方面,本发明提供了一种在多个通信系统的一个系统中识别可为其服务的远端站的方法,该方法包括为每个系统分配一个话务员代码的步骤;在远端站存储与每个话务员代码相关的服务表的步骤;从远端发送请求话务员代码的步骤;和从一个系统向该远端站发送话务员代码的步骤。In another aspect, the present invention provides a method of identifying serviceable remote stations in one of a plurality of communication systems, the method comprising the steps of assigning each system an operator code; at the remote station the steps of storing a list of services associated with each operator code; the step of sending a request operator code from a remote station; and the step of sending an operator code from a system to the remote station.
在另一个方面,本发明提供了一种向远端站传送信息的方法,该方法包括将信息分组为多个时隙的步骤;将时隙分组为多个超帧的步骤;和在每个超帧的每个时隙中发送超帧相位信息,使得该远端站能识别每个超帧的开始。In another aspect, the present invention provides a method of transmitting information to a remote station, the method comprising the steps of grouping the information into a plurality of time slots; grouping the time slots into a plurality of superframes; and at each Superframe phase information is sent in each slot of a superframe so that the remote station can identify the start of each superframe.
在另一个方面,本发明提供了一种管理从通信系统向远端站传输消息的方法,该方法包括将每个消息分为第二层(L2)的帧的步骤;通过第一信道从系统向远端站发送各个帧的步骤;通过第二信道从系统向远端站发送该远端站的识别指示的步骤;如果该识别指示与存储在该远端站中的识别指示一致,则从远端站向上述系统通过第三信道发送一个是否每个帧都已正确地接收到的指示。In another aspect, the present invention provides a method of managing the transmission of messages from a communication system to a remote station, the method comprising the steps of dividing each message into Layer 2 (L2) frames; The step of sending each frame to the remote station; the step of sending the identification indication of the remote station from the system to the remote station through the second channel; if the identification indication is consistent with the identification indication stored in the remote station, then from The remote station sends an indication to the system over the third channel whether each frame has been received correctly.
在另外的方面中,本发明提供了一种将远端站登记到系统上的方法,该方法包括从系统向远端站发送一个含有在邻近网孔中通信信道表、是否在每个相应网孔已要求登记的指示和每个网孔信号强度滞后指示的消息;和如果在该相应网孔中要求登记,则利用信号强度滞后选择一个信道。In a further aspect, the present invention provides a method of registering a remote station with a system, the method comprising sending from the system to the remote station a message containing a list of communication channels in adjacent cells, whether they are in each corresponding cell an indication that a cell has required registration and a signal strength hysteresis indication message for each cell; and if registration is required in the corresponding cell, selecting a channel using the signal strength hysteresis.
通过参照下列附图,本技术领域的技术人员将对本发明有更好的理解,其多个目的与优点将变得十分清楚。Those skilled in the art will have a better understanding of the present invention, and its multiple objects and advantages will become apparent by referring to the following drawings.
图1表示一种常规蜂窝无线系统的结构;Figure 1 shows the structure of a conventional cellular radio system;
图2表示可以用于图1所示系统中的三个扇区网孔;Figure 2 shows three sector cells that may be used in the system shown in Figure 1;
图3表示按照一种公知蜂窝工业标准的IS-54B的正向时分多址(TDMA)信道的结构;Fig. 3 shows the structure of the forward time division multiple access (TDMA) channel according to IS-54B of a kind of known cellular industry standard;
图4表示按照另一种公知蜂窝工业标准的PN-3118的正向码分多址(CDMA)信道的结构;Fig. 4 shows the structure of the forward code division multiple access (CDMA) channel according to another kind of known cellular industry standard PN-3118;
图5表示由IS-54B和PN3118规定的正向模拟控制信道(ACC)的格式;Figure 5 shows the format of the forward analog control channel (ACC) specified by IS-54B and PN3118;
图6是具有分组为超帧的多个时隙的数字控制信道(DCC)的一般表示图;Figure 6 is a generalized representation of a digital control channel (DCC) having a plurality of time slots grouped into a superframe;
图7表示DCC的逻辑信道;Fig. 7 shows the logical channel of DCC;
图8表示一个示例性的TDMA帧结构;Fig. 8 represents an exemplary TDMA frame structure;
图9表示在DCC中示例性的时隙格式;Figure 9 shows an exemplary slot format in DCC;
图10表示在图9c中BRI字段;Figure 10 shows the BRI field in Figure 9c;
图11表示在信道编码之前的数据划分;Figure 11 shows the data division before channel coding;
图12表示CPE映射为时隙格式;Figure 12 shows that the CPE is mapped into a slot format;
图13表示在图9c中的R/N字段;Figure 13 shows the R/N field in Figure 9c;
图14表示在图9c中的CFSP字段;Figure 14 shows the CFSP field in Figure 9c;
图15表示特超帧结构;Figure 15 shows a hyperframe structure;
图16表示寻呼帧结构;Figure 16 shows the paging frame structure;
图17表示SMS帧结构;Figure 17 shows the SMS frame structure;
图18表示一个SMS子信道复用的例子;Figure 18 shows an example of SMS subchannel multiplexing;
图19表示在BCCH上广播的DCC的表;Figure 19 shows a table of DCCs broadcast on BCCH;
图20表示上行链路时隙和下行链路SCF标记之间的关系;Figure 20 shows the relationship between uplink slots and downlink SCF flags;
图21表示MS和BS之间的一个L3确认对话;Figure 21 shows an L3 confirmation dialogue between MS and BS;
图22A-L表示RACH层2帧;22A-L represent
图23A-C表示F-BCCH层2帧;Figures 23A-C represent F-
图24A-C表示E-BCCH层2帧;Figures 24A-C represent
图25A-C表示F-BCCH层2帧;Figures 25A-C represent F-
图26A-N表示SPACH层2帧;Figures 26A-N represent
图27A-B表示MS和BS的随机连接的过程;27A-B show the process of random connection between MS and BS;
图28A-B表示MS和BS以SPACH AR2模式工作;Figure 28A-B shows that MS and BS work in SPACH AR2 mode;
图29表示移动站状态图;Figure 29 shows a mobile station state diagram;
图30-37表示根据本发明证实过程的各方面;和Figures 30-37 represent aspects of the authentication process according to the present invention; and
图38说明一个示例性蜂窝移动无线电话系统。Figure 38 illustrates an exemplary cellular mobile radiotelephone system.
虽然以下的说明集中在与IS-54B相符的系统,但是本发明的原理同样适用于各种无线通信系统,例如蜂窝式和卫星无线电系统,而不管其特定的工作方式(模拟,数字,双重方式等)、接入技术(FDMA、TDMA、CDMA、混合的FDMA/TDMA/CDMA等),或者结构(宏网孔、微网孔、微微网孔等)。正如从前面的FDMA、TDMA和CDMA系统的讨论中所知道的,传递话音和/或数据的逻辑信道可在物理层级以不同的方法实现。实际的信道例如可以是相对窄的RF频带(FDMA),射频上的时隙(TDMA),唯一的码序列(CDMA)或者上述这些的组合。因此对本发明来说,术语“信道”意味着任何可传递话音和/或数据的实际信道,而不限于任何特定的工作方式、接入技术或系统结构。Although the following description focuses on IS-54B compliant systems, the principles of the present invention are equally applicable to various wireless communication systems, such as cellular and satellite radio systems, regardless of their particular mode of operation (analog, digital, dual mode etc.), access technology (FDMA, TDMA, CDMA, hybrid FDMA/TDMA/CDMA, etc.), or architecture (macrocell, microcell, picocell, etc.). As is known from the previous discussion of FDMA, TDMA and CDMA systems, logical channels carrying voice and/or data can be implemented in different ways at the physical level. The actual channel can be, for example, a relatively narrow RF frequency band (FDMA), time slots on a radio frequency (TDMA), a unique code sequence (CDMA), or a combination of these. Therefore, for the purposes of the present invention, the term "channel" means any actual channel that can carry voice and/or data, and is not limited to any specific mode of operation, access technology or system architecture.
下面的叙述与附录A的叙述一起提供在AVC,ACC,DTC和DCC工作的详细框架。下面的描述主要针对DCC空中接口并且分为不同的部分用于层1,层2和层3的操作。附录A提出了通过对IS-54B标准的修改对ACC,DTC和AVC的空中接口要求。在下面,术语“IS-54B”将意味着现有的IS-54B标准,或者由附录A修改的IS-54B标准,取决于其上下文。The following statements together with those in Appendix A provide a detailed framework for working in AVC, ACC, DTC and DCC. The following description is mainly for the DCC air interface and is divided into different sections for
术语汇编Glossary of terms
ACC: 模拟控制信道ACC: Analog Control Channel
AG: 缩短的保护时间AG: Reduced protection time
ARCH:接入响应信道ARCH: Access Response Channel
ARQ: 自动重新传输请求ARQ: automatic retransmission request
AVC: 模拟话音信道AVC: Analog Voice Channel
BC: 开始继续BC: start to continue
BCN: 广播信道改变通知标记BCN: Broadcast Channel Change Notification Flag
BER: 误码率BER: bit error rate
BMI: 基站,MSC的交互工作功能BMI: base station, interworking function of MSC
BMR: 基站测量要求BMR: Base Station Measurement Requirements
BP: 比特位置BP: bit position
BRI: 忙,保留,空闲(Busy Reserved Idle)BRI: Busy, Reserved, Idle (Busy Reserved Idle)
BS: 基站BS: base station
BSCO:基站查询(challenge)顺序BSCO: base station query (challenge) order
BSMC: 基站制造代码BSMC: Base Station Manufacturing Code
BT: 脉冲串类型BT: Burst type
BU: 脉冲串利用率BU: Burst Utilization
CDL: 编码的DCC定位CDL: Coded DCC positioning
CDVCC: 编码DVCCCDVCC: Coded DVCC
CLI: 持续长度指示符CLI: Persistence Length Indicator
CPE: 编码的部分回声CPE: Coded Partial Echo
CR: 连续重复CR: Continuous repetition
CRC: 循环冗余校验CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check
CSFP: 编码的超帧相位CSFP: Coded Superframe Phase
DCC: 数字控制信道DCC: Digital Control Channel
DL: DCC定位DL: DCC positioning
DTC: 数字业务信道DTC: Digital Traffic Channel
DVCC: 数字证实色码DVCC: Digital Verification Color Code
E-BCCH:延伸的广播控制信道E-BCCH: Extended Broadcast Control Channel
ECS: 延伸的广播信道周期开始ECS: Extended Advertisement Channel Period Begins
F-BCCH:快速广播控制信道F-BCCH: Fast Broadcast Control Channel
FRNO: 帧号FRNO: frame number
G:保护时间G: guard time
HP: 特超帧(Hyperframe)HP: Hyperframe
IDT: 移动站标识类型IDT: mobile station identification type
IMST: 国际移动站识别IMST: International Mobile Station Identification
L3DATA:层3数据L3DATA:
L3LI: 层3消息长度指示符L3LI:
MAC: 媒介接入控制MAC: Media Access Control
MACA: 移动指配信道的分配MACA: Mobile Assignment Channel Allocation
MAHO: 移动指配的过区切换MAHO: Mobile Assigned Handoff
MLRQ: 无线链路质量监视MLRQ: Radio Link Quality Monitoring
MS: 移动站MS: Mobile Station
MSC: 移动电话业务中心MSC: Mobile Telephony Service Center
MSID: 移动站识别MSID: Mobile Station Identification
PCH: 寻呼信道PCH: paging channel
PCON: 寻呼继续PCON: paging continue
PE: 部分回声PE: partial echo
PF: 寻呼帧PF: paging frame
PFM: 寻呼帧修改量(modifier)PFM: Paging frame modifier (modifier)
PREAM: 前置码PREAM: preamble
R: 斜升时间(Ramp time)R: Ramp time
R/N: 接收到/未收到R/N: received/not received
RACH: 随机接入控制信道RACH: random access control channel
RDCC: 反向数字控制信道RDCC: reverse digital control channel
RSS: 接收信号强度RSS: Received Signal Strength
RSVD: 保留RSVD: reserved
S-BCCH:短消息业务广播控制信道S-BCCH: Short Message Service Broadcast Control Channel
SAP: 业务接入点SAP: Business Access Point
SCF: 共用控制反馈SCF: Shared Control Feedback
SF: 超帧SF: super frame
SMS: 短消息业务SMS: short message service
SMSCH 短消息业务点对点信道SMSCH short message service point-to-point channel
SMSN: 广播短消息业务改变通知SMSN: Broadcast Short Message Service Change Notification
SOC: 系统操作码SOC: System Operation Code
SPACH: SMS、PCH和ARCHSPACH: SMS, PCH, and ARCH
SSD: 共享分离数据SSD: Share separate data
SYNC: 同步SYNC: synchronous
SYNC+: 对缩短的RACH脉冲串的附加同步SYNC+: additional synchronization to shortened RACH bursts
TDMA: 时分多址TDMA: Time Division Multiple Access
TID: 事务处理识别符TID: transaction identifier
WER: 字差错率DCC逻辑信道定义WER: Word Error Rate DCC Logical Channel Definition
DCC包括图7中所示的逻辑信道。DCC逻辑信道包括BCCH(F-BCCH,E-BCCH,S-BCCH)、SPACH、PCH、ARCH、SMSCH和RACH。DCC includes logical channels shown in FIG. 7 . DCC logical channels include BCCH (F-BCCH, E-BCCH, S-BCCH), SPACH, PCH, ARCH, SMSCH and RACH.
广播控制信道(BCCH)Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH)
BCCH是用于总体地指F-BCCH、E-BCCH和S-BCCH逻辑信道的首字母缩写。一般地讲,这三种逻辑信道用于传送总的、与系统相关的信息。这三种信道的特性是:单方向的(下行)、共用的、点对多点和无证实的。BCCH is an acronym used to collectively refer to F-BCCH, E-BCCH, and S-BCCH logical channels. Generally speaking, these three logical channels are used to convey general, system-related information. The characteristics of these three channels are: unidirectional (downlink), shared, point-to-multipoint, and unacknowledged.
快速广播控制信道(F-BCCH)这种逻辑信道用于广播时间要求严格的系统信息。Fast Broadcast Control Channel (F-BCCH) is a logical channel used to broadcast time-critical system information.
延伸的BCCH(E-BCCH) Extended BCCH (E-BCCH)
这种逻辑信道用于广播时间要求不如在F-BCCH上发送的信息严格的系统信息。This logical channel is used to broadcast system information with less stringent time requirements than information sent on the F-BCCH.
SMS广播BCCH(S-BCCH) SMS broadcast BCCH (S-BCCH)
这种逻辑信道用于广播用在SMS广播业务的短消息。This logical channel is used to broadcast short messages used in the SMS broadcast service.
SMS点对点、寻呼和接入响应信道(SPACH)SMS point-to-point, paging and access response channel (SPACH)
这种逻辑信道用于发送关于SMS点对点(SMSCH)寻呼的信息到特定的移动站,并且如下所述的,提供一条接入响应信道(ARCH)。SPACH可认为是被进一步分为3种的逻辑信道:SMSCH、ARCH和PCH,正如也在下面叙述的。SPACH的特性是:单方向的(下行)、共用的和无证实的。SMSCH是点对多点的。ARCH和SMSCH是点对点的。This logical channel is used to send information about SMS point-to-point (SMSCH) paging to specific mobile stations and, as described below, provides an Access Response Channel (ARCH). SPACH can be considered as a logical channel further divided into 3 types: SMSCH, ARCH and PCH, as also described below. The characteristics of SPACH are: unidirectional (downlink), shared and unacknowledged. SMSCH is point-to-multipoint. ARCH and SMSCH are point-to-point.
寻呼信道(PCH) Paging Channel (PCH)
SPACH子集的这种逻辑信道专用于传送寻呼和指令(order)。Such logical channels of the SPACH subset are dedicated to the transfer of paging and orders.
接入响应信道(ARCH) Access Response Channel (ARCH)
这种逻辑信道是SPACH的子集,当在RACH上成功地完成接入时,该移动站自动地移动SPACH。ARCH可用于传递AVC或DTC指配或者对移动接入尝试的其它响应。层2 ARQ是可能使用在RACH上的证实消息。This logical channel is a subset of SPACH, and the mobile station automatically moves to SPACH when access is successfully completed on RACH. ARCH can be used to convey AVC or DTC assignments or other responses to mobile access attempts.
SMS点对点信道(SMSCH)SMS point-to-point channel (SMSCH)
这个逻辑信道用于传送短消息到接收SMS业务的特定移动站。随机接入信道(RACH)This logical channel is used to deliver short messages to specific mobile stations receiving SMS services. Random Access Channel (RACH)
这种逻辑信道是用于请求接入该系统的随机接入信道。这种信道的特性是:单方向的(上行)、共用的、点对点和证实的。在相应的前向子信道上提供争用判定和/或冲突避免反馈。分层方法This logical channel is a random access channel used to request access to the system. The characteristics of this channel are: unidirectional (uplink), shared, point-to-point and confirmed. Contention decision and/or collision avoidance feedback is provided on the corresponding forward sub-channel. layered approach
为了更好地了解本发明的结构和操作,DCC可分为三层:第一层(物理层)、第二层和第三层。物理层(L1)定义实际通信信道的参数,例如RF间隔、调制特性等。第二层(L2)定义在实际信道的制约内准确的信息传输所需的技术,例如,纠错和检错等。第三层(L3)定义接收和处理经过实际信道发送的信息的过程。物理层射频载波间隔和标识In order to better understand the structure and operation of the present invention, DCC can be divided into three layers: the first layer (physical layer), the second layer and the third layer. The physical layer (L1) defines the parameters of the actual communication channel, such as RF spacing, modulation characteristics, etc. The second layer (L2) defines the techniques required for accurate information transmission within the constraints of the actual channel, such as error correction and error detection. The third layer (L3) defines the procedures for receiving and processing information sent over the actual channel. Physical Layer RF Carrier Spacing and Identification
在IS-54B中使用的射频载波间隔和标识也可用于本发明中。调制特性The RF carrier spacing and identification used in IS-54B can also be used in the present invention. modulation characteristics
射频载波的调制特性可类似于IS-54B的调制特性。TDMA帧结构The modulation characteristics of the radio frequency carrier may be similar to those of IS-54B. TDMA frame structure
在图8中示出一个示例性的帧结构(图8类似于图3)。每个DCC TDMA RF信道的帧长为40毫秒(ms)。每帧由六个等长度的时隙(1-6)组成,长度正好162符号(324比特)。前向和反向时隙/脉冲串的比特位置(BP)从1至324顺序编号。TDMA时隙结构An exemplary frame structure is shown in FIG. 8 (FIG. 8 is similar to FIG. 3). Each DCC TDMA RF channel has a frame length of 40 milliseconds (ms). Each frame consists of six time slots (1-6) of equal length, exactly 162 symbols (324 bits) in length. The bit positions (BP) of the forward and reverse slots/bursts are numbered sequentially from 1 to 324. TDMA slot structure
DCC上行链路和下行链路的可能时隙结构示于图9。图9A表示在DCC上MS-BS的正常时隙格式。图9B表示在DCC上MS-BS的缩短的时隙格式。图9C表示在DCC上BS-MS的时隙格式。Possible slot structures for DCC uplink and downlink are shown in Figure 9. Figure 9A shows the normal slot format for the MS-BS on the DCC. Figure 9B shows the shortened slot format for the MS-BS on the DCC. Figure 9C shows the slot format of the BS-MS on the DCC.
在前向方向,SYNC字的第一发送比特的BP=1,而RSVD字段的最后发送比特的BP等于324。在反向方向,Guard保护的第一发送比特BP=1。在正常时隙格式中DATA字段的最后传送比特BP等于324。在缩短的时隙格式中,AG字段的最后传送比特BP等于324。In the forward direction, the BP=1 of the first transmitted bit of the SYNC word and BP=324 of the last transmitted bit of the RSVD field. In the reverse direction, the first transmitted bit BP=1 of Guard protection. The last transmitted bit BP of the DATA field is equal to 324 in the normal slot format. The last transmitted bit BP of the AG field is equal to 324 in the shortened slot format.
AGAG
字段AG表示缩短接入脉冲串格式的保护时间。该字段长度为22个符号(44比特)。Field AG indicates shortened guard time for access burst format. This field is 22 symbols (44 bits) long.
BRIBRI
字段BRI用于指示该信道是忙、保留或空闲。该字段长度共6比特并且分为两个3比特的字段。BRI的比特的发送如图10中所示。Field BRI is used to indicate whether the channel is busy, reserved or idle. This field is 6 bits long and is divided into two 3-bit fields. The bits of the BRI are transmitted as shown in FIG. 10 .
DATADATA
用户数据比特变换到字段DATA以便传输。在前向方向,该字段长度为260比特。在反向方向,DATA字段的长度:全长时隙格式为244比特,而缩短的时隙格式为200比特。The user data bits are mapped to the field DATA for transmission. In the forward direction, this field is 260 bits long. In the reverse direction, the length of the DATA field: 244 bits for the full-length slot format and 200 bits for the shortened slot format.
编码Encoding
图11表示在信道编码之前数据的划分。所有的逻辑信道BCCH、SPACH和RACH(正常的和缩短的)都使用1/2速率卷积编码。可以使用与在IS-54B中全速率话音相同的编码多项式。从层3收到的第一比特是图11中的最左边的比特,并且应该是传送到信道编码的第一比特。发送到信道编码器的最后五比特被置0(尾比特)。CRC多项式可能与在IS-54B中相同。一般地,当如在IS一54B中那样计算CRC时,DVCC作为信息比特被加上。但是,对于F-BCCH,在计算CRC之前DVCC值置0。Fig. 11 shows division of data before channel coding. All logical channels BCCH, SPACH and RACH (normal and shortened)
图11中的信息字段的长度取决于脉冲串的长度(见图9A-C):The length of the information field in Figure 11 depends on the length of the burst (see Figures 9A-C):
SPACH和BCCH: =130-16-5=109SPACH and BCCH: =130-16-5=109
RACH(正常长度): =122-16-5=101RACH (normal length): =122-16-5=101
RACH(缩短的长度): =100-16-5=79RACH (reduced length): =100-16-5=79
交错staggered
对于所有的信道类型和脉冲串长度,所有的比特都在一个脉冲串内发送,即只执行脉冲串内的交错。从交错器来的输出比特是顺序的,即第一比特是在第一DATA字段中发送的第一比特。在第一DATA字段完成之后,该交错器的输出在第二DATA字段的第一位置中发送。For all channel types and burst lengths, all bits are sent within one burst, ie only intra-burst interleaving is performed. The output bits from the interleaver are sequential, ie the first bit is the first bit sent in the first DATA field. After the completion of the first DATA field, the output of the interleaver is sent in the first position of the second DATA field.
下行链路(SPACH)Downlink (SPACH)
260编码的数据比特在13行×20列矩阵中交错。数据比特放入下面的矩阵中所示的矩形交错阵列,各比特已编号为0-259,相应于它们的编码器输出的顺序。这些数据比特输入到该阵列的列方向。然后这些比特使用下列算法发送到行方向:循环行=0至12260 coded data bits are interleaved in a matrix of 13 rows by 20 columns. The data bits are placed into a rectangular interleaved array as shown in the matrix below, and the individual bits have been numbered 0-259, corresponding to the order of their encoder output. These data bits are input to the column direction of the array. These bits are then sent in the row direction using the following algorithm: cycle row = 0 to 12
循环列=0至19loop column = 0 to 19
发送(阵列(行、列))send(array(row, col))
循环结束循环结束loop end loop end
0 13 26………234 2470 13 26...234 247
1 14 27………235 2481 14 27...235 248
2 15 28………236 249
… … …………… …... ... ... ... ... ...
11 24 37………245 258
12 25 38………246 25912 25 38...246 259
因此,比特是以如下顺序发送:Therefore, the bits are sent in the following order:
0,13,…,247(行1)0,13,...,247 (line 1)
1,14,…,248(行2)1,14,...,248 (line 2)
12,25,…,259(行13)。12,25,...,259 (line 13).
上行链路uplink
正常长度脉冲串normal length burst
244编码的数据比特在具有额外的4比特的部分列的12行×20列的矩阵中交错。数据比特放入下面的矩阵中所示的矩形交错阵列中,其中的比特已编号为0-243,相应于它们在编码器的输出的顺序。数据比特输入到阵列的列方向。然后使用以下算法使这些比特被传送到行方向:循环行=0至3244 coded data bits are interleaved in a matrix of 12 rows by 20 columns with an additional partial column of 4 bits. The data bits are placed into a rectangular interleaved array shown in the matrix below, where the bits are numbered 0-243, corresponding to their order at the output of the encoder. Data bits are input to the array in the column direction. These bits are then transferred in the row direction using the following algorithm: cycle row = 0 to 3
循环列=0至20loop column = 0 to 20
发送(阵列(行,列))send(array(row, col))
循环结束循环结束循环行=4至11loop end loop end loop line = 4 to 11
循环列=0至19loop column = 0 to 19
发送(阵列(行,列))send(array(row, col))
循环结束循环结束loop end loop end
0 12 24………228 240
1 13 25………229 241
2 14 26………230 2422 14 26...230 242
3 15 27………231 243
11 23 35………239 -
因此,这些比特以下面的顺序发送:Therefore, the bits are sent in the following order:
1,12,…,240(行1)1,12,...,240 (line 1)
1,13,…,241(行2)1,13,...,241 (line 2)
11,23,…,239(行12)11,23,...,239 (line 12)
缩短长度的脉冲串shortened length burst
200编码的数据比特在具有额外为8比特的部分列的12行×16列矩阵中交错。数据比特放入下面的矩阵中所示的矩形交错阵列中,其中比特已编号为0-199,相应于它们在编码器输出的顺序。数据比特输入到阵列的列方向。然后使用以下算法使这些比特被传送到行方向:循环行=0至7The 200 coded data bits are interleaved in a 12 row by 16 column matrix with an additional partial column of 8 bits. The data bits are placed into a rectangular interleaved array shown in the matrix below, where the bits are numbered 0-199, corresponding to their order at the encoder output. Data bits are input to the array in the column direction. These bits are then transferred in the row direction using the following algorithm: cycle row = 0 to 7
循环列=0至16loop column = 0 to 16
发送(阵列(行,列))send(array(row, col))
循环结束循环结束循环行=8至11loop end loop end loop line = 8 to 11
循环列=0至15loop column = 0 to 15
发送(阵列(行,列))send(array(row, col))
循环结束循环结束loop end loop end
0 12 24………180 192
1 13 25………181 193
2 14 26………182 194
10 22 36………190 -
11 23 35………191 -
因此,这些比特以下列顺序传送:Therefore, the bits are transmitted in the following order:
0,12,…,192(行1)0,12,...,192 (line 1)
1,13,…,193 (行2)1,13,…,193 (line 2)
11,23,…,191(行12)11,23,...,191 (line 12)
GG
图9A-B中的字段G提供保护时间,持续时间为3个符号(6比特)。在这个时间期间,ms保持载波断开状态。Field G in Figures 9A-B provides a guard time, which is 3 symbols (6 bits) in duration. During this time, ms remains in the carrier off state.
CPECPE
图9C中的部分回声(PE)用于识别在随机接入起始脉冲串之后哪个移动站被捕获到,或者用于识别时隙被标记保留给哪个移动站。PE的信道编码为CPE类似于在IS-54B中CDVCC是如何处理的(即一个(12,8)码)。在IS-54B中的d7比特在编码过程中被删去(置0),而且不作为CDL的一部分传送。PE的LSB是do。在编码之后,按照IS-54B CDVCC过程,变换为时隙格式如图12中所示的。校验比特b3,b2,b1和b0都反向,即在形成得到的CDL信息之前与(1,1,1,1)进行异操作。The partial echo (PE) in FIG. 9C is used to identify which mobile station was acquired after the random access start burst, or to identify which mobile station a time slot was marked reserved for. The channel coding of PE to CPE is similar to how CDVCC is handled in IS-54B (ie a (12,8) code). The d7 bit in IS-54B is dropped (set to 0) during encoding and is not transmitted as part of the CDL. The LSB of PE is do. After encoding, the conversion to the slot format is shown in FIG. 12 according to the IS-54B CDVCC procedure. The parity bits b 3 , b 2 , b 1 and b 0 are all reversed, that is, an exclusive operation is performed with (1,1,1,1) before forming the obtained CDL information.
PREAMPREAM
图9A-B中的PREAM(前置码)字段允许BS执行自动增益控制(AGC),并且在接收的脉冲串的随后的数据和脉冲串同步部分到达之前获得符号同步。该字段由重复四次的比特码型1001组成。The PREAM (preamble) field in Figures 9A-B allows the BS to perform automatic gain control (AGC) and obtain symbol synchronization before the subsequent data and burst synchronization portions of the received burst arrive. This field consists of the bit pattern 1001 repeated four times.
RR
图9A-B中的R字段表示功率上斜(Power ramp-up)间隔,持续时间为3个符号(6比特)。The R field in Figure 9A-B indicates the Power ramp-up interval, and the duration is 3 symbols (6 bits).
R/NR/N
图9中的R/N字段用于传送在RACH上发送到该基站的各个脉冲串的收到/未收到状态。R/N的比特的传送如图13所示。The R/N field in FIG. 9 is used to convey the received/not received status of each burst sent to the base station on the RACH. The transmission of R/N bits is as shown in FIG. 13 .
RSVDRSVD
这两比特置11(图9C)。These two bits are set to 11 (FIG. 9C).
CSFP(编码的超帧相位)CSFP (coded superframe phase)
图9C中CSFP字段用于传送有关超帧相位(SFP)的信息,以致移动站可找到该超帧的开始。这个字段中的内容也可用于区别DCC和DTC,其中DCC的CSFP和DTC的CDVCC没有共同的码字。这是通过使用相同的基本编码方法与改变传输前的所有CSFP码字的校验比特实现的。CFSP字段为12比特长。The CSFP field in FIG. 9C is used to convey information about the superframe phase (SFP) so that the mobile station can find the start of the superframe. The content in this field can also be used to distinguish DCC and DTC, wherein CSFP of DCC and CDVCC of DTC have no common code word. This is achieved by using the same basic encoding method and changing the parity bits of all CSFP codewords before transmission. The CFSP field is 12 bits long.
SFP信道编码为CSFP,类似于在IS-54B中DVCC被处理的那样(即一个(12,8)码)。SFP的最低有效位(LSB),即每个TDMA块递增的比特是do(一个TDMA块为20ms长)。比特d7,d6和d5被保留着并且都置0(000)。在编码之后,按照IS-54B DVCC的过程,校验比特b3,b2,b1,b0都反向,即用(1,1,1,1)异操作,并且在形成得到的CSFP信息之前表示为b3,b2,b1,b0。这些比特按照图14所示的传送(完全如CDVCC)。The SFP channel is coded as CSFP, similar to how DVCC is handled in IS-54B (ie a (12,8) code). The least significant bit (LSB) of the SFP, the bit incremented per TDMA block, is do (a TDMA block is 20ms long). Bits d7, d6 and d5 are reserved and all set to 0 (000). After encoding, according to the process of IS-54B DVCC, check bits b 3 , b 2 , b 1 , and b 0 are all reversed, that is, use (1,1,1,1) exclusive operation, and form the obtained CSFP The information was previously denoted b 3 , b 2 , b 1 , b 0 . These bits are transmitted as shown in Figure 14 (exactly as CDVCC).
SYNCSYNC
图3A-C中的SYNC字在内容和功能上类似于IS-54B中的SYNC字。The SYNC word in Figures 3A-C is similar in content and function to the SYNC word in IS-54B.
SYNC+SYNC+
图9A-B中的SYNC+提供附加的同步信息,以改善BS接收机的性能。SYNC+字由下面的以弧度表示的相位变化确定:π/4,-π/4,3π/4,-3π/4,-π/4,-π/4,-3π/4,3π/4,3π/4,π/4,π/4K和π/4。超帧:SYNC+ in Figures 9A-B provides additional synchronization information to improve BS receiver performance. The SYNC+ word is determined by the following phase changes in radians: π/4, -π/4, 3π/4, -3π/4, -π/4, -π/4, -3π/4, 3π/4, 3π/4, π/4, π/4K and π/4. superframe:
超帧的定义Definition of superframe
超帧定义为不连续的F-BCCH时隙之间的间隔。超帧(SF)的长度是固定的。其长度为32TDMA块(半速率为16块),即32×20=640ms。因此超帧相位计数器指定为5比特。一个超帧中的第一F-BCCH SFP值指定为值0,相同逻辑的DCC的下一时隙指定为1,等等。对于半速率DCC,值0,2,4,…用于指定给该DCC的连续脉冲串中。A superframe is defined as the interval between non-contiguous F-BCCH slots. The length of a superframe (SF) is fixed. Its length is 32 TDMA blocks (half rate is 16 blocks), that is, 32×20=640ms. Therefore the superframe phase counter is assigned 5 bits. The first F-BCCH SFP value in a superframe is assigned a value of 0, the next slot of the DCC of the same logic is assigned a value of 1, and so on. For half-rate DCC, the
主和从属DCCMaster and slave DCC
一个DCC可能是主或从属的DCC。传递DCC的每个频率必须有指定给时隙1的一个主DCC,并且可能有附加的从属DCC。仅仅主DCC传送BCCH。指定给从属DCC的MS使用了在相应的主DCC上的BCCH。A DCC may be a master or a slave DCC. Each frequency delivering DCCs must have one master DCC assigned to slot 1, and possibly additional slave DCCs. Only the primary DCC transmits the BCCH. MSs assigned to a secondary DCC use the BCCH on the corresponding primary DCC.
在不同频率上的DCCDCC at different frequencies
如果几个DCC指定不同的频率以致有几个主DCC,则不同的时隙号可分配给在每个主DCC上的组合的BCCH(F-BCCH,E-BCCH和S-BCCH)。对于每个主DCC,层2/3信息也可能是不同的。因此移动站必须在与其PCH信道相同的频率上一直获得其所有的BCCH信息(见下面的PCH分配算法)。PCH指配算法的第一步是选择频率。如果MS被指定到与它目前锁定的频率不同的频率,则在它继续PCH时隙指配计算之前,它必须重新读出在新频率中的DCC结构消息。If several DCCs assign different frequencies so that there are several primary DCCs, different slot numbers may be assigned to the combined BCCHs (F-BCCH, E-BCCH and S-BCCH) on each primary DCC.
特超帧定义hyperframe definition
特超帧结构示于图15。特超帧(HP)由两个超帧组成。第一超帧中的每个SPACH总是在第二超帧中重复。这表示“规范承认的重复”。在HF的第一SF中的时隙称为“主要的”,而在第二SF中的时隙称为“次要的”。在每个超帧中F-BCCH传递相同的信息直到PCH中的改变标记触发(改变值)为止。这时,可在F-BCCH上放入新数据。E-BCCH和S-BCCH信息可不同于SF至SF。The hyperframe structure is shown in Figure 15. A hyperframe (HP) consists of two superframes. Each SPACH in the first superframe is always repeated in the second superframe. This means "repetition of specification recognition". The slots in the first SF of the HF are called "primary" and the slots in the second SF are called "secondary". The F-BCCH conveys the same information in every superframe until the change flag triggers (changes value) in the PCH. At this time, new data can be placed on the F-BCCH. E-BCCH and S-BCCH information may be different from SF to SF.
SPACH持续的规则SPACH Persistence Rules
如果指定的PCH中的PCON比特置1,则移动站将读出由参数PCH-DISPLACEMENT指示的许多附加的SPACH时隙,该参数在BCCH上发送。被读出的附加时隙从指定的PCH以40ms分开,用于全速率和半速率DCC。对于全速率DCC操作,这意味着移动站每隔一个SPACH时隙读出,直达由信息单元PCH-DISPLACEMENT指示的极限。BCCH时隙和保留的时隙不作为读连续过程的寻呼的一部分计数。If the PCON bit in the assigned PCH is set, the mobile station will read as many additional SPACH slots as indicated by the parameter PCH-DISPLACEMENT, which is sent on the BCCH. The additional time slots that are read are separated by 40 ms from the assigned PCH for full-rate and half-rate DCC. For full rate DCC operation, this means that the mobile station reads every other SPACH slot, up to the limit indicated by the information element PCH-DISPLACEMENT. BCCH slots and reserved slots are not counted as part of the paging of the read continuous procedure.
ARCH或SMSCH消息传输到一个移动站可被中断以便允许消息传输到另一个移动站。由另一个SPACH消息对ARCH和SMSCH消息的每个中断可被限制在不多于n个时隙,或者SMSCH或ARCH的L3超时。每个移动站的中断次数也可受限制。ARCH or SMSCH message transmission to one mobile station can be interrupted to allow message transmission to another mobile station. Each interruption of ARCH and SMSCH messages by another SPACH message may be limited to no more than n slots, or L3 timeout of SMSCH or ARCH. The number of outages per mobile station may also be limited.
寻呼帧定义paging frame definition
寻呼帧(PF)定义为整数的特超帧(见图16)。有四个PF级:PF1…PF4。PF1被认为是“最低的”PF级,而PF4是“最高的”。使用三个术语来定义PF级的操作:缺省PF级、指定的PF级和当前的PF级。A Paging Frame (PF) is defined as an integer hyperframe (see Figure 16). There are four PF classes: PF 1 ... PF 4 . PF 1 is considered the "lowest" PF rating, while PF 4 is the "highest". Three terms are used to define the operation of a PF level: default PF level, assigned PF level, and current PF level.
在预约时移动站被指定一个PF级。这称为缺省PF级。如果缺省PF级高于由在BCCH上广播的参数MAX-SUPORTED-PFC规定支持的最高级,则移动站使用由MAC-SUPORTED-PFC规定的PF级。A mobile station is assigned a PF class at the time of subscription. This is called the default PF rating. If the default PF level is higher than the highest supported level specified by the parameter MAX-SUPORTED-PFC broadcast on BCCH, the mobile station uses the PF level specified by MAC-SUPORTED-PFC.
在登记时MS也可被指定到另一个PF级。当MS进行登记时,它暂时改变PF级为PF1,直到它收到登记响应为止。如果该响应包含一个PF级,则MS将使用那个PF级;否则它使用先前的PF级,根据登记响应或广播信息得到的PF级称为指定的PF级。The MS may also be assigned to another PF class at the time of registration. When the MS registers, it temporarily changes the PF level to PF 1 until it receives a registration response. If the response contains a PF level, the MS will use that PF level; otherwise, it will use the previous PF level, and the PF level obtained from the registration response or broadcast information is called the specified PF level.
实际使用的PF级称为当前的PF级。如果没有设定在SPACH上传输的寻呼帧修改量,则当前PF类别等于指定的PF级,或者如果PFM设定了,它就等于指定的PF级+1。最高PF级是PF4,用于所有的情况。The PF grade actually used is called the current PF grade. If the Paging Frame Modifier transmitted on SPACH is not set, the current PF class is equal to the specified PF class, or it is equal to the specified PF class+1 if PFM is set. The highest PF class is PF 4 which is used in all cases.
在BCCH中提供了一个特超帧计数和一个基本的SF指示符。这两个计数一起(2×HF计数+基本的SF指示符)构成超帧计数。寻呼帧级的最小公倍数是12。因此HF计数:0,1,…,11,0,1,…。A hyperframe count and a basic SF indicator are provided in the BCCH. These two counts together (2 x HF count + basic SF indicator) constitute the superframe count. The least common multiple at the paging frame level is 12. So HF counts: 0,1,…,11,0,1,….
在图16中,辅助的PCH总是放入下一超帧中。对于PF(i),i=2,3,4,为了说明起见只示出了与HF0对准的PCH指定。In Figure 16, the auxiliary PCH is always placed in the next superframe. For PF(i), i=2,3,4, only PCH assignments aligned with HF 0 are shown for illustration.
检验E-BCCH信息的状态Check the status of E-BCCH information
在读E-BCCH之前,移动站将存储在F-BCCH中传送的E-BCCH改变通知标记的值。在移动站已获得相关信息之后(这可取决于移动站所从事的具体任务),移动站再读E-BCCH改变通知标记。只当该标记在E-BCCH读出之前和之后是相同时,才认为E-BCCH消息组的更新/起始过程是成功的。Before reading the E-BCCH, the mobile station shall store the value of the E-BCCH change notification flag transmitted in the F-BCCH. After the mobile station has obtained the relevant information (this may depend on the specific task the mobile station is engaged in), the mobile station then reads the E-BCCH change notification flag. The update/initiation process of the E-BCCH message set is considered successful only if this flag is the same before and after E-BCCH readout.
SMS广播SMS broadcast
SMS广播(S-BCCH)是超帧中的广播信道。SMS broadcast (S-BCCH) is a broadcast channel in a superframe.
SMS帧SMS frame
S-BCCH信道被编制成固定长度的SMS帧,每个SMS帧包括24超帧,如图7所示。SF数是从在BCCH上发送的特超帧计数和基本超帧指示符中得到的(SF数=2×HF计数+基本SF指示符)。在每个SMS帧内的第一S-BCCH时隙(超帧0)包含一个首部,它描述SMS信道的结构。每个SMS帧内的超帧数是固定的。因此,指定给SMS帧的时隙数为0,24,48,72,…,取决于指定给S-BCCH每个超帧多少时隙。SMS帧与等于零的计数器的开始对齐。此外,不管哪个寻呼帧组被支持,该系统必须递增特超帧计数(0至11模12),以提供SMS帧同步信息到移动站。The S-BCCH channel is compiled into fixed-length SMS frames, and each SMS frame includes 24 superframes, as shown in Figure 7 . The SF number is derived from the hyperframe count and the basic superframe indicator sent on the BCCH (SF number = 2 x HF count + basic SF indicator). The first S-BCCH slot (superframe 0) within each SMS frame contains a header which describes the structure of the SMS channel. The number of superframes within each SMS frame is fixed. Therefore, the number of slots assigned to the SMS frame is 0, 24, 48, 72, ..., depending on how many slots per superframe are assigned to the S-BCCH. SMS frames are aligned with the start of the counter equal to zero. Additionally, regardless of which paging frame group is supported, the system must increment the hyperframe count (0 to 11 modulo 12) to provide SMS frame synchronization information to the mobile station.
SMS子信道SMS sub-channel
SMS子信道规定允许不同消息的不同重复周期。每个子信道具有以可能的SMS帧的单元规定的它自己的重复周期。子信道数为:0,1,…,N。为限制子信道重复时间,最大N可设定等于4。子信道是以SMS帧为单元的在S-BCCH信道上再复用的SMS(i),这里i=1,…,N。图18表示一个SMS子信道复用的例子,其中N=4。The SMS subchannel specification allows for different repetition periods for different messages. Each subchannel has its own repetition period defined in units of possible SMS frames. The number of sub-channels is: 0,1,...,N. To limit the subchannel repetition time, the maximum N can be set equal to 4. The sub-channels are SMS(i) multiplexed on the S-BCCH channel in units of SMS frames, where i=1,...,N. Figure 18 shows an example of SMS subchannel multiplexing, where N=4.
根据在每个SMS帧的每个第一时隙中找到的L2信息,在一个周期结束之前,SMS(i)中的消息组可间隔M(i)个SMS帧。尽管在子信道中消息组周期变化,SMS帧数“i”总是接着帧数((i+1)模N+1),以便传输。According to the L2 information found in each first time slot of each SMS frame, groups of messages in SMS(i) can be separated by M(i) SMS frames before the end of a period. The SMS frame number "i" is always followed by the frame number ((i+1) modulo N+1) for transmission, although message groups vary periodically in the subchannel.
每个SMS子信道(SMSN)提供一个事务处理标记(TF)。所有SMS子信道的标记再复用到在SPACH信道上传送的单个标记上,它指向下一个逻辑SMS帧(见图18)。如果在该标记中有用于子信道的事务处理,则MS必须在下一逻辑SMS帧的开始读S-BCCH首部字段以获得进一步的信息,如在下面更详细讨论的。Each SMS Subchannel (SMSN) provides a Transaction Token (TF). The tags of all SMS sub-channels are then multiplexed onto a single tag transmitted on the SPACH channel, which points to the next logical SMS frame (see Figure 18). If there is a transaction for a subchannel in this tag, the MS must read the S-BCCH header field at the beginning of the next logical SMS frame for further information, as discussed in more detail below.
首部信息 Header information
首部信息描述广播SMS的子信道并在每个SMS帧的第一时隙提供。MS也可找到与这个首部相关的SMS帧的L3结构。SMS首部单元(每个SMS帧的开始)示于下表中。
注:这两单元的N个情况是连续地发送的。NOTE: The N instances of these two units are transmitted consecutively.
即使SMS数据可间隔几个SMS帧,该变化标记可能中断子信道周期(周期清除)。这时MS假定下一个子信道是新周期的开始。有两种方法改变在广播SMS上提供的数据:在SMS内改变L3消息(消息可被加上和/或从该周期中的任何位置删除),和改变子信道的结构。Even though SMS data may be separated by several SMS frames, the change flag may interrupt the subchannel period (period clearing). At this point the MS assumes that the next subchannel is the beginning of a new period. There are two ways to change the data provided on the broadcast SMS: changing the L3 messages within the SMS (messages can be added and/or removed from anywhere in the cycle), and changing the structure of the subchannels.
SMS消息ID和它们相关的L2帧开始包括在这个SMS帧出现的所有消息的表。消息ID对于每个SMS帧必须是唯一的,而且所有的256个值必须在再用之前用于帮助移动站检索已改变的消息和避免读出未改变的消息。L2帧的开始参数用于表明L2帧的开头,这个消息在这个开头开始(该消息不必是在L2帧的开头)。参见S-BCCH L2格式对于消息传递的叙述。SMS message IDs and their associated L2 frame starts include a list of all messages present in this SMS frame. The message ID must be unique for each SMS frame, and all 256 values must be used to help mobile stations retrieve changed messages and avoid reading unchanged messages before reuse. The start parameter of the L2 frame is used to indicate the beginning of the L2 frame at which this message starts (the message does not have to be at the beginning of the L2 frame). See the description of the S-BCCH L2 format for message passing.
在下表中所示的例子中,4个消息构成SMS帧1。在这个例子中,1个时隙专用于每个超帧的S-BCCH,因此,每个SMS帧有24个时隙。
在上表中,当SMSN指示S-BCCH中的变化时,认为移动站在监视SPACH。移动站从超帧计数器知道SMS子信道3目前正在广播,而且这时确定SMSN指SMS子信道1中的变化。当SMS子信道1开始时,MS读SMS首部。它确定消息3被去掉了,消息4的位置已变化了(但是ID是相同的,所以移动站不须要重读这个消息)和新消息5和6已被加上而且必须读出。移动站可能跳过适当数量的L2帧去读新消息。PCH分配给MSIn the above table, a mobile station is considered to be monitoring SPACH when the SMSN indicates a change in S-BCCH. The mobile station knows from the superframe counter that
每个MS被分配在特定DCC的寻呼帧内的一个特定的PCH子信道。可用的PCH子信道和DCC可由在BCCH上广播的DCC参数识别。所使用的子信道由MS的IS-54B MIN标识确定,该MIN标识下面称为MSID。Each MS is allocated a specific PCH sub-channel within the paging frame of a specific DCC. Available PCH subchannels and DCCs can be identified by DCC parameters broadcast on BCCH. The subchannel used is determined by the MS's IS-54B MIN identifier, which is hereinafter referred to as MSID.
DCC选择DCC selection
DCC在BCCH上广播的表中被识别。这个表必须对所有的DCC频率都是相同的。该表包含:DCCs are identified in a table broadcast on BCCH. This table must be the same for all DCC frequencies. The table contains:
1.频率或信道(f1,i=1…k)。对于目前的DCC,广播该表中的位置(i)而不广播频率。1. Frequency or channel (f 1 , i=1...k). For the current DCC, the position (i) in the table is broadcast and not the frequency.
2.用于DCC的时隙号(ni,i=1…k),k是该表中DCC频率号。2. The time slot number used for DCC (n i , i=1...k), k is the DCC frequency number in the table.
一个频率可具有下面第一表中表示的DCC时隙的任何一个号码。所使用的时隙(sj)被编号,如下面第二表中所示。
所用的时隙(sj)编号如下:
DCC按照在表(fi)和在图16中出现的顺序编号如下:The DCCs are numbered in the order they appear in Table (f i ) and in Figure 16 as follows:
P=求和(nm,m=0…i-1)+j,n0=0,j=0…ni-1,i=1…kP=Summation(n m ,m=0…i-1)+j,n 0 =0,j=0…n i -1,i=1…k
DCCp=fi,sj,DCCp=f i ,s j ,
注意,全速率DCC给两个号。指定给DCC的时隙总数为N=求和(ni,i=0…k)。Note that full rate DCC gives two numbers. The total number of slots assigned to the DCC is N=sum(n i ,i=0...k).
图19表示在BCCH上广播的一个表的例子(在包括目前频率之后)。这是一个有两个频率的情况,f1有4个时隙,而f2有1个时隙。DCC的总数为N=5。DCC编号如下:
MS按照以下算法指定给DCC:MS is assigned to DCC according to the following algorithm:
DCC组=MSID模N,N如上面定义。DCC group = MSID modulo N, N as defined above.
按照上面的表DCC组是DCC号(P)。如果它(隐含地)指示全速率信道(ni>1),则指定整个全速信道。下面的PCH指定是基于在指定的DCC频率上广播的参数。The DCC group is the DCC number (P) according to the above table. If it (implicitly) indicates a full-rate channel ( ni > 1), the entire full-rate channel is specified. The following PCH designations are based on parameters broadcast on the designated DCC frequency.
PCH子信道选择PCH sub-channel selection
按照以下算法MS指定给超帧中的PCH时隙:The MS assigns the PCH slots in the superframe according to the following algorithm:
情况1:主半速率,(j=0,ni=1)Case 1: main half rate, (j=0,n i =1)
PCH-SUBCH=[(MSID div N)模NP+NB]*2 PCH-SUBCH=[(MSID div N)modulo NP+NB] *2
NP=16-NB情况2:主全速率,(j=0,1,ni>1)NP=16-NB case 2: main full rate, (j=0,1,ni>1)
PCH-SUBCH=(MSID div N+j模2)模NPPCH-SUBCH=(MSID div N+j mod 2) mod NP
+NB+NB
NP=32-NB情况3:从属全速率,(=2,3,4,5)NP=32-NB case 3: slave full rate, (=2,3,4,5)
PCH-SUBCH=(MSID div N+j模2)模NPPCH-SUBCH=(MSID div N+j mod 2) mod NP
+NB+2* +NB+2 *
NP=32-4-NBNP=32-4-NB
式中:*=相应于BCCH的帧和不能用于从属DCC的PCH的之前与之后的一帧中的时隙。where: * = time slots in the frame corresponding to the BCCH and the previous and subsequent frames that cannot be used for the PCH dependent on the DCC.
NB=NFB+NEB+NSB+NSSNB=NFB+NEB+NSB+NSS
NFB=F-BCCH的数 NFB=Number of F-BCCH
NEB=E-BCCH的数The number of NEB=E-BCCH
NSB=S-BCCH的数The number of NSB=S-BCCH
NSS=跳过的时隙数NSS=Number of time slots skipped
N,j,ni=如上面定义的。N, j, ni = as defined above.
PCH-SUBCH是在该超帧内的PCH子信道的TDMA块号码。TDMA块号码(SF相位计数)是在CSFP字段中广播的。PCH-SUBCH is the TDMA block number of the PCH subchannel within the superframe. The TDMA block number (SF phase count) is broadcast in the CSFP field.
PCH特超帧选择PCH hyperframe selection
按照以下算法MS指定给呼叫帧内的PCH特超帧:The MS assigns to the PCH hyperframe in the paging frame according to the following algorithm:
(MSID div N div NP)模PFC=HFC模PFC返回(MSID div N div NP) mod PFC=HFC mod PFC return
式中:In the formula:
PFC=该实际MS的寻呼帧等级(1…4)。PFC = Paging Frame Class (1...4) for this actual MS.
HFC=特超帧计数(在BCCH上广播)。RACH的子信道HFC = Hyperframe Count (broadcast on BCCH). RACH sub-channel
概况overview
为了在基站和移动站有一些处理时间,进行RACH的多路复用。另外,要求脉冲串的传输与相应于这个脉冲串的SCF响应之间的时间在全速率和半速率DCC都是相同的。因此,全速率DCC的子信道的数量例如可设定为六。Multiplexing of RACH is done in order to have some processing time at base station and mobile station. In addition, the required time between the transmission of a burst and the SCF response corresponding to that burst is the same for both full-rate and half-rate DCC. Therefore, the number of sub-channels of the full-rate DCC can be set to six, for example.
SCF标记-上行链路和下行链路脉冲串的关系SCF flags - relationship between uplink and downlink bursts
图20表示上行链路时隙和下行链路SGF标记之间的关系。因此,按照在子信道P1上从左到右的箭头,SCF标记的BRI读出指示在随后的P1上行链路时隙的可用性,如在该图中所示的。如果上行链路脉冲串在那个时隙中发送,则正如箭头所示的,下一个P1下行链路SCF指示那个脉冲串是否收到。而且在该脉冲串是随机存取的第一脉冲串的情况下,连续的下行链路PE值给各移动站指示哪个移动站被捕获到。如果正确地收到该移动站的脉冲串,则该BS将设定PE,它通知该MS在上行链路的下次出现的P1中发送其消息的下一个脉冲串(假定该消息比一个脉冲串长)。注意,执行这个子信道复用只用在RACH上的下行链路有效负荷中的SCF信息。在下行链路中的有效负荷数据不利用这个子信道复用传送。Fig. 20 shows the relationship between uplink slots and downlink SGF flags. Thus, following the arrow from left to right on sub-channel P1, the BRI readout of the SCF flag indicates the availability of the subsequent P1 uplink time slot, as shown in the figure. If an uplink burst is sent in that time slot, the next P1 downlink SCF indicates whether that burst was received or not, as indicated by the arrow. Also in case the burst is the first burst of random access, successive downlink PE values indicate to each mobile station which mobile station was acquired. If the mobile station's burst is received correctly, the BS will set PE, which tells the MS to send the next burst of its message in the next occurrence of P1 on the uplink (assuming the message is older than a burst string length). Note that this subchannel multiplexing is performed only with the SCF information in the downlink payload on the RACH. The payload data in the downlink is not transmitted using this subchannel multiplex.
在基于预留存取的情况下(如与随机存取区别),部分回声值与前面出现的那个子信道下行链路的预留标记一起使用,以便识别特定移动台的预留的存取。图21表示在使用全速率DCC的情况下的子信道。在半速率DCC的情况下,只使用子信道P1、P3和P5。In the case of reservation-based access (as distinguished from random access), the partial echo value is used together with the previous occurrence of the reservation flag for the downlink of that subchannel in order to identify the reserved access for a particular mobile station. Fig. 21 shows subchannels in the case of using full rate DCC. In the case of half-rate DCC, only subchannels P1, P3 and P5 are used.
图21表示在移动站和基站之间的L3证实的对话的例子(只示出相应于全速率DCC的时隙1和4)。移动站首先传送通过随机存取的两脉冲串的消息,检验第一脉冲串后的PE。该MS的实际传送时刻标记为X。在预定的时间内(一般比图中所示的更长),该基站以两脉冲串长的消息响应(图中标记为Y)。最后,移动站传送通过预留存取的单个脉冲串(这个基于预留的存取是由BS任选的)。图21还表示了相关的SCF值。层2/3信息变换为E-BCCHFigure 21 shows an example of an L3 confirmed dialog between a mobile station and a base station (
在E-BCCH上发送的层3E-BCCH消息组形成一个消息串。消息组的开头以在L2首部找到的E-BCCH周期的开头指示。层2操作协议Groups of
用于下行链路操作的层2协议支持在SPACH(SMSCH、PCH和AACH)、F-BCCH、E-BCCH和S-BCCH上的层3消息的传输。层2协议包括对于SMSCH和ARCH的ARQ操作方式的支持。用于上行链路操作的层2协议支持在RACH上的层3消息的传输。因为共享信道反馈(SCF)确定用于随机存取的信道操作,没有另外的ARQ能力明显地装入RACH层2协议中。
这里定义的层2协议是由媒体存取控制(MAC)功能组成的,虽然可包括较高级的逻辑链路控制(LLC)。这里识别的层2协议帧总是以逻辑方法传送的,以帧的最左比特开始并以帧的最右比特结束。The
RACH协议RACH protocol
RACH层2协议用在上行链路,在上行链路所有TDMA脉冲串都用于传递RACH信息。构成两个RACH层2协议帧,以便在117或95比特包络范围中。另外5比特保留用作尾比特,得到在每个RACH脉冲串内传递总数为122或100比特的信息。对RACH所定义的层2协议使用共享信道反馈机制工作,照这样,只支持ARQ操作类型。可能的RACH层2帧的范围示于图22A-L。用于RACH操作、包括层2协议帧的字段的总计在下面的表中提供。在一个事务处理中可发送多个L3消息。The
正常长度协议帧Normal length protocol frame
当系统广播信息指示在移动站存取过程期间发送正常长度脉冲串时,示于图22A-F的层2协议帧的范围可用于整个存取。图22A表示一个BEGIN(开始)帧(MSID型TMSI)。图22B表示一个BEGIN帧(MSID型IS-54B MIN)。图22C表示一个BEGIN帧(MSID型TMSI)。图22D表示一个CONTINUE(连续)帧。图22E表示一个END(结束)帧。图22F表示一个SPACH ARQ状态帧。When the system broadcast information indicates that normal length bursts are sent during the mobile station access procedure, the range of
正常长度帧的应用Application of normal length frames
BEGIN帧BEGIN frame
BEGIN帧必须用于随机存取事务处理的起始脉冲串。L3数据字段的长度基于MSID的长度和由NL3M指示的层3消息数量而变化。整个存取事务处理可在这个脉冲串内进行。The BEGIN frame must be used for the start burst of a random access transaction. The length of the L3 data field varies based on the length of the MSID and the number of
CONTINUE帧CONTINUE frame
当随机存取要求两个以上的帧完成该存取事务处理时使用CONTINUE帧。与需要一样多的CONTINUE帧被发送以完成多个脉冲串的存取事务处理。CI字段中的值随着如CF信息所指示的由移动站传送的每个新(即非重复的)帧在1和0之间倒模(由0开始)。如果SCF要求再传输先前发送的帧,则该帧应重复而CI字段不倒模。CONTINUE frames are used when random access requires more than two frames to complete the access transaction. As many CONTINUE frames are sent as needed to complete multiple burst access transactions. The value in the CI field is inverted between 1 and 0 (starting with 0) with each new (ie, non-repeating) frame transmitted by the mobile station as indicated by the CF information. If the SCF requires retransmission of a previously sent frame, the frame shall be repeated without the CI field being inverted.
END帧END frame
END帧是作为要求一帧以上来完成存取事务处理的随机存取的最后脉冲串发送的。The END frame is sent as the final burst of a random access that requires more than one frame to complete the access transaction.
SPACH ARQ状态帧SPACH ARQ status frame
SPACH ARQ状态帧用于报告由移动站在SPACH上接收的基于ARQ传输的部分或整个状态。对于在SPACH上收到的每个ARQ方式的BEGIN或CONTINUE帧,收到时FRNO MAP比特变换字段置“1”或者未收到时置“0”。The SPACH ARQ Status frame is used to report the partial or complete status of ARQ based transmissions received by the mobile station on the SPACH. For each BEGIN or CONTINUE frame of ARQ mode received on SPACH, the FRNO MAP bit conversion field is set to "1" when received or set to "0" when not received.
缩短长度协议帧 Shorten length protocol frame
当系统广播信息指示缩短长度脉冲串在移动台存取过程期间发送时,则可使用在图22G-L中所示的层2协议帧的范围。图22G表示BEGIN帧(MSID型TMSI)。图22H表示BEGIN帧(MSID型IS-54B MIN)。图22I表示BEGIN帧(MSID型IM51)。图22J表示CONTINUE帧。图22K表示END帧。图22L表示SPACH ARQ状态帧。L3数据字段的长度基于MSID的长度和由NL3M指示的层3消息的数量而变化。When the system broadcast information indicates that shortened length bursts are sent during the mobile station access procedure, then the range of
缩短长度帧的应用Application of shortened length frame
缩短长度帧的应用与正常长度帧的应用没有不同。The application of shortened length frames is no different from the application of normal length frames.
RACH字段总计RACH field total
下表总计了RACH层2的协议字段:
F-BCCH第三层规程被用于当一个TDMA脉冲串用于携带F-BCCH信息的时候。超帧的第一F-BCCH时隙必须具有其值置为零的超帧段(Phase)。在一个超帧中的所有F-BCCH时隙假设为计算第二层的CRC值为零的DVCC值。应注意到,F-BCCH信息的全周期(如一组第三层消息)总是在超帧的第一F-BCCH时隙开始,并且在象许多F-BCCH时隙必须使用的同一超帧内完成。F-
一个单个的F-BCCH第二层规程帧被构成,以便适合于在一个125比特包中。附加的5比特被保留用于尾比特,结果在各F-BCCH脉冲串中总共携带130比特的信息。对于F-BCCH操作定义的第二层规程仅支持未确认操作。可能的F-BCCH第二层帧的范围被示于图23A-C。包括用于F-BCCH操作第二层规程帧的所有字段都在下表中被提供。A single F-
F-BCCH帧的使用The use of F-BCCH frame
开始(BEGIN)帧The start (BEGIN) frame
图24A表示一个F-BCCH开始帧(命令最小)。图24B表示另一个F-BCCH开始帧(具有第二L3连续消息的两个L3消息)。该开始帧用于在F-BCCH上开始发送一个或多个L3消息。如果第一L3消息比一帧短,则BE就被加到L3 DATA字段的结尾,以指示在开始帧中是否开始附加L3消息。如果BE等于“结束(END)”,则剩余的BEGIN帧用FILLER来填充。如果BE等于“BEGIN”,则一个新的L3消息在BEGIN帧开始。如果L3 DATA字段在一帧的边界结束,则将没有BE比特。该“END”被暗示。如果L3 DATA字段用少于该帧中剩余的9比特结束,则BE被置为“END”和剩余的帧用填充符填充。Figure 24A shows a F-BCCH start frame (command minimum). Figure 24B shows another F-BCCH start frame (two L3 messages with a second L3 continuation message). The start frame is used to start sending one or more L3 messages on the F-BCCH. If the first L3 message is shorter than one frame, BE is added to the end of the L3 DATA field to indicate whether to start appending the L3 message in the start frame. If BE is equal to "END", the remaining BEGIN frames are filled with FILLER. If BE is equal to "BEGIN", then a new L3 message starts at the BEGIN frame. If the L3 DATA field ends on a frame boundary, there will be no BE bit. The "END" is implied. If the L3 DATA field ends with less than the remaining 9 bits in the frame, BE is set to "END" and the remaining frame is filled with filler.
连续帧(CONTINUE Frame)Continuous frame (CONTINUE Frame)
图24C表示一个F-BCCH CONTINUE帧(命令最小)。该CONTINUE帧用于适合前一帧太长的L3消息的继续。CLI指示属于该连续消息的帧有多少比特。由于CLI在比特中被给定,所以以前的L3的消息必须要填充填充符。如果BE等于“END”,则剩余的CONTINUE帧就用填充符填充。如果BE等于“BEGIN”,则一个新的L3消息在CONTINUE中开始。如果该L3 DATA在一帧的边界结束,则将设有BE比特。该“END”被暗示。如果L3 DATA字段用少于该帧中剩余的9比特结束,则BE被置为“END”,而且剩余的帧用填充符填充。CLI使得即使以前的帧没被接收,移动站也能在连续帧的开始接收任何消息。Figure 24C shows a F-BCCH CONTINUE frame (command minimum). The CONTINUE frame is used for the continuation of an L3 message that was too long to fit in the previous frame. The CLI indicates how many bits belong to the frame of the continuation message. Since the CLI is given in bits, previous L3 messages must be filled with fillers. If BE is equal to "END", the remaining CONTINUE frames are filled with fillers. If BE equals "BEGIN", a new L3 message starts in CONTINUE. If the L3 DATA ends on a frame boundary, the BE bit will be set. The "END" is implied. If the L3 DATA field ends with less than the remaining 9 bits in the frame, BE is set to "END" and the remaining frame is filled with filler. CLI enables a mobile station to receive any message at the beginning of a consecutive frame even if the previous frame was not received.
F-BCCH字段概述Overview of F-BCCH fields
下面的表概括了F-BCCH第二层规程的字段:
E-BCCH规程E-BCCH protocol
E-BCCH第二层规程被用于当一个DATA脉冲串携带E-BCCH信息的时候。应当注意到,E-BCCH的全周期(如,一组第三层消息)不必与一个超帧的第一E-BCCH时隙的开始对准,并可以跨过多个超帧。单一的E-BCCH第二层规程帧被构成,以便适于在125比特的包中。附加的5比特保留用作产生各E-BCCH脉冲串中携带的总共130比特信息的尾比特。对于E-BCCH操作定义的第二层规程仅支持未被证实的操作。E-BCCH第二层帧可能的范围被示在图24A-C中。图24A表示E-BCCH BEGIN帧(命令最小)。图2413表示另一个E-BCCH BEGIN帧(具有连续的第二L3消息的两个L3消息)。图24C表示一个E-BCCH CONTINUE帧(命令最小)。包括E-BCCH操作第二层规程的字段概述在下表提供。The
E-BCCH帧的使用The use of E-BCCH frame
E-BCCH帧的使用除下述之外与F-BCCH帧的使用相同:The use of E-BCCH frames is the same as the use of F-BCCH frames except as follows:
1.ECS与在F-BCCH帧中用的EC相比是一个E-BCCH帧的开字段。1. Compared with EC used in F-BCCH frame, ECS is an open field of E-BCCH frame.
2.一个E-BCCH BEGIN(ECS=1)必须用作该E-BCCH周期的第一帧。2. An E-BCCH BEGIN (ECS=1) shall be used as the first frame of the E-BCCH period.
E-BCCH字段的概述Overview of the E-BCCH field
下表概述了E-BCCH第二层规程的字段:
S-BCCH规程S-BCCH protocol
S-BCCH第二层规程用于当一个TDMA脉冲串用于携带S-BCCH信息的时候。单个S-BCCH第二层规程帧被构成,以便适于在125比特的包中。附加的5比特被保留用作产生各S-BCCH脉冲串中携带的总共130比特信息的尾比特。对于S-BCCH操作定义的第二层规程仅支持未被证实的操作。S-BCCH第二层帧可能的范围被示于图25A-C中。图25A表示BEGIN帧(命令最小)。第25B(另一个)表示S-BCCH BEGIN帧(具有连续的第二L3消息的两个L3消息)。图25C表示S-BCCH CONTINUE帧(命令最小)。包括S-BCCH操作第二层规程帧的概述在下表中提供。The S-
S-BCCH帧的使用The use of S-BCCH frame
S-BCCH帧的使用除下述之外与F-BCCH帧的使用相同:The use of the S-BCCH frame is the same as the use of the F-BCCH frame except as follows:
1.SCS与在F-BCCH帧中用的EC相比是S-BCCH帧的开字段。1. The SCS is an open field of the S-BCCH frame compared with the EC used in the F-BCCH frame.
2.一个S-BCCH BEGIN必须用作该S-BCCH周期的第一帧。
SPACH规程SPACH procedure
SPACH第二层规程用于当一个TDMA脉冲串用于携带点对点SMS、寻呼、或ARCH信息的时候。单个SPACH第二层帧被构成,以便适于在125比特的包中。附加的5比特被保留用作产生为SPACH目的指定的各时隙中携带的总共130比特信息的尾比特。图26A-N示出了在各种条件下SPACH第二层规程帧可能的范围。可能的SPACH帧格式的概述在下面的第一表中被提供。含有对于SPACH操作的第二层规程帧的字段概述在下面的第二表中被提供。The
SPACH帧的使用The use of SPACH frames
对于所有SPACH信道使用了同样的帧格式,如所有的帧总是具有一个公共的首部A。首部A的内容决定了在任意的给定SPACH帧中是否出现首部B。首部A在硬(专用)寻呼帧、PCH帧、ARCH帧和SMSCH帧间进行鉴别。包括三个34比特MSID的硬三重寻呼(Hard Triple Page)帧可以在PCH(BU=硬三重寻呼)上传送。包括四个20或24比特MSID的硬四重寻呼帧可以在PCH(BU=硬四重寻呼)上传送。The same frame format is used for all SPACH channels, eg all frames always have a common header A. The content of header A determines whether header B is present in any given SPACH frame. Header A discriminates between hard (dedicated) paging frames, PCH frames, ARCH frames and SMSCH frames. A Hard Triple Page frame including three 34-bit MSIDs can be sent on the PCH (BU=Hard Triple Page). A hard quadruple page frame comprising four 20 or 24 bit MSIDs can be transmitted on the PCH (BU=hard quadruple page).
一个或多个L3消息可以在一帧中发送,或在几帧上被连续。MSID仅被携带在BU=PCH ARCH或SMSCH上,并具有BT=单个MSID、两个MSID、三重MSID、四重MSID或ARQ模式的BEGIN的帧中。IDT识别在给定SPACH帧中携带的所有MSID的格式(如:MSID格式不混合是允许的)。在PCH上携带寻呼对于迟于一个SPACH帧的连续是不允许的(尽管该规程对它是允许的)。所有其它的PCH消息可以迟于一个SPACH帧而继续。One or more L3 messages can be sent in one frame, or concatenated over several frames. MSID is only carried in frames with BU=PCH ARCH or SMSCH with BT=Single MSID, Double MSID, Triple MSID, Quadruple MSID or BEGIN in ARQ mode. The IDT identifies the formats of all MSIDs carried in a given SPACH frame (eg MSID formats are not mixed is allowed). Carrying pages on the PCH is not allowed for a continuation later than one SPACH frame (although the procedure allows it). All other PCH messages may continue later than one SPACH frame.
对于没有ARQ模式的操作,L2 SPACH规程支持发送给多个附加了MSID与L3消息之间的固定点对点关系的MSID一个L3消息。该消息图字段(MM)被用于控制第二层帧操作的这个方面。一个有效的SPACH帧需要与全包括在该帧中的一个给定L2帧有关的所有L2首部(如,来自给定SPACH帧的L2首部不能包捆成其它的SPACH帧)。补偿(offset)指示符字段(OI)被用于允许完成先前开始的第三层消息和开始一个新的发生在一个SPACH帧中的第三层消息。For operation without ARQ mode, the L2 SPACH procedure supports sending one L3 message to multiple MSIDs appended with a fixed point-to-point relationship between the MSID and the L3 message. The Message Map field (MM) is used to control this aspect of
SPACH帧格式的概述Overview of the SPACH frame format
下表概述了可能的SPACH格式:
图26A示出了该SPACH首部A。图26B示出了SPACH首部B。图26C示出了零帧。图26D示出了硬三重寻呼帧(34比特MIN)。图26E示出了硬四重寻呼帧(24比特MIN)。图26F示出了单个MSID帧(PCH)。图26G示出了双MSID帧(ARCH)。图26H示出了具有连续(ARCH)的双MSID帧。图26I示出了该连续帧(ARCH)。图26J示出了补偿单个MSID帧(ARCH)。图26K示出了三重MSTD帧(ARCH,用于三个MSID的一个L3消息)。图26L示出了该连续帧(ARCH)。图26M示出了ARQ模式的开始(SMSCH)。图26N示出了ARQ模式的连续(SMSCH)。Fig. 26A shows the SPACH header A. Fig. 26B shows SPACH header B. Figure 26C shows a zero frame. Figure 26D shows a hard triple page frame (34-bit MIN). Figure 26E shows a Hard Quadruple Paging frame (24-bit MIN). Figure 26F shows a single MSID frame (PCH). Figure 26G shows a dual MSID frame (ARCH). Figure 26H shows a dual MSID frame with continuation (ARCH). FIG. 26I shows the continuation frame (ARCH). Figure 26J illustrates compensating for a single MSID frame (ARCH). Figure 26K shows a triple MSTD frame (ARCH, one L3 message for three MSIDs). Fig. 26L shows the continuous frame (ARCH). Figure 26M shows the start of ARQ mode (SMSCH). FIG. 26N shows the continuous (SMSCH) of ARQ mode.
SPACH首部ASPACH header A
SPACH首部A包括脉冲串使用信息和对于休眠模式管理移动站的标志。BU字段提供了脉冲串使用的高电平指示。这些标志指示在休眠方式构形以及BCCH信息中的变化。该首部总是在所有可能的SPACH帧类型中出现。The SPACH header A includes burst usage information and a flag to manage the mobile station for sleep mode. The BU field provides a high level indication of burst usage. These flags indicate changes in sleep mode configuration as well as BCCH information. This header is always present in all possible SPACH frame types.
SPACH首部BSPACH header B
SPACH首部B包括用于识别第二层帧保留内容的附加首部信息。当首部A指示PCH、ARCH或SMSCH型脉冲串时,该首部出现。The SPACH header B includes additional header information for identifying the reserved content of the
零帧zero frame
当任何给定的SPACH帧没有东西要传送时,如果需要,则由BMI传送零帧。When there is nothing to transmit for any given SPACH frame, a zero frame is transmitted by the BMI, if required.
硬三重寻呼帧Hard Triple Paging Frame
一个硬三重寻呼包括三个34比特MIN的单个帧寻呼消息。A hard triple page consists of three 34-bit MIN single-frame page messages.
硬四重寻呼帧Hard Quadruple Paging Frame
一个硬四重寻呼包括由IDT确定的四个20或24比特MIS的一个单个帧寻呼消息。A hard quadruple page consists of a single frame page message for four 20 or 24 bit MISs as determined by the IDT.
单个MSID帧A single MSID frame
单个MSID帧用于在无ARQ模式中开始ARCH或SMSCHL3消息的发送。另外,该帧还可以用于发送定义的无ARQ L3 PCH消息(寻呼或其它)。使用单个MSID帧发送的寻呼消息不能连续至其它帧。A single MSID frame is used to start the transmission of an ARCH or SMS CHL3 message in no ARQ mode. In addition, this frame can also be used to send defined non-ARQ L3 PCH messages (paging or other). Paging messages sent using a single MSID frame cannot continue to other frames.
如果一个ARCH或SMSCH L3消息对于适于单个MSID的帧太长,那么如果必要,剩余的L3信息使用附加的CONTINUE帧或MSID帧携带。如果全部ARCH或SMSCH L3消息适于在一个单个MSID帧中,必要时则用填充符填充它。If an ARCH or SMSCH L3 message is too long to fit within a single MSID frame, then the remaining L3 information is carried using additional CONTINUE frames or MSID frames, if necessary. If the entire ARCH or SMSCH L3 message fits in a single MSID frame, it is padded with filler if necessary.
如果一个无寻呼PCH L3消息对于适于单个MSID的帧太长,那么如果必要,剩余的L3信息使用附加的CONTINUE帧或MSID帧携带。如果全部PCH L3消息适于在一个单个MSID帧中,必要时则用填充符填充它。If a no-page PCH L3 message is too long to fit in a single MSID frame, then the remaining L3 information is carried using additional CONTINUE frames or MSID frames, if necessary. If the entire PCH L3 message fits in a single MSID frame, it is padded with filler if necessary.
双MSID帧Double MSID frame
双MSID帧用于开始在无ARQ模式中的两个ARCH消息或两个PCH L3消息的发送。MSID的数量在以用于MSID的两个场合的同一IDT格式的BT字段中指示。使用双MSID帧的寻呼消息发送不能延长至其它帧。The double MSID frame is used to start the transmission of two ARCH messages or two PCH L3 messages in no ARQ mode. The number of MSIDs is indicated in the BT field in the same IDT format used for both instances of the MSID. Paging messaging using a double MSID frame cannot be extended to other frames.
三重MSID帧Triple MSID frame
三重MSID帧被用于开始在无ARQ模式中的三个ARCH L3消息或三个PCH L3消息的发送。MSID的数量在以用于MSID的所有场合的同一IDT格式的BT字段中指示。使用三重MSID帧的寻呼消息发送不能延长至其它帧。The triple MSID frame is used to initiate the transmission of three ARCH L3 messages or three PCH L3 messages in no ARQ mode. The number of MSIDs is indicated in the BT field in the same IDT format used for all instances of MSIDs. Paging message transmissions using triple MSID frames cannot be extended to other frames.
四重MSID帧Quadruple MSID frame
四重MSID帧被用于开始在无ARQ模式中的四个ARCH L3消息或四个PCH L3消息的发送。MSID的数量在以用于MSID的所有场合的同一IDT格式的DT字段中指示。使用四重MSID帧的寻呼消息发送不能延长至其它帧。A quadruple MSID frame is used to initiate the transmission of four ARCH L3 messages or four PCH L3 messages in no ARQ mode. The number of MSIDs is indicated in the DT field in the same IDT format used for all instances of MSIDs. Paging message transmissions using quadruple MSID frames cannot be extended to other frames.
CONTINUE帧CONTINUE frame
CONTINUE帧被用于对于前一帧太长的L3消息的继续。注意,对于任何给定SPACH帧专门的L2首部必须总是全携带在那一帧中(如与一个给定SPACH帧有关的L2首部将不利用接着的SPACH帧完成)。CONTINUE frames are used for continuation of L3 messages that were too long for the previous frame. Note that the L2 header specific to any given SPACH frame must always be fully carried in that frame (eg the L2 header associated with a given SPACH frame will not be done with the following SPACH frame).
ARQ模式BEGIN ARQ mode BEGIN
ARQ模式BEGIN帧被用于一个L3 ARCH或在ARQ模式中的SMSCH消息发送的开始。该ARQ模式仅包括在其L2首部中的一个MSID及L3消息本身的一部分。如果L3消息对于一个单一ARQ模式的BEGIN帧太长,如果必要,则保留的L3信息使用附加的ARQ模式CONTINUE帧携带。如果该L3消息适于在一个单个的ARQ模式BEGIN帧中,如必要,则用填充符填充之。The ARQ mode BEGIN frame is used for the start of a L3 ARCH or SMSCH message transmission in ARQ mode. The ARQ mode only includes an MSID in its L2 header and part of the L3 message itself. If the L3 message is too long for a single ARQ mode BEGIN frame, the reserved L3 information is carried in an additional ARQ mode CONTINUE frame if necessary. If the L3 message fits in a single ARQ mode BEGIN frame, it is padded with filler if necessary.
与TID字段连接的PE字段识别由ARQ模式BEGIN帧开始的处理,并且用于使任何随后的ARQ模式CONTINUE帧与这一同样的处理结合。一个ARQ模式BEGIN帧具有一个与其有关的隐含的FRNO零值。The PE field concatenated with the TID field identifies the processing started by the ARQ Mode BEGIN frame, and is used to associate any subsequent ARQ Mode CONTINUE frame with this same processing. An ARQ mode BEGIN frame has associated with it an implicit FRNO value of zero.
ARQ模式CONTINUE帧ARQ mode CONTINUE frame
该ARQ模式CONTINUE帧用于延长对于前一ARQ模式帧(BEGIN或CONTINUE)太长的一个L3 ARCH或SMSCH消息。FRNO字段识别在整个L3消息范围内的CONTINUE帧。该FRNO字段值对于由一个给定处理支持的各CONTINUE帧的发送是增大的(即,多个CONTINUE帧可能被发送以完成由ARQ模式BEGIN帧开始的处理)。该ARQ模式的连续帧也被用于重复由移动站未正确接收的任何前次传送的ARQ CONTINUE帧The ARQ mode CONTINUE frame is used to extend an L3 ARCH or SMSCH message that was too long for the previous ARQ mode frame (BEGIN or CONTINUE). The FRNO field identifies CONTINUE frames within the entire L3 message. The FRNO field value is incremented for the transmission of each CONTINUE frame supported by a given process (ie, multiple CONTINUE frames may be sent to complete the process started by the ARQ mode BEGIN frame). The continuation frame of this ARQ mode is also used to repeat any previously transmitted ARQ CONTINUE frame that was not correctly received by the mobile station
SPACH字段概述Overview of SPACH Fields
如下的表概述了SPACH第二层规程字段:
开始MS侧start MS side
开始随机访问start random access
在由随机访问发送的第一消息单元已发送之前,移动站将处于“开始随机访问”状态。The mobile station will be in the "start random access" state until the first message unit sent by random access has been sent.
开始保留访问:Start reserved access:
在由基于保留访问发送的第一消息单元已被发送之前,移动站将处于“开始保留访问”状态。The mobile station will be in the "start reserved access" state until the first message unit sent by the reserved access basis has been sent.
多单元Multiple units
如果有多个与同一未解决传输的访问事件相关的单元,则该移动站将处于“多单元”状态。A mobile station will be in "multiple cell" state if there are more than one cell associated with the same outstanding transmitted access event.
在最后的脉冲串之后After the last burst
如果一个访问事件的最后单元已被发送,则该移动站将处于“在最脉冲串之后”的状态。If the last unit of an access event has been sent, the mobile station will be in the "after most burst" state.
成功 success
在一个消息被成功地发送之后,该移动站将处于“成功”状态。After a message has been successfully sent, the mobile station will be in the "success" state.
规程的组成部分Components of the procedure
正向共享控制反馈标志 Forward sharing control feedback flag
总则General
正向共享控制反馈(SCF)标志被用于控制保留信道,如RACH。Forward Shared Control Feedback (SCF) flags are used to control reserved channels such as RACH.
忙/保留/空闲Busy/Reserved/Free
忙/保留/空闲标志被用于指示是否相应的上行链路RACH时隙处于忙,保留或空闲。有六个比特被用于这些标志,并且不同的状态被编码,如下表所示:
接收/未接收received/not received
接收/未接收标志(R/N)用于指示该基站是否接收了最后传输的脉冲串。五次重复码被用于对这些标志进行编码,如下表所示:
部分回声partial echo
部分加声信息被用于识别在初始随机访问脉冲串之后MS被正确地接收和/或MS打算具有保留时隙的访问。IS-54B的七个LSB被分配给PE。该信道编码已在上边的物理层说明书中被描述。Part of the voiced information is used to identify that the MS was correctly received after the initial random access burst and/or that the MS intends to have access to reserved slots. Seven LSBs of IS-54B are assigned to PE. The channel coding has been described in the physical layer specification above.
SCF标志的解码Decoding of the SCF flag
BRI和R/NBRI and R/N
下表表明移动站如何按照第二层的状态对所接收的标志解码。应注意的是,仅仅与第二层状态有关的标志被示出。在“开始随机访问”状态中,BRI标志仅仅是关联标志。在多脉冲串消息传输期间,BRI与R/N标志是关联的。在下表的总结中,bi等于比特值。 The following table shows how the mobile station decodes the received flag according to the state of the second layer. It should be noted that only flags related to the state of the second layer are shown. In the "start random access" state, the BRI flag is only an association flag. During multi-burst message transmission, the BRI is associated with the R/N flag. In the summary of the table below, bi is equal to the bit value.
部分回声partial echo
如果其不同于纠正编码部分回声(CPE)少于3比特,则该移动站把所接收的编码部分回声值解释为已经纠错的解码。这被称为PE匹配。If it differs from the corrected coded partial echo (CPE) by less than 3 bits, the mobile station interprets the received coded partial echo value as an error-corrected decode. This is called PE matching.
随机访问的过程The process of random access
移动站测 Mobile Site Test
一个移动站在认为试图变换一个错误消息之前,被允许最大Y+1的传输尝试,其中Y=(0…7)。在无空闲状态或一个传输尝试之后,用于移动站的随机延时周期被均匀地分布在具有6.667ms(时隙长度)颗粒性的0和200ms之间。移动站不允许产生多于Z的各脉冲串的连续重复,其中Z=(0…3)。A mobile station is allowed a maximum of Y+1 transmission attempts, where Y=(0...7), before it considers an attempt to convert an error message. After no idle state or one transmission attempt, the random delay period for the mobile station is evenly distributed between 0 and 200ms with a granularity of 6.667ms (slot length). The mobile station is not allowed to generate more than Z consecutive repetitions of each burst, where Z=(0...3).
开始随机访问start random access
当该移动站处于开始“随机访问”状态时,它将看到下行链路DCC时隙的首次出现,而不管当前DCC的子信道(见物理层)。如果移动站找到空闲时隙,它将在相应的子信道上行链路RACH中送出该消息的第一单元。如果这个时隙在忙或保留中被发现,则移动站将产生一个随机的时延。在随机延时期满之后,该移动站将重复前面的过程。对于空闲的检索各次传输尝试最多重复X+1次,其中X=(0.9)。除初始之外,MS在随机访问过程期间必须监视它的PCH。When the mobile station is in the starting "random access" state, it will see the first occurrence of a downlink DCC slot regardless of the subchannel of the current DCC (see physical layer). If the mobile station finds a free time slot, it will send the first unit of the message in the corresponding sub-channel uplink RACH. If the slot is found to be busy or reserved, the mobile station will generate a random delay. After the random delay expires, the mobile station will repeat the previous process. Each transmission attempt for an idle retrieval is repeated at most X+1 times, where X=(0.9). Except initially, the MS has to monitor its PCH during the random access procedure.
开始保留访问 Start reserved access
对于标有BRI作为保留的时隙及一个PE匹配,当移动站处于“开始保留访问”状态时,它将连续地在所有下行链路的当前DCC的时隙中看到,而不考虑子信道。该BS可以对一个给定的MS分配保留时隙,而不必考虑该MS先前使用的子信道。如果移动站找到这一时隙,则移动站将在相应的上行链路RACH子信道中送出该消息的第一单元。如果该移动站没有在预定的超时期(T)内找到这一时隙,移动站将进入“开始随机访问”状态。For slots marked with BRI as reserved and a PE match, when the mobile station is in the "begin reserved access" state, it will continuously see in the slots of the current DCC in all downlinks, regardless of the subchannel . The BS can assign reserved time slots to a given MS regardless of the subchannels previously used by the MS. If the mobile station finds this time slot, the mobile station will send the first unit of the message in the corresponding uplink RACH subchannel. If the mobile station does not find this time slot within a predetermined time-out period (T), the mobile station will enter the "start random access" state.
对PE匹配的检验Check for PE match
在该随机访问第一脉冲已被发送之后。移动站在相应DCC子信道的下一时隙中读出部分回声字段。如果找到PE匹配,该移动站将假设下行链路中的SCF标志已被分配给它,然后进入以后的最后脉冲串状态或多单元状态。如果移动站没有找到PE匹配,它将产生一个随机延时,并进入开始随机访问状态。After the random access first burst has been sent. The mobile station reads the partial echo field in the next time slot of the corresponding DCC subchannel. If a PE match is found, the mobile station will assume that the SCF designation in the downlink has been assigned to it, and then enter the subsequent last burst state or multi-cell state. If the mobile station does not find a PE match, it will generate a random delay and enter the start random access state.
多单元Multiple units
如果该移动站具有多个单元要发送,它将解码相应子信道的SCF标志。如果它找到R/N标志被置位,它将认为最后发送的的脉冲串被收到;反之它将认为它没被收到。如果它发现该信道被置于保留或空闲,它也将认为该脉冲串没被收到。如果多于S+1个,其中S=(0,1),连续的“不忙”读出由移动站产生,它将放弃所传的这个消息而在一随机的延时之后开始另一个传输尝试。如果该脉冲串被认为收到了,该移动站将在下子信道的下一时隙中发送该消息的下一个脉冲串。如果该脉冲串发现没被接收,则该移动站将重发最后传送的脉冲串。If the mobile station has multiple cells to transmit, it will decode the SCF flag for the corresponding subchannel. If it finds the R/N flag set, it will consider the last sent burst received; otherwise it will consider it not received. It will also consider the burst not received if it finds that the channel is placed on reserve or idle. If more than S+1, where S=(0,1), consecutive "not busy" reads are generated by the mobile station, it will discard the transmitted message and begin another transmission after a random delay try. If the burst is deemed received, the mobile station will transmit the next burst of the message in the next time slot of the lower subchannel. If the burst is found not received, the mobile station will retransmit the last transmitted burst.
最后脉冲串之后After the last burst
如果该移动站读出当前使用子信道的SCF标志,在它已发送该最后脉冲串及从R/N标志中确定这一脉冲串已被接收之后,SCF规程的MS侧将认为该消息已被正确地传送。如果它发现该脉冲串没被收到及该信道被置于保留或空闲,它也将认为该脉冲串没被收到。如果多于S+1个,其中S=(0,1),连续的组合“没收到”及“不忙”读出由移动站产生,它将放弃该消息的传输,而在一随机延时之后开始另一个传输尝试。如果该脉冲串找到没被接收,该移动站将重发最后传送的脉冲串。If the mobile station reads the SCF flag of the currently used subchannel, after it has sent the last burst and determined from the R/N flag that this burst has been received, the MS side of the SCF procedure will consider the message to have been received. sent correctly. It will also consider the burst not received if it finds that the burst has not been received and the channel has been placed on reserve or idle. If more than S+1, where S=(0,1), consecutive combined "not received" and "not busy" reads are generated by the mobile station, it will abort the transmission of the message and Afterwards another transfer attempt is started. If the burst is found not received, the mobile station will resend the last transmitted burst.
MS和BS随机访问的流程The process of MS and BS random access
上述的随机访问过程在图27A-B中被说明。图27A表示MS的随机访问过程,而图27B表示BS的随机访问过程。下述是用在图27A中流程使用的真值表逐条列举的说明:The random access process described above is illustrated in Figures 27A-B. FIG. 27A shows the random access procedure of the MS, and FIG. 27B shows the random access procedure of the BS. The following is an itemized illustration of the truth table used in the process in Figure 27A:
1.在一个基于访问的争用开始,该真值表被检查。如果SCF=“保留”或“忙”,则该移动站将增加忙/空闲计数器,然后将它与X比较。如果SCF=“空闲”,则移动站将设置单元计数器为1并发送该访问的第一脉冲串。1. At the beginning of an access-based contention, the truth table is checked. If SCF = "Reserved" or "Busy", the mobile station will increment the busy/idle counter and compare it to X. If SCF = "idle", the mobile station shall set the cell counter to 1 and send the first burst of the access.
2.在发送至少具有一个多未定脉冲的一个访问的给定脉冲串之后,该真值表被检查。如果SCF=“空闲”或“保留”,则移动站将增加“停止”计数器和PB计数器,然后比较该“停止”计数器与S。如果SCF=“忙”和“未收到”则移动站将增加PB计数器,然后比校它与Z。如果SCF=“忙”和“收到”,则该移动站将增加“单元”计数器,并设置PB计数器为零。2. After sending a given burst of an access with at least one multi-pending burst, the truth table is checked. If SCF = "idle" or "reserved", the mobile station will increment the "stop" counter and the PB counter, then compare the "stop" counter with S. If SCF = "busy" and "not received" then the mobile station will increment the PB counter and then compare it with Z. If SCF = "Busy" and "Received", the mobile station will increment the "Unit" counter and set the PB counter to zero.
3.在发送一个访问的最后脉冲串之后,该真值表被检查。如果SCF=“收到”,那么移动站将增加“停止”计数器与和PB计数器,然后比较“停止”计数器与S。如果SCF=“保留”和“未收到”,则该移动站将增加“停止”计数器和PB计数器,然后比较“停止”计数器与S。如果SCF=“忙”和“未收到”,则该移动站将重发该访问的最后脉冲串。3. After sending the last burst of an access, the truth table is checked. If SCF = "Received", then the mobile station will increment the "Stop" counter and the PB counter, then compare the "Stop" counter with S. If SCF = "Reserved" and "Not Received", the mobile station will increment the "Stop" counter and the PB counter, then compare the "Stop" counter with S. If SCF = "busy" and "not received", the mobile station will retransmit the last burst of the visit.
4.在基于访问的保留开始,该真值表被检查。如果SCF=“忙”或“空闲”,那么该移动站审查该保留计时器。如果SCF=“保留”和PE不匹配,则该移动站检查保留定时器。如果SCF=“保留”和PE不匹配,则该移动站将置单元计数器为1,并发送该访问的第一脉冲串。4. At the beginning of an access-based reservation, the truth table is checked. If SCF = "busy" or "idle", then the mobile station checks the reservation timer. If SCF="Reserved" and PE do not match, the mobile station checks the reserved timer. If SCF="Reserved" and PE do not match, the mobile station will set the cell counter to 1 and send the first burst of the access.
无线链路质量的监视(MRLQ)Monitoring of radio link quality (MRLQ)
测量过程及处理 Measuring process and processing
移动站将在各寻呼帧中一个时隙的读出期间测量字误码。在各寻呼帧期间,MS可以读出相应于PCH连续和第一/第二超帧结构的一个或多个SPACH时隙。然而仅一个读出将更新MRLQ字误码参数,即每个寻呼帧仅有一个更新。在RACH操作期间,MS也必须为此目的读出每寻呼帧的一个正向时隙。The mobile station will measure word errors during the readout of one slot in each paging frame. During each paging frame, the MS can read one or more SPACH slots corresponding to the PCH continuation and first/second superframe structure. However only one read will update the MRLQ word error parameter, ie only one update per paging frame. During RACH operation, the MS must also read one forward slot per paging frame for this purpose.
该MS将根据一个网孔的预占(Campimg)初始时设置MRLQ计数器为十(10)。如果CRC检查是成功的,则各MRLQ的更新将用一(1)来增加MRLQ计数器。一个不成功的读出将用一(1)来减少MRLQ计数器。如果该MRLQ计数器的值超过十(10),该MRLQ计数器将被缩短到十(10)的值,即它的值将决超不过十(10)。The MS shall initially set the MRLQ counter to ten (10) based on one cell's camping (Campimg). Each update of the MRLQ will increment the MRLQ counter by one (1) if the CRC check is successful. An unsuccessful read will decrement the MRLQ counter by one (1). If the value of the MRLQ counter exceeds ten (10), the MRLQ counter will be shortened to a value of ten (10), ie its value will never exceed ten (10).
无线链路错误的标准Criteria for wireless link errors
当MRLQ计数器达到零(0)时,则一个无线链路错误被声明,在这种情况下,MS将检查全重选数据参数。该MS将接着执行在NL中频率上的RSS测量,直到全重选数据参数等于一。When the MRLQ counter reaches zero (0), then a radio link error is declared, in which case the MS will check the full reselection data parameter. The MS will then perform RSS measurements on frequencies in NL until the full reselection data parameter equals one.
移动辅助信道的分配Allocation of Mobile Auxiliary Channels
总则General
当移动站处于空闲状态时,该移动站将通知该系统前向DCC的质量(这一功能在此称为功能ⅰ)。该移动站产生的报告将包括字误码率(WER),比特误码率(BER)和所接收信号长度(RSS)测量的结果。在空闲状态期间,该移动站还测量在其它频率上的RSS,并报告给该系统(这另一功能在此称为功能ⅱ)。When the mobile station is in the idle state, the mobile station will inform the system of the quality of the forward DCC (this function is referred to herein as function i). The report generated by the mobile station will include the results of Word Error Rate (WER), Bit Error Rate (BER) and Received Signal Size (RSS) measurements. During the idle state, the mobile station also measures RSS on other frequencies and reports to the system (this other function is referred to herein as function ii).
操作模式operation mode
根据在BCCH上收到的信息,系统能够选择如下模式:According to the information received on BCCH, the system can choose the following modes:
1.MACA无效(MACA-状态=00)1. Invalid MACA (MACA-STATUS=00)
2.功能ⅰ(MACA-STATUS=×1)2. Function ⅰ (MACA-STATUS=×1)
3.功能ⅱ(MACA-STATUS=1×)3. Function Ⅱ(MACA-STATUS=1×)
4.用MACA TYPE参数(MACA TYPE分别=01,10和11)按照访问尝试的类型(寻呼响应,起始和登记)启动功能ⅰ和功能ⅱ。4. Use the MACA TYPE parameter (MACA TYPE = 01, 10 and 11 respectively) to enable function i and function ii according to the type of access attempt (paging response, origination and registration).
广播信息 Broadcast information
该BCCH包括如下信息:The BCCH includes the following information:
1.MACA-STATUS:无MACA,功能ⅰ,功能ⅱ,或功能ⅰ和ⅱ。1. MACA-STATUS: No MACA, function i, function ii, or functions i and ii.
2.MACA-LIST:该系统在移动站将要测量其信号强度的BCCH上发送有8个频率的表。2. MACA-LIST: This system sends a list of 8 frequencies on the BCCH on which the mobile station will measure its signal strength.
3.MACA-TYPE:访问的什么类型将包括功能ⅰ或功能ⅱ,即使有也作为MACA报告的一部分。3. MACA-TYPE: What type of access will include function i or function ii, if any, as part of the MACA report.
MACA报告信息的内容Contents of MACA report information
该MACA报告将包含如下的信息:The MACA report will contain the following information:
1.什么类型的MACA报告正被产生(功能ⅰ和ⅱ)。1. What type of MACA report is being generated (functions i and ii).
2.是否一个MACA报告是基于一个全测量间隔。2. Whether a MACA report is based on a full measurement interval.
3.该测量是由特定MACA报告产生的。3. This measurement is generated by a specific MACA report.
过程 process
用于DCC(功能ⅰ)的测量过程 Measurement process for DCC (function ⅰ)
测量单位 Units of measurement
该移动站将报告信道质量和信号强度的测量。信道质量被定义为字误码率(WER)和比特误码率(BER)。信号强度用dBm测量。The mobile station will report measurements of channel quality and signal strength. Channel quality is defined as word error rate (WER) and bit error rate (BER). Signal strength is measured in dBm.
测量时间间隔The measurement time interval
该移动站执行与对于信号质量和信号强度的PCH有关的在其最后32寻呼帧上的运行平均。该第一SPACH读出将更新所有三个可变量。信号强度的平均以dBm单位做。平均处理可以类似于IS-54B MAHO。The mobile station performs a running average over its last 32 paging frames related to the PCH for signal quality and signal strength. This first SPACH read will update all three variables. Averaging of signal strength is done in dBm units. Averaging can be done similar to IS-54B MAHO.
在另一信道(功能ⅱ)的测量过程Measurement process on another channel (function ii)
测量单位 Units of measurement
该移动站将以dBm为单位报告信号强度。The mobile station will report signal strength in dBm.
测量时间间隔The measurement time interval
该移动站将测量各频率至少4次。在同一频率测量之间的最小时间将是20ms。在同一频率测量之间的最大时间将是500ms。平均信号强度以dBm为单位做。MS可以进行连续测量或仅在一个访问前测量。The mobile station will measure each frequency at least 4 times. The minimum time between measurements on the same frequency will be 20ms. The maximum time between measurements at the same frequency will be 500ms. Average signal strength is done in dBm. MS can take continuous measurements or just before a visit.
MACA报告 MACA Report
该移动站通过移动全部MACA间隔标志通知该系统,是否在那一时间完成了一个全测量间隔,该MACA报告被送出。The mobile station informs the system by moving the full MACA interval flag, whether a full measurement interval has been completed at that time, the MACA report is sent.
SPACH ARQSPACH ARQ
BMI侧BMI side
开始ARQ模式Start ARQ mode
该BMI通过发送一个ARQ模式BEGIN帧开始一个ARQ模式的程序,该帧包括移动站标识(MSID)、部分回声(PE),它被置于该移动站IS-54B MIN的7个最小有效比特上、过程标识(TID),它唯一地识别一个ARQ模式过程的例子正开始送至该移动站,L3长度指示符(L3LI),它用于一个移动站计算希望跟着ARQ模式BEGIN帧的连续帧的数量,以及一部分L3数据(L3 DATA)。The BMI starts an ARQ mode procedure by sending an ARQ mode BEGIN frame, which includes the mobile station identification (MSID), partial echo (PE), which is placed on the 7 least significant bits of the mobile station IS-54B MIN , the process identification (TID), which uniquely identifies an instance of an ARQ mode process is beginning to be sent to the mobile station, the L3 length indicator (L3LI), which is used by a mobile station to calculate the number of consecutive frames expected to follow the ARQ mode BEGIN frame Quantity, and a part of L3 data (L3 DATA).
开始ARQ模式的确认 Acknowledgment of starting ARQ mode
在发送一个ARQ模式BEGIN帧之后,该BMI可以等待来自移动站的一个确认,由于这一帧包括对一个ARQ模式全部成功处理的关键信息。如果BMI决定不等待一个移动站的确认,它将着手发送一个ARQ模式CONTINUE帧。反之,BMI将进行如下:该BMI以设置BRI标志为“保留”和设置PE为相应于同一下行链路时隙中目标移动站的值轮询该移动站。然后该BMI在轮询该移动站的同一访问通路上等待一个上行链路ARQ状态消息。如果ARQ状态消息在保留的访问时隙上没有被收到,或者收到了但具有尚未认可帧的错误命令,则BMI将重发开始ARQ模式消息直到预定的次数。如果在一定次数的尝试之后该BMI还没收到一个正确的ARQ状态消息,它将终止ARQ模式的处理。如果在一定次数的尝试之后该BMI收到了一个正确的ARQ状态消息,它将着于传送一个ARQ模式的CONTINUE帧。After sending an ARQ mode BEGIN frame, the BMI can wait for an acknowledgment from the mobile station, since this frame contains the key information for all successful processing of an ARQ mode. If the BMI decides not to wait for an acknowledgment from a mobile station, it proceeds to send an ARQ mode CONTINUE frame. Conversely, the BMI will proceed as follows: The BMI polls the mobile station with the BRI flag set to "reserved" and the PE set to the value corresponding to the target mobile station in the same downlink time slot. The BMI then waits for an uplink ARQ status message on the same access channel that polled the mobile station. If an ARQ Status message is not received on a reserved access slot, or an erroneous command is received with a frame not yet acknowledged, the BMI will retransmit the Start ARQ Mode message up to a predetermined number of times. If the BMI has not received a correct ARQ status message after a certain number of attempts, it shall terminate the processing of the ARQ mode. If the BMI receives a correct ARQ status message after a certain number of attempts, it shall proceed to transmit a CONTINUE frame in ARQ mode.
ARQ模式的连续Continuous in ARQ mode
BMI送出ARQ模式CONTINUE帧以完成初始的ARQ模式处理。这些帧包括设置到该移动站的IS-54B MIN7个最小有效比特的部分回声(PE),唯一地识别正被送至该移动站的一个ARQ模式处理实例的处理标识(TID),识别各连续帧的连续帧号(FRNO),和一部分L3数据据。一个ARQ模式BEGIN帧具有一个隐含的与其相关的FRNO的O值,其中ARQ模式CONTINUE帧具有一个以1开始的显然的FRNO值。该FRNO值对于以特定ARQ模式处理支持的BMI传送的各新的ARQ模式连续帧是增加的。The BMI sends an ARQ mode CONTINUE frame to complete the initial ARQ mode processing. These frames include a partial echo (PE) of the 7 least significant bits of the IS-54B MIN set to the mobile station, a transaction identifier (TID) that uniquely identifies an ARQ mode transaction instance being sent to the mobile station, and identifies each consecutive The continuous frame number (FRNO) of the frame, and a part of the L3 data. An ARQ mode BEGIN frame has an implicit FRNO value of 0 associated with it, whereas an ARQ mode CONTINUE frame has an explicit FRNO value starting with 1. The FRNO value is incremented for each new ARQ mode consecutive frame transmitted with a BMI supported by the particular ARQ mode process.
在传送任何中间ARQ模式CONTINUE帧之后,该BMI开始轮询该移动站。如果该BMI决定发出一个中间轮询,它将着手进行:该BMI设置BMI标志为“保留”和设置PE为相应于在同一下行链路时隙中目标移动站的值。然后BMI在轮询该移动站的同一访问通路上等待一个上行链路ARQ状态消息。如果在保留的访问时隙上未收到ARQ状态消息,BMI将发送该开始ARQ模式消息至预定的次数。如果在一定次数的尝试之后BMI还没收到一个正确的ARQ状态消息,它将终止ARQ模式的处理。如果BMI收到了一个ARQ状态消息,它将从标有错误接收的那些开始发送ARQ模式CONTINUE帧。当BMI送出最后ARQ模式CONTINUE帧时,它将以下一部分所描述的进行。After transmitting any intermediate ARQ mode CONTINUE frames, the BMI starts polling the mobile station. If the BMI decides to issue an intermediate poll, it proceeds: the BMI sets the BMI flag to "reserved" and sets PE to the value corresponding to the target mobile station in the same downlink time slot. The BMI then waits for an uplink ARQ status message on the same access channel that polled the mobile station. If no ARQ Status message is received on the reserved access slot, the BMI will send the Start ARQ Mode message up to a predetermined number of times. If the BMI has not received a correct ARQ status message after a certain number of attempts, it will terminate the processing of the ARQ mode. If the BMI receives an ARQ status message, it shall send ARQ mode CONTINUE frames starting with those marked as received in error. When the BMI sends the last ARQ mode CONTINUE frame, it will proceed as described in the next section.
ARQ模式的终止Termination of ARQ mode
在送出最后的ARQ模式CONTINUE帧之后,BMI轮询该移动站如下:BMI设置BRI标志为“保留”和设置PE为相应于同一下行链路时隙中目标移动站的值。然后BMI在轮询该移动站的同一访问通路上等待一个上行链路ARQ状态消息。如果在保留的访问时隙上未收到ARQ状态消息,BMI将重发该开始ARQ模式消息至预定的次数。如果在一定次数的偿试之后BMI还没收到一个正确的ARQ状态消息,它将终止ARQ状态模式的处理。如果BMI收到一个ARQ状态消息并且FRNO MAP指示“全部正确”,则ARQ模式的处理被认为已成功的完成。如果BMI收到一个ARQ状态消息,但FRNO MAP没指出“全部正确”,它将发送标有接收不正确的ARQ模式CONTIUE帧。在终止该ARQ模式处理之前,该BMI将重发任意给定的ARQ模式CONTINUE帧至预定的最大次数。After sending the last ARQ mode CONTINUE frame, the BMI polls the mobile station as follows: The BMI sets the BRI flag to "reserved" and sets PE to the value corresponding to the target mobile station in the same downlink slot. The BMI then waits for an uplink ARQ status message on the same access channel that polled the mobile station. If no ARQ Status message is received on the reserved access slot, the BMI will retransmit the Start ARQ Mode message a predetermined number of times. If the BMI has not received a correct ARQ status message after a certain number of attempts, it will terminate the processing of the ARQ status mode. If the BMI receives an ARQ Status message and the FRNO MAP indicates "all correct", the ARQ mode process is considered to have completed successfully. If the BMI receives an ARQ status message, but the FRNO MAP does not indicate "all correct", it will send an ARQ mode CONTIUE frame marked incorrectly received. The BMI shall retransmit any given ARQ Mode CONTINUE frame up to a predetermined maximum number of times before terminating the ARQ Mode process.
MS侧MS side
开始ARQ模式Start ARQ mode
在一个移动站已进入开始ARQ模式及成功地完成ARCH或SMSCH消息第一脉冲串的发送之后(如SCF标志所指示的),该移动站在成功地完成这一脉冲串传送之后开始从40ms的预定数量的SPACH帧中读出ARCH或SMSCH。当它收到具有匹配它自己的MSID的ARQ模式BEGIN帧时,该移动站将着手进行:TID为ARQ模式传输识别目地而被存储。多个未解决的ARQ模式CONTINUE帧将根据所接收的L3LI被计算。FRNO MAP将对于FRNO零(相应于ARQ模式BEGIN)被设置为“接收到”,并且对于所有未解决的ARQ模式CONTINUE帧被设置为“未接收到”。该FRNO MAP支持BMI传输直到32个ARQ模式帧长(1BEGIN和31CONTINUE)。在L3 DATA中携带的L3消息部分将被存储。然后该移动站将着手进行下一部分描述的内容。After a mobile station has entered the start ARQ mode and has successfully completed the transmission of the first burst of an ARCH or SMSCH message (as indicated by the SCF flag), the mobile station begins the period from 40 ms after the successful completion of this burst transmission. ARCH or SMSCH is read in a predetermined number of SPACH frames. When it receives an ARQ-mode BEGIN frame with an MSID matching its own, the mobile station will proceed: TID is stored for ARQ-mode transmission identification purposes. A number of outstanding ARQ mode CONTINUE frames will be calculated from the received L3LI. The FRNO MAP shall be set to "received" for FRNO zero (corresponding to ARQ mode BEGIN) and to "not received" for all outstanding ARQ mode CONTINUE frames. The FRNO MAP supports BMI transmissions up to 32 ARQ mode frame lengths (1BEGIN and 31CONTINUE). The part of the L3 message carried in L3 DATA will be stored. The mobile station will then proceed to what is described in the next section.
ARQ模式的连续Continuous in ARQ mode
该移动站将读出SPACH帧并作如下响应:如果轮询发出(即PE匹配与一个SCF保留命令一起产生),则该移动站将送一个具有指示当前FRNO接收状态的FRNO MAP的一个ARQ状态至BMI。如果该FRNO MAP指示存在“全部正确”状态,则移动站认为相应的ARQ模式的处理被成功地完成。如果ARQ模式CONTINUE帧对于一个尚未认可ARQ模式处理(即PE和TID的匹配)被正确地接收,该移动站将存储这里包含的L3 DATA,并设置相应的FRNOMAP部分为RECEIVED。如果没有ARQ模式CONTINUE帧或轮询在一预定期间被收到,该移动站将发送一个利用基于随机访问争用的ARQ状态消息。在相应的ARQ模式传送被终止之前,这种自发的ARQ状态可以大量地被发送。图28A-B表示MS(图28A)和BS(图28B)在SPACH ARQ模式中的操作。第三及更高层第三层的操作The mobile station will read the SPACH frame and respond as follows: If the poll is issued (i.e. PE match is generated together with an SCF reservation order), the mobile station will send an ARQ status with FRNO MAP indicating the current FRNO reception status to BMI. If the FRNO MAP indicates that there is an "all correct" status, the mobile station considers that the processing of the corresponding ARQ mode is successfully completed. If the ARQ mode CONTINUE frame is correctly received for an unacknowledged ARQ mode process (ie PE and TID matching), the mobile station shall store the L3 DATA contained therein and set the corresponding FRNOMAP part to RECEIVED. If no ARQ mode CONTINUE frames or polls are received within a predetermined period, the mobile station will send an ARQ status message using contention based random access. Such unsolicited ARQ states may be sent in bulk before the corresponding ARQ mode transmission is terminated. 28A-B illustrate the operation of MS (FIG. 28A) and BS (FIG. 28B) in SPACH ARQ mode.
图29表示在下面将更详细讨论的移动站的状态图。移动站状态的描述零状态(D1)Figure 29 shows a state diagram for a mobile station which will be discussed in more detail below. Description of mobile station state Zero state (D1)
如果一个移动站被关掉电源,它将处于“零”状态。当电源开启时,移动站将进入“控制信道扫描和锁定”状态。控制信道扫描和锁定状态(D2)If a mobile station is powered off, it will be in a "zero" state. When the power is turned on, the mobile station will enter the "control channel scan and lock" state. Control channel scan and lock status (D2)
当移动站处于选择一个候选业务提供者(ACC或DCC)的处理时,它将处于“控制信道扫描和锁定”状态。而在这种状态中,一个移动站可以在任何时间确定一个模拟控制信道(ACC)为最佳业务提供者,在这样情况下它将进入“初始化”任务(见IS-54B的2.6.1)。另外,该移动站将尝试找到一个数字控制信道(DCC)的业务提供者。它可以搜索一个如下面在DCC扫描和锁定过程部分所描述的候选DCC。如果一个移动站找到一个候选的DCC,它将执行下面描述的网孔选择程序。如果该候选DCC满足在该网孔选择程序中描述的标准,则该移动站将进入下面描述的“DCC预占”状态。否则,该移动站将搜索另一个候选的DCC。DCC预占状态(D3)When a mobile station is in the process of selecting a candidate service provider (ACC or DCC), it will be in the "control channel scan and lock" state. While in this state, a mobile station can determine an analog control channel (ACC) as the best service provider at any time, in which case it will enter the "initialization" task (see 2.6.1 of IS-54B) . Additionally, the mobile station will attempt to find a Digital Control Channel (DCC) service provider. It can search for a candidate DCC as described below in the DCC Scanning and Locking Process section. If a mobile station finds a candidate DCC, it will perform the cell selection procedure described below. If the candidate DCC meets the criteria described in the cell selection procedure, the mobile station will enter the "DCC Camping" state described below. Otherwise, the mobile station will search for another candidate DCC. DCC reservation status (D3)
只要一个移动站被逻辑地连接到按照下述网孔选择规则规定的“最佳”网孔,它就将处于“DCC预占”状态。在网孔重新选择或当访问的系统用于一个移动站产生一个呼叫、一个移动站终止一个呼叫、一个登记、一个SSD更新或一个点对点SMS(移动站终止)时,该移动站将离开这一状态。当读出其当前的DCC或临近的DCC的广播信息时,该移动站将不出现“DCC预占”状态。而在这一状态中,该移动站根据所接收的不同信息而执行不同的任务。As long as a mobile station is logically connected to the "best" cell as specified by the cell selection rules described below, it will be in the "DCC Camping" state. At cell reselection or when the visited system is used for a mobile station to originate a call, a mobile station terminate a call, a registration, an SSD update or a point-to-point SMS (mobile station terminated), the mobile station will leave the state. When reading the broadcast information of its current DCC or neighboring DCCs, the mobile station will not appear in the "DCC camped" state. While in this state, the mobile station performs different tasks depending on the received different information.
如果一个BCCH消息被收到,该移动站将按照所收到的消息更新存储的BCCH信息。如果一个登记参数消息被收到,并且可选择信息单元“REGID参数”不是这一消息的一部分,那么该移动站将不在这个DCC上增加REGID。如果该可选信息单元“REGID参数”和“REG周期”是这一消息的部分,该移动站将通过连续监视它或内部增加它的每个REGID-PER超帧保持一个更新的REGID考贝。然后该移动站将调用下面描述的这个登记程序。If a BCCH message is received, the mobile station will update the stored BCCH information according to the received message. If a Registration Parameters message is received, and the optional information element "REGID parameter" is not part of this message, then the mobile station shall not add REGID to this DCC. If the optional information elements "REGID parameter" and "REG period" are part of this message, the mobile station shall maintain an updated REGID code by continuously monitoring it or incrementing it internally every REGID-PER superframe. The mobile station will then invoke the registration procedure described below.
如果BCCH邻近网孔消息被收到,如果必要,则该移动站将以调用网孔重选程序开始监视为网孔重选目的的邻近DCC。If a BCCH Neighbor Cell message is received, the mobile station will begin monitoring neighboring DCCs for cell reselection purposes by invoking a cell reselection procedure, if necessary.
该移动站将响应下面示出的状态:The mobile station will respond with the states shown below:
PER-COUNTER超时:该登记程序将被调用。PER-COUNTER TIMEOUT: The registration procedure will be called.
REREG-TMR超时:该登记程序将被调用。REREG-TMR timeout: The registration procedure will be called.
REGID增加事件:该登记程序将被调用。REGID INCREASE EVENT: The register procedure will be called.
断电事件:该登记程序将被调用。Power down event: The registration procedure will be called.
原始接收的FDCC指示包括一个PCH消息:终止程序将被调用。The originally received FDCC indication includes a PCH message: Termination procedure shall be invoked.
用户开始:该开始程序将被调用。User Start: The start procedure will be called.
当前DCC被阻塞:如果当前的DCC变为阻塞,为了从其邻近表中选出一个新的业务提供者,该移动站将调用该网孔重选程序。登记进程(D6)Current DCC is blocked: If the current DCC becomes blocked, the mobile station will invoke the cell reselection procedure in order to select a new service provider from its neighbor list. Registration process (D6)
在一个移动站已发出登记消息给该基站,但还没有收到一个响应时,它将处于“登记进程”。该移动站将响应如下指示的状态:When a mobile station has sent registration messages to the base station, but has not received a response, it will be in the "registration process". The mobile station will respond with a status indicated as follows:
REG-TMR超时:如果移动站重发它的登记多达5次,它将终止这个程序而进入DCC预占状态。反之,它将置REREG-TMR定时器于均匀分布在10至100秒间隔的一个随机时间,终止这一程序,然后进入DCC预占状态。REG-TMR timeout: If the mobile station retransmits its registration up to 5 times, it will terminate this procedure and enter the DCC camped state. Instead, it sets the REREG-TMR timer to a random time evenly spaced in the interval of 10 to 100 seconds, terminates the procedure, and then enters the DCC Reserved state.
收到ARCH消息:如果一个登记接受消息被收到,该移动站将终止这一程序,然后调用下述的登记成功程序。如果一个登记拒绝消息被收到,该移动站将终止这一程序,然后调用登记失败程序。ARCH message received: If a registration accept message is received, the mobile station will terminate this procedure and then invoke the registration success procedure described below. If a registration rejection message is received, the mobile station will terminate the procedure and then invoke the registration failure procedure.
收到PCH消息:停止REG-TMR,终止这一程序,然后调用如下述的终止过程。开始进程(D4)PCH message received: stop REG-TMR, terminate this procedure, then call the termination procedure as described below. Start Process (D4)
在一个移动站已成功地送出一个开始消息但还没收到BMI的响应之后,它将处于“开始过程”。该移动站将响应如下指示的状态:After a mobile station has successfully sent a start message but has not received a response from the BMI, it will be in the "start process". The mobile station will respond with a status indicated as follows:
ORIG-TMR超时:终止这个程序,然后进入DCC预占状态。ORIG-TMR timeout: Terminate this procedure, and then enter the DCC reservation state.
收到ARCH消息:如果一个数字业务信道指示消息被收到,该移动站将停止ORTG TMR,更新如在该消息中所收到的参数,调用登记更新程序,然后进入证实初始业务信道的任务(见IS-54B的2.6.4.2)。如果一个模拟业务信道指示消息被收到,该移动站将停止ORIG TMR,更新如在消息中所收到的参数,调用登记更新程序,然后进入证实初始话音信道任务(见IS-54B的2.6.4.2)。等待命令(D5)ARCH message received: If a digital traffic channel indication message is received, the mobile station will stop the ORTG TMR, update the parameters as received in the message, invoke the registration update procedure, and then enter the task of confirming the initial traffic channel ( See 2.6.4.2 of IS-54B). If an Analog Traffic Channel Indication message is received, the mobile station shall stop the ORIG TMR, update the parameters as received in the message, invoke the Registration Update procedure, and proceed to the Verify Initial Voice Channel task (see 2.6. 4.2). Wait for command (D5)
在一个移动站成功地送出响应于一个寻呼的寻呼响应,但还没有收到BMI的响应之后,它将处于“等待命令”状态。该移动站将响应如下指示的状态:After a mobile station has successfully sent a page response in response to a page, but has not received a response from the BMI, it will be in the "waiting for command" state. The mobile station will respond with a status indicated as follows:
WAFO-TMR超时:终止这个程序,然后进入DCC预占状态。WAFO-TMR timeout: Terminate this procedure, and then enter the DCC reservation state.
收到ARCH消息:如果数字业务信道指示消息被收到,该移动站将停止WAFO-TMR,更新如在该消息中收到的参数,调用登记更新程序,然后进入证实初始业务信道的任务(见IS-54B的2.6.5.2)。如果一个模拟业务信道指示被收到,该移动站将停止WAFO-TMR,更新如在该消息中收到的参数,调用登记更新程序,然后进入证实初始话音信道的任务(见IS-54B 2.6.5.2)。SMS点对点进程(D8)ARCH message received: If a digital traffic channel indication message is received, the mobile station will stop WAFO-TMR, update the parameters as received in the message, invoke the registration update procedure, and then enter the task of confirming the initial traffic channel (see 2.6.5.2 of IS-54B). If an analog traffic channel indication is received, the mobile station shall stop WAFO-TMR, update the parameters as received in the message, invoke the registration update procedure, and then proceed to the task of confirming the initial voice channel (see IS-54B 2.6. 5.2). SMS peer-to-peer process (D8)
在一个移动站成功地送出响应于一个SMS通知的SPACH,但还没收到BMI的响应之后,它将进入“SMS点时点进程“状态。该移动站将响应如下指示的状态:After a mobile station has successfully sent a SPACH in response to an SMS notification, but has not yet received a response from the BMI, it will enter the "SMS point-in-time process" state. The mobile station will respond with a status indicated as follows:
SMS-TMR超时:终止这个程序,然后进入DCC预占状态。SMS-TMR timeout: Terminate this procedure, and then enter the DCC reservation state.
收到ARCH消息:如果一个R-DATA消息被收到并由移动站所接受,它将停止SMS-TMR,更新如在该消息中收到的信息,送出一个R-DATA ACCEPT消息,终止这一程序,然后进入DCC预占状态。如果一个R-DATA消息被接到和被该移动站拒绝,它将停止SMS-TMR,送出一个R-DATA REJECT消息,终止这一程序,然后进入DCC预占状态。ARCH message received: If an R-DATA message is received and accepted by the mobile station, it will stop the SMS-TMR, update the information as received in the message, send an R-DATA ACCEPT message, and terminate the message. program, and then enters the DCC reservation state. If a R-DATA message is received and rejected by the mobile station, it will stop SMS-TMR, send a R-DATA REJECT message, terminate the procedure, and then enter the DCC reservation state.
收到PCH消息:停止SMS-TMR,终止这一程序,然后调用如下描述的终止程序。SSD更新进程(D7)PCH message received: Stop SMS-TMR, terminate this procedure, then call the termination procedure described below. SSD update process (D7)
在一个移动站成功地送出响应于一个SSD更新命令但还没收到BMI的响应之后,它将处于“SSD更新进程”状态。该移动站将响应如下指示的状态:After a mobile station has successfully sent a response to an SSD update command but has not yet received a response from the BMI, it will be in the "SSD update in progress" state. The mobile station will respond with a status indicated as follows:
SSDU-TMR期满:终止这一程序,然后进入DCC预占状态。Expiration of SSDU-TMR: Terminate this procedure, and then enter the DCC reservation state.
收到ARCH消息:如果BMI查询命令证实被收到,该移动站将停止SSDU-TMR,更新如在该消息中所收到的参数,送出一个SSD更新命令证实消息,终止这一程序,然后进入DCC预占状态。ARCH message received: If the BMI query order confirmation was received, the mobile station will stop the SSDU-TMR, update the parameters as received in the message, send an SSD UPDATE order confirmation message, terminate the procedure, and enter DCC reservation state.
收到PCH消息:停止SSDU-TMR,终止这一程序,然后调用如下描述的终止程序。程序DCC扫描和锁定PCH message received: Stop SSDU-TMR, terminate this procedure, then invoke the termination procedure described below. Program DCC scan and lock
找到DCCFind the DCC
两个技术可以用于简化移动站捕获一个DCC:DCC概率分配和DCC定位。DCC的概率分配Two techniques can be used to simplify the mobile station's acquisition of a DCC: DCC probability assignment and DCC positioning. Probability Assignment for DCC
为了帮助移动站对一个DCC的搜索,可利用的频率可以被分组为块,各块指定不同的概率,它反映了各块中找出一个DCC的相关的可能。用这种方式,移动站业务捕获所需的时间可以明显地减少。下面两个表说明了在A-段和B-段中的信道分别如何被指定对于支持DCC捕获的不同的相关概率。在一个移动站已收到任何DCC定位信息(如下描述)之前,这一技术典型地由移动站使用。一但一个移动站已收到DCC定位信息,它将使用这一信息代替这里描述的信道块概率方案。To aid the mobile station in its search for a DCC, the available frequencies can be grouped into blocks, with each block assigned a different probability, which reflects the relative likelihood of finding a DCC in each block. In this way, the time required for mobile station traffic acquisition can be significantly reduced. The following two tables illustrate how the channels in the A-segment and B-segment respectively are assigned different relative probabilities for supporting DCC acquisition. This technique is typically used by a mobile station before a mobile station has received any DCC location information (described below). Once a mobile station has received DCC location information, it will use this information instead of the channel block probability scheme described here.
A-块
B-块
该DCC定位是一个7比特参数,它提供帮助一个移动站找出一个DCC的信息。DL识别携带DCC的移动站RF信道。DL值1、2、3、…127被编码以形成在一个TDMA时隙(见物理层说明)比特位置314至324中在DTC上发送的CDL。DL值1、2、3…127分别映射到信道1-8,9-16,17-24,...1009-1016。因此,例如,如果一个DCC占据信道号10,则DL的2值就会在同一网孔的DTC上被送出。零DL值不能提供任何位置信息,但代替指示无DL信息正由该系统提供。优先权信道分配The DCC locate is a 7-bit parameter that provides information to help a mobile station locate a DCC. The DL identifies the mobile station RF channel that carries the DCC. DL values 1, 2, 3, . . . 127 are encoded to form the CDL sent on DTC in
所有信道号都是对于DCC分配的有效的候选者。认为DL没有唯一地识别任一特定的信道号,在各信道块中建立优先权方案是合乎需要的。接收与特定信道块有关DL值的移动站将不能自动地搜索全部信道,但将按照这一优先权方案对该块中的DCC进行代替搜索。因此,例如,对于DL的1值,移动站将从8,7等等开始检查信道号8至1,以试图找到该DCC。在DCC与DTC之间的判别CDVCC和CSFP字段信息All channel numbers are valid candidates for DCC allocation. Given that the DL does not uniquely identify any particular channel number, it is desirable to establish a priority scheme within each channel block. A mobile station receiving a DL value associated with a particular channel block will not be able to automatically search all channels, but will instead search for DCCs in that block according to this priority scheme. So, for example, for a DL value of 1, the mobile station will check
尽管IS-54B DTC和DCC下行链路时隙格式具有公用的结构,但是允许由DTC判断DCC有一定的差别。首先,由于在DVCC和SFP信道编码中的差别,总有12之外的4个比特在每对CDVCC和CSFP中有差别,而不管由一个基站传送的CDVCC或CSFP码字(因此由于无线信道损害产生的误码可以改变到由移动站所接收的传输码字曾不同的一个内容)。其次,该CDVCC内容在一个DCT上被逐时隙地固定,其中CSFP的内容以可预测的方式在一个DCC上逐时隙地改变。数据字段信息Although the IS-54B DTC and DCC downlink slot formats have a common structure, there are certain differences that allow the DTC to determine the DCC. First, due to the difference in DVCC and SFP channel coding, there are always 4 bits other than 12 that differ in each pair of CDVCC and CSFP, regardless of the CDVCC or CSFP codeword transmitted by a base station (thus due to wireless channel impairments The generated bit error may change to a different content than the transmitted codeword received by the mobile station). Second, the CDVCC content is fixed slot-by-slot on a DCT, whereas the content of the CSFP changes slot-by-slot on a DCC in a predictable manner. Data Field Information
在DTC上利用信道编码和交替与在DCC上利用的是不同的,不考虑DTC业务(话音或FACCH)。这种不同可用于DCC和DTC之间的区别。SACCH和RESERVED(备用)字段信息Utilization of channel coding and interleaving on DTC is different from that on DCC, regardless of DTC traffic (voice or FACCH). This difference can be used to distinguish between DCC and DTC. SACCH and RESERVED (standby) field information
IS-54B SACCH和RESERVED字段在DCC上具有不同的功能。因此,这些字段也可能是用于DCC和DTC之间的区别。网孔选择The IS-54B SACCH and RESERVED fields have different functions on DCC. Therefore, these fields may also be used to distinguish between DCC and DTC. mesh selection
执行网孔选择过程,以便允许移动站确定给定的选择物DCC对于目的是否是可接受的,移动站应该总是执行通路损耗确定过程(下面描述)而且可以任选地执行业务方面的确定过程(在下面描述)。该移动台然后返回到调用过程。通路损耗确定To perform a cell selection procedure to allow a mobile station to determine whether a given alternative DCC is acceptable for the purpose, the mobile station should always perform a path loss determination procedure (described below) and may optionally perform a traffic aspect determination procedure (described below). The mobile station then returns to the calling procedure. Path loss determination
该移动站使用“通路损耗准则”C_PL>0确定选择物DCC对于预占目的是否适合:The mobile station uses the "path loss criterion" C_PL > 0 to determine whether the alternative DCC is suitable for camping purposes:
C_PL=RSS-RSS_ACC_MIN-MAX(MS_ACC_PW-P)>0C_PL=RSS-RSS_ACC_MIN-MAX(MS_ACC_PW-P)>0
这里:here:
RSS是平均的接收信号强度。以类似于在IS-54B中的信号强度测量技术任务的方式可执行信号强度测量。RSS is the average received signal strength. Signal strength measurements may be performed in a manner similar to the task of signal strength measurement techniques in IS-54B.
RSS_ACC_MIN是在BCCH上广播的参数。它是接入网孔要求的最小接收信号电平。RSS_ACC_MIN is a parameter broadcast on BCCH. It is the minimum received signal level required to access the cell.
MS_ACC_PW是在BCCH上广播的参数。它是当最初地接入网络时移动站可使用的最大输出功率。MS_ACC_PW is a parameter broadcast on BCCH. It is the maximum output power a mobile station can use when initially accessing the network.
P是移动站的最大输出功率,根据IS-54B由其功率等级来确定。P is the maximum output power of the mobile station, determined by its power class according to IS-54B.
如果选择物DCC不满足通路损耗准则,它应当由移动站拒绝。然后移动站应当返回到调用过程。业务方面的确定强制性的If the alternative DCC does not meet the path loss criteria, it shall be rejected by the mobile station. The mobile station should then return to the calling procedure. Determination of business aspects Mandatory
如果根据接入参数消息中“阻塞网孔(Cell Barred)”参数广播选择物DCC被识别为阻塞的,它应当由移动站拒绝。如果这个过程被调用,产生网孔选择,并且在网孔选择参数中的ISP标记广播被设定,该移动站将不选择网孔,除非没有其它满足通路损耗准则C_PL的网孔。如果根据网路类型(见下面)选择物DCC标记为专用的,而且PSID符合准则不满足,移动站将不试图预占或寄存在该专用系统。任选的If the broadcast option DCC is identified as blocked according to the "Cell Barred" parameter in the Access Parameters message, it shall be rejected by the mobile station. If this procedure is invoked, resulting in a cell selection, and the ISP flag broadcast in the cell selection parameters is set, the mobile station will not select a cell unless there are no other cells satisfying the path loss criterion C_PL. If the selector DCC is marked private according to the network type (see below), and the PSID compliance criteria are not met, the mobile station shall not attempt to camp or camp on the private system. optional
如果该选择物网孔不对移动提供希望的业务,由该移动站被授权在下面重新选择准则(即移动站可无需选择最好RF相邻)的条件下在满足第一组准则的网孔中间(重新)选择一个网孔。网孔重新选择If the selected cell does not provide the desired service to the mobile, the mobile station is authorized to reselect the following criteria (i.e. the mobile station may not choose the best RF neighbor) among the cells satisfying the first set of criteria (Re)select a mesh. mesh reselection
执行网孔重新选择过程,以便允许移动站确定给定的相邻DCC是否构成比其当前的DCC更好的业务提供者。该移动站应当总是执行网孔重新选择算法和下面描述的重新选择准则过程,而且然后返回到调用过程。扫描过程A cell reselection procedure is performed to allow a mobile station to determine whether a given neighboring DCC constitutes a better service provider than its current DCC. The mobile station should always execute the cell reselection algorithm and the reselection criteria procedure described below, and then return to the calling procedure. scanning process
在BCCH上发送的有两种信息单元涉及扫描过程:SCANFREQ和HL_RFEQ。SCANFREQ在F-BCCH上的网孔选择消息内发送并且通知移动站关于错误最小要求每超帧信号强度(SS)测量的数目。不考虑相邻表(NL)的大小移动站应当完成每个SF的SCNFREQSS测量的总数。但是,这个错误规则可能由HL_FREQ信息修改。HL_FREQ在NL内发送。有一个HL_FREQ与NL的每个输入(频率)有关。如果HL_FEEQ被置于HIGH,这个特定的频率应根据由SCANFREQ规则规定的基本规则来测量。如果HL_FREQ被置于LOW,这个特定的频率可用由错误SCANFREQ规则要求的半频率来测量。例如,如果NL包含16个输入,其中具有HL_FREQ的一些置于HIGH,其余的置于LOW,而且SCANFREQ置于每个SF12个测量,那么在输入上标有HIGH的测量数目应当用每个SF的12/16最小比率测量,而且在输入上标有LOW的测量数目应当用每个SF的12/16/2最小比率测量。基本过程和要求There are two information units sent on the BCCH related to the scanning process: SCANFREQ and HL_RFEQ. SCANFREQ is sent within the Cell Selection message on the F-BCCH and informs the mobile station about the minimum number of required signal strength (SS) measurements per superframe about errors. The total number of SCNFREQSS measurements per SF that the mobile station should complete regardless of the size of the neighbor list (NL). However, this error rule may be modified by the HL_FREQ message. HL_FREQ is sent within NL. There is one HL_FREQ associated with each input (frequency) of NL. If HL_FEEQ is set to HIGH, this particular frequency shall be measured according to the basic rules specified by the SCANFREQ rule. If HL_FREQ is set LOW, this particular frequency can be measured at half the frequency required by the error SCANFREQ rule. For example, if an NL contains 16 inputs, some with HL_FREQ set to HIGH and the rest to LOW, and SCANFREQ is set to 12 measurements per SF, then the number of measurements marked HIGH on the input should be 12 measurements per
移动站应当根据NL(频率和HL_FREQ)和测量参数SCANFREQ的信息确定每个超帧每个输入的测量数目。这个要求规定为基本测量要求(BMR)。因此,对于不同的输入BMR可以要求不同的测量频率。然而,假定所有输入均被处理为具有设置于HIGH的HL_FREQ,则移动站可选择所有频率。移动站应当扩展测量的定时,甚至有可能在整个频率上。错误和指配给MS的潜在的修改的寻呼帧等级不应当影响MS过程。对基本过程的任选加强The mobile station shall determine the number of measurements per input per superframe from the information of NL (frequency and HL_FREQ) and the measurement parameter SCANFREQ. This requirement is specified as the Basic Measurement Requirement (BMR). Therefore, different measurement frequencies may be required for different input BMRs. However, assuming all inputs are processed with HL_FREQ set to HIGH, the mobile station can select all frequencies. The mobile station should spread the timing of the measurements, possibly even over the entire frequency. Errors and potentially modified paging frame classes assigned to the MS should not affect MS procedures. Optional enhancements to the base process
为有利于休眠方式的有效性,MS允许改变在基本过程和要求中描述的BMR过程并且仍然遵循该技术规范。只可改变测量要求的频率。由MS可使用三种技术使电池消耗减至最小。如果预先要求的条件满足的话,所有这三种技术可同时应用。这三种技术及相关条件如下:To benefit the effectiveness of the dormant approach, the MS allows changes to the BMR process described in Basic Processes and Requirements and still follow this specification. Only the frequency required by the measurement can be changed. There are three techniques that can be used by the MS to minimize battery consumption. All three techniques can be applied simultaneously if the pre-required conditions are met. The three technologies and their associated conditions are as follows:
1.如果在延伸的时间期间(>5小时)由MS执行的网孔重新选择数目很低(<5),而且因为最后的网孔重新选择期满时间大于2小时,然后移动单元允许对所有的输入降低测量频率,但是服务的DCC同BMR比较为两倍。如果MS执行网孔重新选择这种降低被取消。1. If the number of cell reselections performed by the MS during the extended period of time (>5 hours) is low (<5), and because the last cell reselection expiration time is greater than 2 hours, then the mobile unit allows access to all incoming The measurement frequency is reduced, but the DCC of the service is twice as compared to the BMR. This reduction is canceled if the MS performs a cell reselection.
2.如果在服务的DCC上信号强度(SS)的变化率在最后5分钟小于5dB,而且在NL的所有输入信号强度(SS)的变化率在最后5分钟内小于5dB,那么移动单元允许在所有情况下降低测试量频率,但是服务的DCC与BMR比较为2倍。2. If the rate of change of signal strength (SS) on the serving DCC is less than 5 dB in the last 5 minutes, and the rate of change of all incoming signal strength (SS) in NL is less than 5 dB in the last 5 minutes, then the mobile unit is allowed Reduce the test volume frequency, but the DCC and BMR of the service are 2 times.
3.如果在服务的DCC的SS和NL的特定输入之间差别的变化率在最后5分钟内小于5dB,那么移动单元能够在满足上述条件的NL的特定输入上降低测量频率为2倍。3. If the rate of change of the difference between the SS and NL specific inputs of the serving DCC is less than 5 dB in the last 5 minutes, the mobile unit can reduce the measurement frequency by a factor of 2 on the NL specific inputs satisfying the above conditions.
如果在服务的DCC信号强度(SS)的变化率在最后20个寻呼帧内信号强度(SS)的变化率是5dB或如果在最后的100个超帧内在NL的任何输入上信号强度的变化率大于5dB,根据上述2和3点的测量频率的降低被取消。测量数据的处理If the rate of change in the serving DCC signal strength (SS) is 5 dB within the last 20 paging frames or if the change in signal strength on any input to the NL is within the last 100 superframes If the rate is greater than 5dB, the reduction of the measurement frequency according to the
根据预占网孔参数,全重新选择数据被置于零。在邻近表内的每个输入被测量4次之后,全重新选择参数被置于1。重新选择准则The full reselection data is set to zero according to the reserved cell parameters. The full reselection parameter is set to 1 after each entry in the neighbor list has been measured 4 times. reselect criteria
移动站使用“网孔重新选择准则”C_RES来确定最好的选择物DCC去预占。如果满足如下准则该移动站应选择一个新的服务的DCC:(C_PLnew>o)AND(T>DELAY)AND[(CELLTYPE=PREFERRED AND RSS>SS SUFF)OR(CELLTYPE=REGULAR AND C_RES>O)OR(CELLTYPE=NON_PREFERED AND RSSold<SS_SUFFold]The mobile station uses the "Cell Reselection Criteria" C_RES to determine the best candidate DCC to camp on. The mobile station shall select a new serving DCC if the following criteria are met: (C_PL new > o) AND (T > DELAY) AND [(CELLTYPE = PREFERRED AND RSS > SS SUFF) OR (CELLTYPE = REGULAR AND C_RES > O) OR(CELLTYPE=NON_PREFERED AND RSS old <SS_SUFF old ]
这里:here:
C_RES=C_PLnew-C_PLold+RESEL_OFFSETnew-RESEL OFFSETold C_RES=C_PL new -C_PL old +RESEL_OFFSET new -RESEL OFFSET old
C_PL是“通路损耗准则”。C_PL is the "path loss criterion".
C_PLnew是用于选择物DCC的C_PL。C_PL new is the C_PL for the option DCC.
C_PLold是用于当前的DCC的C_PL。C_PL old is the C_PL for the current DCC.
T是一个定时器,当C_PLnew变为大于o时,定时器开始。当CP_Lnew变为小于或等于O时,T被重置。T is a timer, when C_PL new becomes greater than o, the timer starts. When CP_L new becomes less than or equal to O, T is reset.
DELAY是在BCCH上的广播参数(见下面)。DELAY is a broadcast parameter on BCCH (see below).
RESEL_OFFSET是在BCCH上的广播参数(见下面)。RESEL_OFFSET is a broadcast parameter on BCCH (see below).
RESEL_OFFSETnew是与选择物DCC相关的重新选择的偏移。RESEL_OFFSET new is the reselected offset relative to the selector DCC.
RESEL_OFFSETold是与当前的DCC有关的偏移。RESEL_OFFSET old is the offset relative to the current DCC.
CELLTYPE是BCCH上的广播参数(见下面)。它取值REGULAR,PREFERPED或NON_PREFERRED。CELLTYPE is a broadcast parameter on BCCH (see below). It takes the value REGULAR, PREFERPED or NON_PREFERRED.
SS_SUFF是在BCCH上的广播参数(见下面)。SS_SUFF is a broadcast parameter on BCCH (see below).
SS_SUFFnew是用于选择物DCC的SS_SUFF。SS_SUFF new is SS_SUFF for selector DCC.
SS_SUFFold是用于当前的DCC的SS_SUFF。SS_SUFF old is the SS_SUFF for the current DCC.
RSSnew是用于选择物DCC的RSS。RSS new is the RSS for selector DCC.
RSSold是用于当前的DCC的RSS。RSS old is the RSS for the current DCC.
无论何时,多于一个CELLTYPE的选择物DCC满足该准则,它们应当是以PREFERRED,REGULAR,NON_PREFERRED的优先权次序被选择。无论何时,多于一个相同CELLTYPE的选择物DCC满足该准则,具有最大C_RES值的DCC应被选择。然而,如果它的C_RES满足下式具有较低C_RES的选择物DCC仍可被选择:Whenever more than one selector DCC of CELLTYPE satisfies this criterion, they shall be selected in priority order of PREFERRED, REGULAR, NON_PREFERRED. Whenever more than one candidate DCC of the same CELLTYPE satisfies this criterion, the DCC with the largest C_RES value shall be selected. However, a selector DCC with a lower C_RES can still be selected if its C_RES satisfies the following formula:
C_RES>=MAX[MAX(C_RES1,C_RES2,…C_RESN)-SERV_SS,O]C_RES>=MAX[MAX(C_RES 1 ,C_RES 2 ,…C_RES N )-SERV_SS,O]
这里:here:
SERV_SS是BCCH上广播的偏移值。SERV_SS is the offset value broadcast on BCCH.
为了能够使MS避免“乒-乓”网孔选择和重新选择,MS不须要返回到在重新选择之后它先前预占10秒钟之内的那个网孔。终止To enable the MS to avoid "ping-pong" cell selection and reselection, the MS does not need to return to the cell it previously camped on within 10 seconds after reselection. termination
当调用这种过程时,该移动站应该确定随后的PCH消息的哪一个已被接收到,并响应作为指示:When such a procedure is invoked, the mobile station shall determine which of the subsequent PCH messages has been received, and respond as indicated:
寻呼paging
该移动站应发送一个寻呼响应消息,启动WAFO_TMR终止这个过程,然后进入等待命令状态。The mobile station shall send a paging response message, start WAFO_TMR to terminate the procedure, and then enter the waiting command state.
SSD更新命令SSD update command
该移动站应发送一个询问命令,启动SSDU_TMR终止这个过程,然后进入SSD更新在进行的状态。SMS通知The mobile station shall send an inquiry command, initiate SSDU_TMR to terminate the procedure, and then enter the state where SSD update is in progress. SMS notification
该移动站应当发送一个SPACH证实,启动SMS_TMR,终止这个过程,然后进入SMS点至点进行状态。唯一询问命令The mobile station shall send a SPACH confirmation, initiate SMS_TMR, terminate the procedure, and then enter the SMS point-to-point ongoing state. unique query command
根据这个唯一询问响应过程,移动站应该发送至一个唯一的询问命令证实,终止这个过程,然后进入DCC预占状态。消息等待According to this unique challenge response procedure, the mobile station should send to a unique challenge order confirmation, terminate this procedure, and then enter the DCC camping state. message waiting
该移动站应当发送一个SPACH证实,终止这个过程,然后进入DCC预占状态。参数更新The mobile station shall send a SPACH acknowledgment, terminate the procedure, and then enter the DCC Camp state. parameter update
该移动站应当发送一个SPACH证实,终止这个过程,然后进入DCC预占状态。方向重试The mobile station shall send a SPACH acknowledgment, terminate the procedure, and then enter the DCC Camp state. direction retry
该移动站应当发送一个SPACH证实,对于在方向重试消息中指示的期间,标记当前的DCC为阻塞的,终止这个过程,然后进入DCC预占状态。离开The mobile station shall send a SPACH acknowledgment, mark the current DCC as blocked for the period indicated in the direction retry message, terminate the procedure, and then enter the DCC camped state. leave
该移动站应当发送一个SPACH证实,对于在离开消息中指示的期间,标记当前的DCC为阻塞的,终止这个过程,然后进入控制信道扫描和锁定状态。能力的请求The mobile station shall send a SPACH acknowledgment, mark the current DCC as blocked for the period indicated in the leave message, terminate the procedure, and then enter the control channel scan and lock state. capability request
该移动站应当发送一个能力报告,终止这个过程,然后进入DCC预占状态。始发The mobile station shall send a Capability Report, terminate the procedure, and then enter the DCC Camp state. starting
当这个过程被调用时,移动站应当等待F-BCCH接入参数消息并检查包括在其内的过载控制(OLC)信息单元。该移动站应该进行如下:如果移动站根据OLC进行接入而被阻塞,或者如果该移动站还没有接收到在其当前的DCC上的F-BCCH消息的全组,它应该终止这个过程,然后进入DCC预占状态。否则,移动站应该正式提出始发。如果BMI要求串行号信息(在接入参数消息上S比特置于1),该移动站应当正式提出串行号消息。如果BMI要求授权信息(在接入参数消息上AUTH比特置于1),该移动站也应当根据移动站始发过程的授权正式提出授权消息。然后该移动站应当与任何其它上面所述要求的相符合的消息一道发送一个始发。启动ORIG_TMR并进入始发进行状态。SMS点至点When this procedure is invoked, the mobile station should wait for the F-BCCH Access Parameters message and check the Overload Control (OLC) information element included therein. The mobile station should proceed as follows: if the mobile station is blocked for access according to the OLC, or if the mobile station has not received the full set of F-BCCH messages on its current DCC, it should terminate the procedure, and then Enter the DCC reservation state. Otherwise, the mobile station should formally propose origination. If the BMI requires serial number information (S bit set to 1 on the Access Parameters message), the mobile station shall formally present the serial number message. If the BMI requires authorization information (AUTH bit set to 1 on the Access Parameters message), the mobile station should also formally present an authorization message under the authorization of the mobile origination procedure. The mobile station should then send an origination along with any other conforming messages to the requirements stated above. Start ORIG_TMR and enter the origination in progress state. SMS point-to-point
第三层的SMS点至点操作使用3个双向消息:R_DATA,R_FATA ACCEPT和R_DATA REJECT。R_DATA消息应当是用于录载SMS应用层的消息。在随后的第三层短消息业务过程的前后关系中,有两个等级被识别:MS终止的SMS和MS始发的SMS。MS终止SMS过程
在这第三层过程的前后关系中,MS终止SMS包括短消息的传递(即SMS DELIVER应用消息)和SMS特征状态报告(即SMSFEAT CTRL STATUS应用消息)至该MS。在DCC上SMS的传送In the context of this third layer process, the MS terminates the delivery of SMS including the short message (i.e. the SMS DELIVER application message) and the SMS feature status report (i.e. the SMSFEAT CTRL STATUS application message) to the MS. Delivery of SMS over DCC
如果MS是在“DCC预占”状态,BMI应当寻呼MS并等待接收来自该MS的寻呼响应消息。一旦BMI接收了该寻呼消息,该BMI通过使用指示SMS点至点的SPACH帧方式和L2确认模式发送包含SMS DELIVER应用消息的R-DATA消息至该移动站。然后BMI启动定时器X。根据接收的R-DATA消息,该移动站应提供第三层的确认至BMI如下:如果R-DATA消息对于该MS是可接受的,那么该MS通过发送具有与在R-DATA消息中出现的相同的R-事务处理识别符的R-DATA ACCEPT消息来响应。如果R-DATA消息对于该MS不能接受,则该MS应当通过发送具有与在R-DATA消息中出现的相同的R-事务处理识别符和强制性的R-产生信息单元的R-DATA REJECT消息来响应。如果在接收第三层确认之前该BMI定时器X期满,该BMI可重新发送R-DATA。该BMI不应当重新发送R-DATA多于一次。在DTC上SMS的传递If the MS is in the "DCC Camped on" state, the BMI should page the MS and wait to receive a Page Response message from the MS. Once the BMI receives the paging message, the BMI sends the R-DATA message containing the SMS DELIVER application message to the mobile station by using the SPACH frame mode indicating SMS point-to-point and the L2 acknowledgment mode. The BMI then starts Timer X. Upon receipt of the R-DATA message, the mobile station shall provide a layer-3 acknowledgment to the BMI as follows: If the R-DATA message is acceptable to the MS, then the MS sends a respond with an R-DATA ACCEPT message with the same R-transaction identifier. If the R-DATA message is unacceptable to the MS, the MS shall generate the information element by sending the R-DATA REJECT message with the same R-Transaction Identifier and mandatory R-DATA as appearing in the R-DATA message. to respond. If the BMI timer X expires before receiving a
如果MS已经指配DTC(例如包括在呼叫中),BMI通过使用带有指示L2确认模式的传输业务的FACCH或SACCH发送包含SMS DELIVER应用消息至该移动站。然后该BMI启动定时器Y。根据接收的R-DATA消息,该移动站将提供第三层确认至BMI如下:如R-DATA消息对于该MS是可接受的,它应该通过发送具有与在R-DATA消息中出现相同事务处理识别符的R-DATAACCEPT消息来响应。如果R-DATA消息对于该MS是不可接受的,它应该通过发送具有与在R-DATA消息中出现相同的R-事务处理识别符和强制性的R-产生信息单元的R-DATA REJECT消息来响应。如果在接收第3层确认之前BMI定时器Y期满,则该BMI可重新发送R-DATA。该BMI不应重新发送R-DATA多于一次。MS始发SMS过程If the MS has been assigned a DTC (e.g. included in the call), the BMI sends a message containing the SMS DELIVER APPLICATION to the mobile station by using the FACCH or SACCH with the transport traffic indicating L2 Acknowledgment Mode. The BMI then starts timer Y. Upon receipt of the R-DATA message, the mobile station shall provide a
在这个第3层过程的前后关系之内,该MS始发的SMS包括:MS始发的短的消息(即,SMS SUBMIT应用消息)、MS用户确认(即,SMS USER ACK应用消息)和由该MS进行的SMS特征控制(即,SMS FEAT CTRL REQU应用消息)。在DCC上MS始发的SMSWithin the context of this
当处于“DCC预占”状态的MS由该MS SMS应用层要求发送一个短消息时,该MS应首先检查在BCCH上的SMS接入标记广播,BCCH指示最大的SMS消息长度,该MS被授权在RACH上发送。如果MSR-DATA消息长度大于由BMI授权的最大SMS消息长度(以八比特组),该MS将抑制住发送R-DATA消息。When an MS in the "DCC Camp-On" state is requested by the MS SMS application layer to send a short message, the MS shall first check the SMS Access Flag broadcast on the BCCH, which indicates the maximum SMS message length, and the MS is authorized Sent on RACH. The MS shall refrain from sending the R-DATA message if the MSR-DATA message length is greater than the maximum SMS message length (in octets) authorized by the BMI.
如果MSR-DATA消息长度小于由BMI授权的最大SMS消息长度(以八比特组),该MS可发送R-DATA消息,提供那种登记规则允话该MS接入该系统。If the MSR-DATA message length is less than the maximum SMS message length (in octets) authorized by the BMI, the MS can send an R-DATA message providing that registration rule to allow the MS to access the system.
通过发送一个RDCC请求的原始请求至第2层,该MS开始传输R DATA消息。如果R-DATA消息被发送,该MS启动定时器X。根据接收的R-DATA消息,该BMI应提供一个第3层确认至该MS如下:如果R-DATA消息对于该BMI是可接受的,它应当通过发送具有与在R-DATA消息中出现的相同R-事务处理识别符的R-DATA ACCEPT消息去确认来响应。如果该R-DATA消息对于MS是不可接受的,它应当通过发送具有与在R-DATA消息中出现的相同R-事务处理识别符去确认和具有强制性的R-产生信息单元的R-DATA REJECT消息来响应。如果在接收第3层确认之前MS的定时器Z期满,该MS可重新发R-DATA。该MS不应当重发R-DATA多于一次。在DTC上MS开始The MS initiates the transmission of RDATA messages by sending an RDCC request to layer 2 with the original request. The MS starts timer X if the R-DATA message is sent. Upon receipt of the R-DATA message, the BMI shall provide a
如果MS已经指是一个DTC(例如,包含在呼叫中),由使用具有传送服务指示L2确认模式的FACCH或SACCH,MS发送R-DATA消息到BMI。然后MS启动计时器Z。一旦R-DATA消息接到时,BMI将提供一个层3确认到MS如下:如果R-DATA消息可接收到BMI,它将在R-DATA消息中,由发送具有现在相同的R-事务识别的R-DATA ACCEPT消息来响应,以便确认。如果R-DATA没有接收到MS则它将在R-DATA消息中,发送具有现在相同的R-事务识别的以及具有强制的R-原因信息元件的R-DATA REJECT消息来响应,以便确认。如果MS计时器Z终止先前接收的层3确认,则MS可再发送R-DATA。MS将不再发送R-DATA多于一次。登记(记录)If the MS has referred to a DTC (eg, involved in the call), the MS sends the R-DATA message to the BMI by using the FACCH or SACCH with Transport Service Indication L2 Acknowledgment mode. The MS then starts timer Z. Once the R-DATA message is received, the BMI will provide a
当调用这个过程时,该移动站应当等待F-BCCH接入参数消息并检查在其内的过载控制(OLC)信息单元。然后该移动站继续进行如下:如果该移动站根据OLC进行接入而阻塞,它应当终止这个过程,然后进入DCC预占状态。如果该移动站是在其本地的SID区域而且RECH是阻塞的,它应当终止这个过程,然后进入DCC预占状态。如果该移动站不在其本地SID区域而且REGR是阻塞的,它应当终止这个过程,然后进入DCC预占状态。否则,该移动站应检查状态表,下面可看到,需要一种登记(记录)。这些条件是优先权次序,以便如果多于一个务件被实现,仅一个登记被发送。When invoking this procedure, the mobile station should wait for the F-BCCH Access Parameters message and check the Overload Control (OLC) information element within it. The mobile station then proceeds as follows: If the mobile station is blocked for accessing according to the OLC, it should terminate the procedure and then enter the DCC camping state. If the mobile station is in its home SID area and RECH is blocked, it should terminate the procedure and then enter the DCC camped state. If the mobile station is not in its home SID area and REGR is blocked, it should terminate the procedure and then enter the DCC camped state. Otherwise, the mobile station should check the state table, as can be seen below, a registration (record) is required. These conditions are prioritized so that if more than one transaction is fulfilled, only one entry is sent.
如果省电条件存在(即该移动站刚刚省电)并且在登记参数消息中发送的PDREG标记被启动,该移动站应当发送一个具有省电指示的登记消息,然后进入无效状态(零状态)。如果上电条件存在(即该移动站刚刚上电),并且在登记参数消息中发送的PUREG标记被启动,该移动站应发送一个具有上电指示的登记消息,启动REGTMR,然后进入登记进行状态。If the power saving condition exists (i.e. the mobile station has just saved power) and the PDREG flag sent in the Registration Parameters message is enabled, the mobile station should send a Registration message with a power saving indication and then enter the inactive state (zero state). If the power-on condition exists (that is, the mobile station has just been powered on), and the PUREG flag sent in the registration parameter message is activated, the mobile station shall send a registration message with a power-on indication, start REGTMR, and then enter the registration progress state .
如果广播的SID值不符合在半永久存储器中存储的SID值而且在登记参数消息中发送的SYREG标记被启动。该移动站应当发送一个具有地理的指示的登记消息,启动REG_TMR,然后进入登记进行状态。The SYREG flag sent in the Registration Parameters message is activated if the broadcasted SID value does not match the SID value stored in the semi-permanent memory. The mobile station shall send a REGISTER message with geographical indication, start REG_TMR, and then enter the REGISTRATION IN PROGRESS state.
如果广播的RNUM值不是在半永久存储器中存储的RNUM表的一部分并且在登记参数消息发送的LAREG标记被启动,该移动站应发送一个具有地理指示的登记消息,启动REG_TMR,然后进入登记进行状态。If the broadcast RNUM value is not part of the RNUM table stored in semi-permanent memory and the LAREG flag sent in the Registration Parameters message is enabled, the mobile station shall send a Registration message with a geographic indication, start REG_TMR, and then enter the Registration in progress state.
如果当前的DCC预先被识别为邻近的登记(例如REG字段在邻近表中),该移动站应发送一个具有地理指示的登记消息,启动REG_TMR,然后进入登记进行状态。If the current DCC is pre-identified as a neighboring registration (eg REG field in the neighboring table), the mobile station shall send a registration message with geographic indication, start REG_TMR, and then enter the registration in progress state.
如果在登记参数消息中发送的FOREG标记被启动,该移动站应当发送一个具有强制指示的登记消息,启动REG_TMR,然后进入登记进行状态。If the FOREG flag sent in the Registration Parameters message is enabled, the mobile station shall send a Registration message with a mandatory indication, start REG_TMR, and then enter the Registration Progressing state.
如果周期性的登记定时器PER_COUNTER期满,该移动站应当发送一个具有周期指示的登记消息,启动REG_TMR,并进入登记进行状态。If the periodic registration timer PER_COUNTER expires, the mobile station should send a registration message with a periodic indication, start REG_TMR, and enter the registration progress state.
如果REREG_TMR期满,该移动站应发送一个具有与在其前面登记尝试相同指示的登记消息,并进入登记进行状态。If the REREG_TMR expires, the mobile station shall send a REGISTER message with the same indication as its previous registration attempt and enter the REGISTER IN PROGRESS state.
否则,移动站应当调用周期登记确定过程。如果登记是不需要的,该移动站应当终止这个过程并返回到调用过程。登记更新(记录修改)Otherwise, the mobile station shall invoke the periodic registration determination procedure. If registration is not required, the mobile station should terminate this procedure and return to the calling procedure. Registration update (record modification)
如果该移动站已经接收了一个“周期登记(记录)”信息单元,而不是“REGID参数”信息单元,它应当重量它的PER_COUNTER到REGPER*94个超帧。如果该移动站已接收一个“REG周期”和一个“REGID参数”信息单元,它应当设置(NXTREG=REGID+REGPER*94/REGID_PER)和存储NXTREG在半永久存储器中。该移动站应当用当前广播的SID值更新其半永久存储器。在完成这些更新之后,该移动站应当终止这个过程并返回到调用过程。周期登记(记录)确定If the mobile station has received a "Periodic Registration (Record)" information element instead of a "REGID parameter" information element, it shall count its PER_COUNTER to REGPER*94 superframes. If the mobile station has received a "REG period" and a "REGID parameter" information element, it shall set (NXTREG=REGID+REGPER*94/REGID_PER) and store NXTREG in semi-permanent memory. The mobile station should update its semi-permanent memory with the currently broadcast SID value. After completing these updates, the mobile station should terminate this procedure and return to the calling procedure. Periodic registration (record) determination
如果移动站接收了一个“REG周期”和一个“REGID参数”信息单元,它应当使用如下的算法来检查NXTREG来确定REGID是否具有通过零的循环:如果NXTREG大于或等于REGID+(REGPER*94/REHID_PER)+5,那么NXTREG应用大于0或NXTREG-220代替,否则不改变NXTREG。如果REGID大于或等于NXTREG,该移动站应当发送一个具有周期指示的登记消息,启动REGTER,然后进入登记进行状态。否则,该移动站应终止这个过程并返回到调用过程。登记(记录)成功If the mobile station receives a "REG Period" and a "REGID Parameter" information element, it shall check NXTREG to determine whether the REGID has a cycle through zero using the following algorithm: If NXTREG is greater than or equal to REGID+(REGPER*94/REHID_PER )+5, then NXTREG should be greater than 0 or NXTREG-2 20 instead, otherwise NXTREG will not be changed. If REGID is greater than or equal to NXTREG, the mobile station shall send a registration message with periodic indication, start REGTER, and then enter the registration progress state. Otherwise, the mobile station shall terminate this procedure and return to the calling procedure. Register (record) successfully
该移动站应停止REG_TMR,调用登记更新过程,然后继续进行如下:如在登记接收消息中提供RNUM值的表,该移动站应根据接收的表在半永久存储器中设置其RNUM表。该移动站只应要求存储在任何给定的登记接受消息中接收的第一个50RNUM。The mobile station should stop REG_TMR, invoke the registration update procedure, and proceed as follows: If a table of RNUM values is provided in the registration received message, the mobile station should set its RNUM table in semi-permanent memory according to the received table. The mobile station should only be required to store the first 50RNUM received in any given Registration Accept message.
该移动站应终止这个过程并返回到DCC预占状态。登记(记录)失败The mobile station shall terminate this procedure and return to the DCC camped state. Registration (logging) failed
如果该移动站重新发送其登记达到最大5次,它应终止这个过程,并进入到DCC预占状态。否则,它应存储拒绝结果,设置REREG_TMR定时器随机时间均匀地分布在10至100秒的间隔内,终止该过程并进入DCC预占状态。授权(鉴定)共用秘密数据(SSD)If the mobile station resends its registration up to a maximum of 5 times, it shall terminate the procedure and enter the DCC camp-on state. Otherwise, it shall store the rejection result, set the REREG_TMR timer for random times evenly distributed in the interval of 10 to 100 seconds, terminate the process and enter the DCC preempted state. Authorization (Authentication) Shared Secret Data (SSD)
SSD是在移动站(半永久存储器)中存储的一个128比特格式并且已经可用于基站。如图30所描述,SSD被分配到两个不同的子组。每一个子组用于支持一个不同的处理。具体说,SSD-A用于支持授权过程,而SSD-B用于支持话音保密和消息的保密。根据在附件A的IS-54B中规定的过程,SSD可以产生。随机询问存储器(RAND)RAND是保持在移动站的32比特值。它是在BCCH上接收的一个值,而且用于与SSD-A和其它参数联系,适当地授权移动站的始发,终止和登记(记录)。呼叫历史参数(COUNTs-p)SSD is a 128-bit format stored in the mobile station (semi-permanent memory) and is already available for the base station. As depicted in Figure 30, SSDs are assigned to two different subgroups. Each subgroup is used to support a different process. Specifically, SSD-A is used to support the authorization process, while SSD-B is used to support voice security and message security. SSDs can be produced according to the process specified in IS-54B of Annex A. Random Request Memory (RAND) RAND is a 32-bit value maintained at the mobile station. It is a value received on BCCH and is used in conjunction with SSD-A and other parameters to properly authorize mobile station origination, termination and registration (recording). Call history parameter (COUNT sp )
该呼叫历史参数是保持在移动站的模-64计数。根据接收的参数更新次序消息按模更新COUNTs-p移动站登记的授权书当在BCCH上的信息单元AUTH被置于1时,而且该移动站尝试寄存时,应执行如下有关授权过程:该移动站启动图31所示的授权算法(CAVE);执行CAVE过程;置AUTHR等于CAVE算法输出的18比特;以及与RANDC(RAND的8个最主要的比特)和COUNTs-p一起发送AUTHR经过AUHT消息至该基站,该基站将用于RANDC接收的值和任选的COUNT与接收的MIN1/ESE相关的内部存储的值相比较;如上所描述的计算AUTHR(除了使用内部存储的SSD-A值);以及将内部计算的AUTHR值与从该移动站接收的AUTHR值进行比较。The call history parameter is a modulo-64 count maintained at the mobile station. Update COUNT sp mobile station registration authorization according to the received parameter update order message. When the information element AUTH on BCCH is set to 1, and the mobile station attempts to register, the following authorization procedures shall be performed: the mobile station Start the authorization algorithm (CAVE) shown in Figure 31; execute the CAVE process; put AUTHR equal to 18 bits of CAVE algorithm output; and send AUTHR with RANDC (the 8 most important bits of RAND) and COUNT sp to this A base station that compares the received value for RANDC and the optional COUNT to an internally stored value associated with the received MIN1/ESE; computes AUTHR as described above (except using the internally stored SSD-A value); and The internally calculated AUTHR value is compared with the AUTHR value received from the mobile station.
如果该基站进行的任何比较失败,该基站可认为该登记的尝试不成功,启动唯一的询问响应过程或开始更新SSD的过程。唯一的询问响应过程If any of the comparisons made by the base station fail, the base station may consider the registration attempt unsuccessful and initiate a unique challenge response procedure or start the process of updating the SSD. unique query response process
由BMI启动唯一的询问响应程序,并能经控制和/或业务量信道的任何组合来执行。该基站产生一个24比特的称为RANDU的随机格式,发送RANEU经唯一的询问次序消息到该移动站;启动如图32所示的CAVE;执行CAVE算法;和设置AUTHU等于CAVE算法输出的18比特。该移动站使用接收的RANDU和为了保持输入参数其内部存储的值,按上面描述的计算AUTHU,并发送AUTHU经唯一的询问证实消息到该基站。根据从该移动站接收的唯一的询问次序证实,该基站将对于AUTHU的接收值与其内部“产生/存储的值进行比较。如果比较失败,该基站可拒绝移动站的另一个接入尝试,对进行中的呼叫摘机或启动更新SSD的过程。移动站始发的授权The unique query response procedure is initiated by the BMI and can be performed via any combination of control and/or traffic channels. The base station generates a 24-bit random format called RANDU, sends the RANEU to the mobile station via a unique inquiry sequence message; initiates CAVE as shown in Figure 32; executes the CAVE algorithm; and sets AUTHU equal to the 18 bits output by the CAVE algorithm . The mobile station calculates the AUTHU as described above using the received RANDU and its internally stored values for keeping the input parameters, and sends the AUTHU via a unique challenge confirmation message to the base station. Based on the unique challenge sequence confirmation received from the mobile station, the base station compares the received value for AUTHU with its internally "generated/stored value. If the comparison fails, the base station may reject another access attempt by the mobile station, for An ongoing call goes off-hook or initiates the process of updating the SSD. Mobile-originated authorization
当在BCCH上的信息单元AUTH被置于01,和该移动站试图始发一个呼叫时,应当执行如下的有关授权过程:When the information element AUTH on the BCCH is set to 01, and the mobile station attempts to initiate a call, the following authorization procedures shall be performed:
在该移动站始发如图33所示的CAVE;执行CAVE算法;置AUTHR等于CAVE算法输出的18比特;和与RANDC(RAND的8个最主要的比特和COUNTs-p一起发送AUTHR至BMI。该基站把对于RANDC接收的值和任选的COUNT与同接收的MIN1/ESN有关的内部存储的值进行比较;计算AUTHR如上所述(除去它使用内部存储的SSD-A值);和把内部计算的AUTHR的值与从该移动站接收的AUTHR值进行比较。如果在这个基站比较是成功的,开始合适信道指配程序。一旦指配一个数字业务量信道,在任意的系统操作器上该基站可能发出参数更新次序消息至移动站。移动站由发送参数更新次序证实确认参数更新次序。如果基站的任何比较失败,该基站可拒绝服务,启动唯一的询问响应过程或开始更新SSD过程。移动站终止的授权CAVE as shown in Figure 33 is initiated at the mobile station; CAVE algorithm is executed; AUTHR is set equal to 18 bits output by CAVE algorithm; and AUTHR is sent to BMI together with RANDC (8 most significant bits of RAND and COUNT sp . The The base station compares the value received for RANDC and the optional COUNT with the internally stored value associated with the received MIN1/ESN; calculates AUTHR as described above (except that it uses the internally stored SSD-A value); and compares the internally calculated The value of the AUTHR is compared with the AUTHR value received from the mobile station. If the comparison is successful at the base station, start the appropriate channel assignment procedure. Once a digital traffic channel is assigned, the base station will It is possible to send a parameter update order message to the mobile station. The mobile station confirms the parameter update order by sending the parameter update order confirmation. If any comparison of the base station fails, the base station can deny service, start a unique inquiry response process or start an update SSD process. The mobile station Terminated authorization
当在BCCH中的信息单元AUTH被置于1和“寻呼匹配”出现时,应执行如下的有关授权过程:移动站启动图34中所示的CAVE;执行CAVE算法;置AUTHR等于CAVE算法输出的18比特;和与RANDE(RAND的8个最主要的比特)及COUNTs-p一起发送AUTHR经过消息至该基站,该基站把用于RANDC接收的值的任选的COUNT与同接收的MIN1/ESN相关的内部存储的值相比较;如上所描的计算AUTHR(除了使用内部存储的SSD-A值);和把内部计算的AUTHR值与从该移动站接收的AUTHR值进行比较。如果在基站比较成功,开始合适的信道指配过程。一旦指配一个数字业务量信道,按系统操作员的意思,该基站可发出一个参数更新次序消息到移动站。移动站根据发送的参数更新次序证实确认参数更新次序的接收。如果基站的任何比较失败,该基站可拒绝服务,启动唯一的询问响应过程或开始更新SSD的过程。SSD更新(修改)When the information element AUTH in the BCCH is set to 1 and "paging match" occurs, the following relevant authorization procedures should be performed: the mobile station starts the CAVE shown in Figure 34; executes the CAVE algorithm; sets AUTHR equal to the output of the
更新的SSD包括用移动站特定信息,随机数据和移动站的A-键(密钥)启动CAVE的应用。A-密钥是64比特长;指配到和必须输入到每个移动站;被存储在移动站的永久保密的和识别的存储器内;并且只知道该移动站及其有关的HLR/AC。A-密钥的后者的特征是打算提高移动站的加密数据,消除由于用户漫游从系统至系统须传送A-密钥本身。因此,SSD更新只在移动站及其相关的HLR/AC进行,而不在服务的系统进行。该服务系统获得SSD的复制,该SSD通过HLR/AC经系统间通信(见EIA/TIA IS-41)计算得到,该系统具有移动站的HLR/AC。The updated SSD includes an application to start the CAVE with mobile station specific information, random data and the mobile station's A-key (key). The A-key is 64 bits long; is assigned and must be entered into each mobile station; is stored in the mobile station's permanently secure and identifying memory; and is known only to the mobile station and its associated HLR/AC. The latter feature of the A-key is intended to enhance the encrypted data of the mobile station, eliminating the need to transmit the A-key itself from system to system as the user roams. Therefore, SSD updates are only performed at the mobile station and its associated HLR/AC, not at the serving system. The serving system obtains a copy of the SSD computed via intersystem communication (see EIA/TIA IS-41) via the HLR/AC with the mobile station's HLR/AC.
移动站更新的SSD如图35所示,该BMI发送一个更新命令,该命令具有设置与在HLR/AC计算中使用的相同的56比特随机号码的RANDSS字段,在SSD更新命令消息上发送到该移动站。根据接收的SSD更新命令,该移动站始发图36所示的CAVE;执行CAVE算法;置SSD-A_NEW等于CAVE算法输出的64个最多主要的比特和置SSD-B_NEW等于CAVE算法输出的64个最小主要比特;选择一个32比特的随机号RANDBS并且发送它到在BMI的询问命令消息中的BMI;重新开始图37所示的CAVE;执行CAVE算法;并设置AUTHBS等于CAVE算法输出的18比特。The SSD updated by the mobile station is shown in Figure 35, the BMI sends an update command with the RANDSS field setting the same 56-bit random number as used in the HLR/AC calculation, sent on the SSD update command message to the mobile station. According to the SSD update command received, the mobile station initiates the CAVE shown in Figure 36; executes the CAVE algorithm; sets SSD-A_NEW equal to 64 most important bits output by the CAVE algorithm and sets SSD-B_NEW equal to 64 output by the CAVE algorithm Minimum significant bits; select a 32-bit random number RANDBS and send it to the BMI in the BMI's Query Command message; restart the CAVE shown in Figure 37; execute the CAVE algorithm; and set AUTHBS equal to the 18 bits output by the CAVE algorithm.
根据接收的BMI询问命令,该BMI开始图37所示的CAVE,这里RANDBS被置于在BMI询问命令中接收的值;执行CAVE算法;置AUTHBS等于CAVE算法输出的18比特;和根据在BMI询问命令证实消息中包括的AUTHBS确认BMI询问命令的接收。根据接收的BMI询问命令证实,该移动站把接收的AUTHBS与其内部产生的相比较;确认接收的SSD更新命令。如果在该移动站的比较是成功的,该移动站分别置SSD-A和SSD-B为SSD-A_NEW和SSD-B_NEW,并且发送SSD更新命令证实消息至具有置于“1”的SSD-UPDATE消息单元的BMI和所有其它参数置于合适的值。如果在该移动站比较的结果失败。该移动站抛弃SSD-A_NEW和SSD-B_NEW,并发送一个SSD更新命令证实消息至具有置于0的SSD-UPDATE信息单元的BMI而且所有其它参数置于合适的值。如果从该移动站接收的SSD更新证实指示是成功的,该BMI置SSD-A和SSD-B为从HLR/AC(见EIA/TIA//IS-41)接收的值。第3层消息组Upon receipt of the BMI query command, the BMI starts the CAVE shown in Figure 37, where RANDBS is set to the value received in the BMI query command; the CAVE algorithm is executed; AUTHBS is set equal to the 18 bits output by the CAVE algorithm; The AUTHBS included in the command confirmation message confirms the receipt of the BMI query command. Upon receipt of the BMI query command confirmation, the mobile station compares the received AUTHBS with its internally generated; acknowledges the receipt of the SSD update command. If the comparison at the mobile station is successful, the mobile station sets SSD-A and SSD-B as SSD-A_NEW and SSD-B_NEW respectively, and sends an SSD Update Command Confirmation message to SSD-UPDATE with SSD-UPDATE set to "1" The BMI and all other parameters of the messaging unit are set to appropriate values. If the result of the comparison at the mobile station fails. The mobile station discards SSD-A_NEW and SSD-B_NEW, and sends an SSD Update Command Confirmation message to the BMI with the SSD-UPDATE information element set to 0 and all other parameters set to appropriate values. If the SSD Update Confirmation indication received from the mobile station was successful, the BMI sets SSD-A and SSD-B to the values received from the HLR/AC (see EIA/TIA//IS-41).
下一节描述第3层消息。在下一节中描述SMS更高层的消息。在下面以表格所示的所有信息中,在表的顶行的信息单元应当作为传送到第二层的第一单元。在该信息单元中,最主要的比特(表的最左边的比特)是传送到第二层的第一比特。在下面描述的消息中,信息单元是以按字母顺序描述的。F-BCCH消息The next section describes
F-BCCH录载广播信息,能使该移动站录找DCC的结构和其它其本系统信息。用于在F-BCCH上传输规定的第三层消息组描述如下:强制的F-BCCH消息DCC结构F-BCCH records and carries broadcast information, which enables the mobile station to record and find the structure of DCC and other information of its own system. The set of
这个信息总应当首先发送。DCC结构消息的格式如下:
M=强制性的M = Mandatory
O=任选的O = optional
对于任选信息单元的参数类型码
接入参数access parameters
接入参数消息的格式如下:
网孔选择参数消息格式如下:
登记参数消息格式如下:
对于任选信息元件的参数类型码
这个信息还可在E-BCCH上发送。该消息用于命令MS在某些信道上的无线电测量。它包含关于信道信息,MS必须测量并且报告用于移动辅助信道分配。
对于任选消息元件参数类型码
该E-BCCH承载广播信息,该信息比用于移动站的F-BCCH有更小的临界时间。对于任选信息消息类型和长度指示包括在内。在一个重复出现之前,在E-BCCH内消息组可复盖一些超帧。但是,一个特殊的消息在一个不同的超帧内不可能开始和结束。如果需要,滤波器信息必须用于终止最后的E-BCCH脉冲。强制性E-BCCH消息邻近网孔The E-BCCH carries broadcast information which has a smaller critical time than the F-BCCH for mobile stations. For optional information a message type and length indication is included. Groups of messages within the E-BCCH may cover some superframes before a repetition occurs. However, it is not possible for a particular message to start and end within a different superframe. Filter information shall be used to terminate the last E-BCCH burst if required. Mandatory E-BCCH message adjacent cell
邻近网孔消息的格式如下:
注:达到24种情况可被发送(TDMA和模拟邻近网孔的总数)。
见F-BCCH消息部分。应急信息广播See F-BCCH message section. emergency information broadcast
应急广播消息格式如下:
这个消息用于临时阻塞使用DCC的所有移动站。阻塞时间指示以分钟从0至255分钟。数值0表示该网孔阻塞。这个消息还可在SPACH上发送。离开消息的格式如下:
这个消息用在支持SOC和/或BSMC规定指令。这个信息的格式如下:
有两种类型的S-BCCH消息用于SMS广播,SMS首标消息和非首标消息。S-BCCH SMS帧首标There are two types of S-BCCH messages used for SMS broadcasts, SMS header messages and non-header messages. S-BCCH SMS frame header
该首标信息应该描述SMS子信道的结构而且只在每个SMS帧的第一时隙内提供。SMS帧首标的格式如下:
注:这两个单元的N个情况相邻近地被发送。NOTE: N instances of these two units are sent adjacently.
S-BCCH SMS广播信息内容S-BCCH SMS broadcast message content
该信息内容用于传送真实的SMS信息给MS。SMS广播信息内容的格式如下:
这个消息用于指配MS至具有相应参数的模拟话音信道。这个消息的格式如下:
这个消息响应于基站询问命令和包含授权算法输出。这个信息的格式如下:
这个信息由BMI发送,以便询问具体移动站的能力。这个信息的格式如下:
这个信息是用于指配MS至具有相应参数的数字业务量信道。这个信息格式如下:
这个信息用于通知移动站它有消息等待。这个信息的格式如下:
这个消息是用于通知MS试图建立一移动终止的呼叫正在进行,这个消息的格式如下:
这个消息是用于通知该移动站更新其在授权过程中使用的内部呼叫历史参数。这个消息的格式如下:
这个消息用于录载用于MS终止SMS的SMS应用层消息。该消息内容如下:
注:包括结果,初始短消息的消息中心有包括其终止SMS的SMS内的地址。Note: Including results, the message center of the original SMS has the address within the SMS including its terminating SMS.
用于任选信息单元的参数类型码
这个消息是用于确认和接受R-数据消息。该消息的内容如下:
这个消息是用于确认和拒绝R-数据消息。该消息的内容如下:
RACH证实消息的格式如下:
登记接受消息的格式如下:
登记拒绝消息的格式如下:
这个消息使得该移动站执行授权算法。SSD更新命令消息如下:
这个消息是在SOC和/或BSMC规定信令的支持中使用。它由BMI响应于一个移动站的SOC和BSMC ID请求消息发送。SOC/BSMC识别消息的格式如下:
这个消息是用于承载SOC/BSMC规定的信令信息。SOC/BSMC消息传递消息的格式如下:
注1:因为许多情况如L2规程允许可能是发送(254)。唯一询问命令NOTE 1: May be sent (254) as many circumstances as L2 procedures allow. unique query command
这个消息使得移动站执行授权算法。唯一询问命令消息如下:
这个消息是用于阻塞移动站与使用的DCC通信,以分钟表示阻塞时间,从0到255分钟。数值0表示该网孔没有被阻塞。离开消息的格式如下:
这个消息是用于强制移动站拒绝这个DCC和从其邻近表中选择一个信道。指向重试消息的格式如下:
时间和日期消息的格式如下:
对于RACH规定为如下消息。8比特消息类型用于消息间的区别。授权For RACH the following message is specified. The 8-bit message type is used to distinguish between messages. authorized
授权消息的格式如下:
该基站询问命令消息的格式如下:
如下的消息可附属于寻呼响应消息:序列号消息-如果S比特被置位。能力报告The following messages may be attached to the Page Response message: Sequence Number Message - if the S bit is set. Capability report
能力报告消息内容格式如下:
MACA报告消息的格式如下:
序列号消息-如果S比特是置位的。Sequence Number Message - If the S bit is set.
授权消息-如果AUTH比特是置位的。寻呼响应Authorization message - if the AUTH bit is set. paging response
寻呼响应消息格式如下:
如下的消息可附加到寻呼响应消息上:The following messages can be appended to the Page Response message:
序列号消息-如果S比特是置位的。Sequence Number Message - If the S bit is set.
授权消息-如果AUTH比特是置位的。点至点短消息业务Authorization message - if the AUTH bit is set. Point-to-point short message service
R-数据R-data
这个消息用于录载SMS应用消息,用以开始的SMS的MS和MS用户的确认。该消息的内容如下:
注1:包括结果,随着MS下标分布中的一个不同中心的目的地址是不同的。R-DATA接受Note 1: Including results, the destination address is different with a different center in the distribution of MS subscripts. R-DATA accepted
这个消息是用于确认和接受R-DATA消息。消息的内容如下:
该消息用于确认和拒绝R-DATA消息。消息内容如下:
登记(记录)消息的格式如下:
如下的消息可附加到寻呼响应消息上:The following messages can be appended to the Page Response message:
序列号消息-如果S比特是置位的;Sequence number message - if the S bit is set;
授权消息-如果AUTH比特是置位的,Authorization message - if the AUTH bit is set,
能力报告消息-如果登记类型等于上电或地理的和如果家庭/漫游MS能力标记在F-BCCH的接入参数消息被启动。序列号Capability Report Message - Access Parameter message on F-BCCH if Registration Type equals Power On or Geographic and if Home/Roaming MS Capability flag is enabled. serial number
序列号消息的格式如下:
这个消息是在SOC和BSMC规定信令的支持中使用。如果由BCCH SOC/BSMC请求标记授权,该移动站可发送SOC/BSMC请求消息至请求SOC和BSMC识别。
这个消息是用于承载SOC/BSMC规定的信今信息。SOC/BSMC消息传递消息的格式如下:
注1:正如许多情况,例L2规程可允许被发送(254)。SPACH证实Note 1: As in many cases, an example L2 procedure may be allowed to be sent (254). SPACH confirmed
SPACH证实消息的格式如下:
SSD更新命令证实消息的格式如下:
时间和日期消息的格式如下:
唯一的询问命令证实消息的格式如下:
下面信息可附加在唯一查询指令确认信息上:The following information can be appended to the unique query order confirmation message:
序列号消息-如果S比特被设置。信息单元说明Sequence Number Message - If the S bit is set. Information unit description
以下的编码规则适用于所有信息单元说明:The following encoding rules apply to all information element declarations:
“标记”型的单元将具有的值是:A cell of type "marker" will have the value:
0=禁止(断开,假)0=disable(disconnect, false)
1=启动(接通,真)1=Enable(On, True)
在SPACH的BCCH变更标记中,某些BCCH字段不触发一个转换,那些字段称为“NC”(非临界)。In the BCCH change flag of SPACH, some BCCH fields do not trigger a transition, those fields are called "NC" (non-critical).
“转换”型的单元是模1计数器,指示当前状态的变化。A "transition" type of unit is a modulo-1 counter that indicates a change in the current state.
除非另有注释,所有说明的长度是以BIT计,除非另有注释。Unless otherwise noted, all stated lengths are in BIT, unless otherwise noted.
信道号将编码为IS-54B,除非另有注释。存取字符组大小Channel numbers will be coded as IS-54B unless otherwise noted. access character group size
根据下列表,该字段通知用在RACH上的字符组大小的移动站:
该任选字段包含有关在该网孔中的附加DCC频率的信息和对当前DCC的关系。
附加DCC频率号码:附加DCC频率号码由该网孔提供。Additional DCC frequency number: The additional DCC frequency number is provided by the cell.
在表中,该DCC的位置:在该点将当前DCC频率插入用于DCC选择的DCC信道信息表中。In the table, the position of this DCC: at this point the current DCC frequency is inserted into the DCC channel information table for DCC selection.
DCC信道信息-该字段包含两个子字段。当确定DCC选择时,必须考虑DCC频率是由这个网孔来提供的附加DCC。“该频率的DCC时隙号码”是在该部分来描述。DCC Channel Information - This field contains two subfields. When determining the DCC selection, the DCC frequency must be considered for the additional DCC provided by this cell. "DCC slot number for this frequency" is described in this section.
注意:Notice:
1.在该任意选的信息单元表中所提供的所有附加的DCC在所有其它DCC任选的信息单元表的相同的序列中必须是相同的DCC逻辑设定。1. All additional DCCs provided in this optional information element list must be the same DCC logic set in the same sequence of all other DCC optional information element lists.
2.在附加DCC频率字段中的号码中,实例的号码发送相同的值。ART2. In the number in the additional DCC frequency field, the number of instances sends the same value. ART
该字段定义指配时隙
鉴别标记指示移动站是否与记录,始发、或在RACH上发送的呼叫响应消息一起发送鉴别消息。AUTHBSThe authentication flag indicates whether the mobile station sends an authentication message with a recorded, originating, or call response message sent on the RACH. AUTHBS
该信息单元包含鉴别程序的输出。AUTHRThis information element contains the output of the authentication program. AUTHR
这是用于始发、记录以及终止的鉴别算法的输出响应。AUTHUThis is the output response of the authentication algorithm for origination, logging and termination. AUTHU
这是用于唯一查询指令的鉴别算法的输出响应。BSMSThis is the output response of the authentication algorithm for the unique query command. BSMS
这是基站制造者的编码。呼叫方式This is the base station manufacturer's code. call method
根据下表,用于下一次话音/业务信道标志的最优选呼叫方式:
该字段指示移动站用于拒绝记录的情况。
该标记用于指示当前被阻塞的网孔。网孔选择控制This flag is used to indicate the currently blocked mesh. Mesh selection control
这个标记用于使进行网孔选择(最初的选择)的移动站不能选择当前的网孔。网孔类型This flag is used so that a mobile station performing cell selection (primary selection) cannot select the current cell. Mesh type
根据下表网孔的优选类型:
这是如在IS-54B中规定的C信道号。确认消息This is the C channel number as specified in IS-54B. confirmation message
确认消息字段是一个被确认的消息的消息类型字段的重复。根据下表,下面的消息是有效确认消息:
Se IS-54B用于该参数。国家代码Se IS-54B is used for this parameter. country code
该字段指示服务系统的国家代码。
该CC与CCITT推荐E.212中所规定的移动国家代码的CC是相同的。CC值被规定在E.212的附录A中。随后的值是从E.212提取的,而且仅仅用于说明。如果需要其它CC值,参考CC值的整个表的E.212的附录A。
该CC的3个十进制数表示为以使用通常十进制到二进制变换(0到999)的10二进制比特编码的相应的十进制数(0<=didjdk<=999)。传统控制The 3 decimal numbers of the CC are represented as the corresponding decimal numbers (0<=didjdk<=999) encoded in 10 binary bits using the usual decimal to binary conversion (0 to 999). traditional control
在使用中,二进制数据按照现在的SOC/BSMC协议说明。时延In use, binary data is specified according to the current SOC/BSMC protocol. time delay
以秒计时。δ(DELTA)时间Time in seconds. Delta (DELTA) time
这个参数表示移动站在根据时隙和符号的DTC和DCC计时中的差值。
该标记表示是启动还是禁止去记录。拨号数字This flag indicates whether logging is enabled or disabled. Dial digits
MS的拨号数字用于始发。DVCCThe dialed digits of the MS are used for origination. DVCC
数字校验彩色码用在与IS-54B一致的方式中。E-BCCH变更通知Digital check color codes are used in a manner consistent with IS-54B. E-BCCH Change Notice
转换比特指示具有当前超帧的E-BCCH数据开始的变更。如果转换已经发生,所有移协站就读取当前超帧和接着的所有超帧的E-BCCH,直到E-BCCH的整个周期被读完为止。ESNThe transition bit indicates a change of E-BCCH data start with the current superframe. If switching has occurred, all mobile stations read the E-BCCH of the current superframe and all subsequent superframes until the entire period of the E-BCCH is read. ESN
识别MS的电序列号。固件寿命Identify the electronic serial number of the MS. Firmware lifetime
固件寿命由移动站制造者决定。FOREGThe firmware lifetime is determined by the mobile station manufacturer. FOREG
该标记表示强制记录是起动还是禁止。HL_FREQThis flag indicates whether forced logging is enabled or disabled. HL_FREQ
如果HL_FREQ设置到高,MS将根据在SCANFREQ信息单元中的规则出发完成频率测量。如果设置到低,则该频率将用由SCANFREQ信息单元中的规则出发要求的半频率来测量。
计数器用于识别现在正在广播的特超帧。特超帧由两个超帧组成。该计数器从0开始。Julian日期The counter is used to identify the hyperframe that is currently being broadcast. A hyperframe consists of two superframes. This counter starts from 0. Julian date
序列数据计数器从1900年1月1日开始。在2000年1月1日复位到1。L2帧起始Sequence data counters start from January 1, 1900. Reset to 1 on January 1, 2000. L2 frame start
该变量表示从SMS子通道周期的开始到SMS消息的开始的时隙的数字。该消息可能不在SMS时隙指示的开始,但可包含在用于该消息开始发送的结束/开始字符组中。LAREGThis variable represents the number of time slots from the start of the SMS subchannel period to the start of the SMS message. The message may not be at the beginning of the SMS slot indication, but may be included in the end/begin burst for the start of the message transmission. LAREG
当当前网孔的记录号不是移动站的记录号表的一部分时,根据记录标记的位置区域指示移动站是否是地区性的记录。MACWhen the current cell's record number is not part of the mobile station's record number table, the location area of the record flag indicates whether the mobile station is a regional record. MAC
该字段表示用在指配数字业务通道上的功率电平。编码是根据IS-54B表2.1.2-1。MACA列表This field indicates the power level used on the assigned digital traffic channel. Coding is according to IS-54B Table 2.1.2-1. MACA list
该任选字段表示用于必须测量的移动辅助信道配置的移动信道。
根据下列表,该DCC能够支撑的最大呼叫帧级:
最大次数,移动站执行以下步骤:产生随机延时周期,等待直到该周期的终止,读取已经设置到非空载的B/R/I标记。
在考虑测试一个故障之前,个别RACH字符组的可允许的连续重复的最大次数。最大重试The maximum number of consecutive repeats of an individual RACH burst before it is considered to test for a failure. max retries
在考虑试验传送一个消息(单个或多个字符组RACH的任何一个字符组)作为一个故障之前,可允许RACH传送的最大次数。最大停止计数器The maximum number of RACH transmissions that may be allowed before attempting to transmit a message (any burst of single or multi-burst RACH) as a failure. Maximum Stop Counter
最大次数,移动站执行以下步骤:在RACH中传送一个字符组,检查已设置在不占线(R/N=N或B/I/R=R或I)的SCF,产生一个随机延迟周期,等待直到该周期终止并在RACH上再传送字符组。MEMMaximum number of times, the mobile station performs the following steps: transmits a burst in RACH, checks the SCF that has been set not busy (R/N=N or B/I/R=R or I), generates a random delay period, waits No more bursts are transmitted on the RACH until the period expires. MEM
该标记表示移动站是否将在指配业务信道上使用消息加密方式。信息中心地址This flag indicates whether the mobile station will use message encryption on the assigned traffic channel. Information Center Address
信息中心地址的用途是识别用于被传送的消息的信息中心地址。该信息单元的最大长度被限制到12个八位位组。
数字的类型(八位位组2)(见注意1)type of number (octet 2) (see note 1)
比特bits
765765
001 国际号码(见注意2)001 international number (see note 2)
010 国内号码(见注意2,4,5)010 domestic number (see
011 网络-专用号码(见注意3)011 Network-dedicated number (see note 3)
110 缩位号码110 abbreviated number
111 扩展保留111 Extended reservation
所有其它值将被保留All other values will be preserved
注意:Notice:
1.对“国际和国内号码”的定义,见CCITT推荐I.330。1. For the definition of "international and domestic numbers", see CCITT recommendation I.330.
2.不包括词头或换码数字。2. Do not include prefixes or escape numbers.
3.“网络-专用号码”的号码类型用于表示管理或专门服务网络的业务号码。3. The number type "network-private number" is used to represent a service number of a managed or private service network.
4.对于在世界区域1(见CCITT推荐E.163对国家代码的赋值)中在美国和其他国家之间的呼叫。在此,编号方案识别是“ISDN/电话编号方案”,“号码类型”被编码到“国内号码”。4. For calls between the United States and other countries in world zone 1 (see CCITT Recommendation E.163 Assignment of Country Codes). Here, the numbering plan identification is "ISDN/Telephone Numbering Plan", and the "Number Type" is coded to "National Number".
5.对包含服务存取码的号码(例如,“700”,“800”,“900”),“号码类型”被编码为“国内号码”。5. For numbers containing service access codes (eg, "700", "800", "900"), the "Number Type" is encoded as "National Number".
编号方案识别(八位位组2)Numbering Plan Identification (Octet 2)
编号方案(用于号码类型=001和010)Numbering Plan (for Number Type = 001 and 010)
比特bits
43214321
0000 未知的0000 unknown
0001 ISDN/电话编号方案(CCITT推荐E.164和E.163)0001 ISDN/telephone numbering plan (CCITT recommends E.164 and E.163)
1001 专用编号方案1001 private numbering plan
1111 保留扩展1111 reserved extension
所有其它的值被保留All other values are preserved
数字(八位位组3,等等)number (
该字段被编码TBCD如下:
该8-比特信息单元识别被发送消息的功能。消息类型被编码如下:
该字段表示以分计时。型号This field indicates the time in minutes. model
该字段表示移动站的型号。MPCIThis field indicates the model of the mobile station. MPCI
移动协议容量指示符根据下列表,用于通知它的处理容量的BS:
注意:Notice:
IS-54移动站是与该规格中提出的协议相一致的移动站。MS_ACC_PWRAn IS-54 mobile station is a mobile station conforming to the protocol proposed in this specification. MS_ACC_PWR
移动站存取功率电平确定MS可用于最初存取网络时的最大输出功率。
该任选信息单元指示将用于网孔再选择测量的移动站的模拟信道。
PCI表示模拟邻近网孔的协议容量。它被规定如下:
该任选信息单元指示TEMA信道用于网孔再选择。
注意:Notice:
在该部分中不受限制的字段被限制在相应的IE之下。
邻近网孔的号码是模拟类型。DCC时隙的号码,该频率The numbers of adjacent cells are of analog type. The number of DCC slots, the frequency
根据下列表,时隙号码专用在该频率上的DCC。
注意1:Note 1:
时隙1和1,4必须是主要的DCC,同时,时隙2,5和3,6必须是次要的DCC,而且与主要的(DCC)是在相同的频率上。E-BCCH的号码Timeslots 1 and 1,4 must be primary DCCs, while
专用于E-BCCH时隙每超帧的邻近的号码(在该字段中的值加1)。F-BCCH的号码Contiguous number per superframe dedicated to E-BCCH slots (value in this field plus 1). F-BCCH number
专用于F-BCCH时隙每超帧的邻近的号码(在该字段中的值加1)。消息号码Contiguous number per superframe dedicated to F-BCCH slots (value in this field plus 1). message number
该字段表示消息等待的号码。S_BCCH的号码This field indicates the number the message is waiting for. S_BCCH number
专用于S-BCCH时隙每超帧邻近的号码。跳越时隙的号码Number of contiguous S-BCCH slots per superframe. number of skipped slots
专用于跳越时隙每超帧的号码。参看PCH子信道选择。SMS消息号码A number per superframe dedicated to skipped slots. See PCH subchannel selection. SMS message number
在该SMS帧中,一个变量表示广播SMS消息的号码(在该字段中的值加1)。子信道号码In the SMS frame, a variable indicates the number of the broadcast SMS message (the value in this field is incremented by 1). subchannel number
一个变量表示由这个DCC使用的SMS子信道号码(在该字段中的值加1)。TDMA邻近网孔的号码A variable indicating the SMS subchannel number used by this DCC (the value in this field is incremented by 1). TDMA adjacent cell number
TDMA类型的邻近网孔的号码。OLCNumber of adjacent cells of TDMA type. OLC
超载级(OLC)确定移动是否可在RACH上产生一个始发。移动站必须检查相应于其内部存储的存取超载级赋值的位表的值。如果识别OLC比特被起动,则移动就能够用一个始发存取连续。否则,移动就不能始发存取。The Overload Class (OLC) determines whether a mobile can generate an origination on the RACH. The mobile station must check the value of the bit table corresponding to its internally stored access overload level assignment. If the identification OLC bit is enabled, the movement can be continued with an initial access. Otherwise, the mobile cannot initiate access.
推荐的超载控制比特赋值是:
对于更多的信息,参考EIA无线通信系统会报No.16(1985年3月),“在蜂窝无线通信业务中存取过载级的赋值”。呼叫方式For more information, refer to EIA Radio Communications Systems Bulletin No. 16 (March 1985), "Assignment of Access Overload Levels in Cellular Radio Services". call method
根据下表,该信息单元说明被指配到移动信道的类型:值 功 能DCH转移This information element specifies the type of mobile channel assigned to it according to the following table: Value Function DCH transfer
预期呼叫消息的最大次数能被转移到其他下链信道。PDREGThe maximum number of times an expected paging message can be diverted to other downlink channels. PDREG
该标记表示地区记录接通还是断开。(根据IS-54B)。周期记录This flag indicates whether the region record is on or off. (according to IS-54B). cycle record
该任选字段表示使用的周期记录,也包含以分的指定周期。
一个变量以表示等于一个周期SMS帧的号码(在该字段中的值加1)子通道周期的相位号码A variable to represent the phase number of the subchannel period equal to the number of one periodic SMS frame (value in this field plus 1)
一个变量以表示现在正在广播的周期中的SMS帧。PMA variable to represent the SMS frame in the cycle that is currently being broadcast. PM
该标记确定移动站是否将使用最初分配的数字业务信道上的保密模式。主超帧指示符This flag determines whether the mobile station will use the privacy mode on the originally assigned digital traffic channel. primary superframe indicator
该比特触发器以表示正在广播的当前超帧是特超帧中主超帧还是次超帧。
该标记表示电平上升记录是接通还是断开(根据IS-54B)。RANDThis flag indicates whether level-up recording is on or off (according to IS-54B). RAND
由移动存储的随机数,用于选择的鉴别处理。RANDBSA random number stored by the mobile for use in the selection authentication process. RANDBS
由使用在SSD更新程序中的MS产生的随机数。RANDCRandom number generated by MS used in SSD update program. RANDC
一个用于证实由MS最后接收的RAND的数。RANDSSDA number used to validate the last RAND received by the MS. RANDSSD
由使用在SSD更新程序中的MS产生的随机数。RANDURandom number generated by MS used in SSD update program. RANDU
由使用的唯一查询更新程序中的BS产生的随机数。R_Cause(原因)A nonce generated by the BS in the unique query updater used. R_Cause (reason)
该信息单元(IE)是1个八位位组长,并且在R-DATA拒绝消息中是指示标志。This Information Element (IE) is 1 octet long and is an indicator in the R-DATA Reject message.
下列表提供R_Cause IE布局和原因值说明:
R-数据单元IE包含较高层的协议数据单元。该IE在R-DATA消息中是指示标志。IE具有多达241八位位组的可变长度,由长度指示符发送第一个八位位组。
较高层协议识别字段被编码如下:The higher layer protocol identification field is encoded as follows:
[(粘贴P.131 1.)]REGH[(Paste P.131 1.)]REGH
该标记指示是否家用移动站将记录。REG_HYSTThis flag indicates whether the home mobile station will record. REG_HYST
如果从邻近表中选择的DCC已经被检查和认为是网孔再选的最好选择并且该选择的DCC要求记录,那么仅在REG_HYST dB的信号强度差得到之后,MS才移到新的网孔。
该任选字段包含在当前的REGID值上的信息和在步进REGID之间的时间。后者的值用超帧表示。
用于表示记录类型的移动是根据下表进行的:
该任选字段表示使用周期记录,也包含在94个超帧单元中说明的周期(60.16秒)
该标记表示跨区移动站是否将记录。请求号码This flag indicates whether the inter-area mobile station will log or not. request number
参见IS-54B。再选偏移See IS-54B. reselect offset
再选偏移值用在考虑网孔再选的新选择网孔的优选的增加/减少。
该10比特字段包含用在确定特定的移动实际移动位置区域(VMLA)的记录号码。
注意1:达到63时可被发送。RSS_ACC_MIN该信息单元用于网孔(再)选择处理。这是存取该网孔所要求的最小接收信号强度。
R-事务识别符用于联结一个R-DATA ACC EPT或一个R-DATA REJECT消息到已被确认的R-DATA消息。SThe R-transaction identifier is used to associate an R-DATA ACC EPT or an R-DATA REJECT message with an acknowledged R-DATA message. S
序列号标记表示移动站是否与记录、始发、呼叫响应、唯一查询指令确认、或在RACH上的基站查询指令消息一起发送ESN消息。SBThe sequence number flag indicates whether the mobile station sends the ESN message with the record, origination, call response, unique inquiry order acknowledgment, or base station inquiry order message on RACH. SB
该标记确定移动站在指定的数字业务信道上,是否将使用初始缩短的字符组。SCANFREQThis flag determines whether the mobile station will use the original shortened burst on the assigned digital traffic channel. SCAN FREQ
在邻近表中选择的DCC的每超帧信号强度测量所要求的最小缺席数字。SCCThe minimum number of absences required for signal strength measurements per superframe for DCCs selected in the neighbor list. SCC
该字段确定SAT彩色码,用在指配的模拟话音信道上。
站等级标志表示功率级别、传送容量和MS的频带宽度。以秒计日The station class mark indicates the power class, transmission capacity and frequency bandwidth of the MS. days in seconds
以秒计的序列日时计数器,这里12:00:00 A.M.=0SERV_SSSerial time-of-day counter in seconds, where 12:00:00 A.M.=0SERV_SS
该信息单元用于网孔再选过程中,信号强度用作确定一个阈值,超过阈值,一个邻近网孔将使网孔选择过程的有关业务有效。
一个变量用于识别该唯一SMS消息。SMS消息长度A variable is used to identify the unique SMS message. SMS message length
根据下列表,在RACH上发送的L3短消息的最大可允许的长度(八位位组)。
该标记表示MS是否可请求BS SOC & BSMC ID。软件寿命This flag indicates whether MS can request BS SOC & BSMC ID. software lifetime
该标记表示用于移动的软件寿命。SSD更新状态This flag indicates the software lifetime for mobile. SSD update status
根据下列表,用于表示SSF更新指令的完成、或故障原因:
认为足以满足被考虑网孔再选的新选择DCC的最小信号强度。
一个变量以识别现在正在广播的子信道。SYREGA variable to identify the subchannel that is currently broadcasting. SYREG
当移动进入一个新的系统识别区域时,系统基址记录标记表示移动是否有地区性记录。电文消息数据单元When a move enters a new system-recognized area, the system base record flag indicates whether the move has regional records. text message data unit
电文消息数据单元是包含被广播消息的变量长度IE。对每一消息该IE仅允许有一种情况。下列表提供电文消息数据单元说明。
该字段表示用于指配的模拟话音信道的功率电平。编码是根据IS-54B表2.1.2-1。VP MEMThis field indicates the power level for the assigned analogue voice channel. Coding is according to IS-54B Table 2.1.2-1. VP MEM
话音保密、消息加密模式比特是用于请求一个最优选的呼叫方式。SMS高分层操作The voice privacy, message encryption mode bits are used to request a most preferred calling method. SMS High Layer Operation
在R-数据单元中的高分层协议数据单元字段用于执行SMS应用层消息。消息设置The higher layer protocol data unit field in the R-data unit is used to carry out SMS application layer messages. message settings
SMS应用消息被限定在该区域中。这些消息经过层3R-DATA消息,或更确切地说在R-数据单元信息单元中被传送到空间接口上。SMS application messages are restricted in this area. These messages are transmitted on the air interface via layer 3 R-DATA messages, or rather in R-data unit information elements.
对每个SMS应用消息,提供了两个表格:第一个表格提供包括每个消息的信息单元,第2个表格提供对指示IE的消息布局。For each SMS application message, two tables are provided: the first table provides the information elements containing each message, and the second table provides the message layout for the indicated IE.
SMS应用层消息的最大长度将不超过239个八位位组,以适应R-数据单元IE。The maximum length of an SMS application layer message shall not exceed 239 octets to accommodate the R-Data Unit IE.
SMS应用层消息如下。SMS传送SMS application layer messages are as follows. SMS delivery
该SMS应用层消息用于支持终止SMS的MS从网络传送到MS。This SMS application layer message is used to support MS delivery of terminated SMS from network to MS.
下列表提供消息内容和用于指示IE的消息布局。
该SMS应用层消息用于支持始发SMS的MS。This SMS application layer message is intended for MSs that support originating SMS.
下表提供消息内容和消息布局。
该SMS应用消息由响应于SMS DELIVER消息的MS用户发送,它具有表示要求用户确认的应回答的选择IE。This SMS Application message is sent by the MS user in response to the SMS DELIVER message, with an answerable Select IE indicating that user confirmation is required.
下列表提供消息内容和用于指示IE的消息布局。
该SMS应用层消息用于允许MS用户去控制被控制的SMS应用特征。特征参数IE和特征状态IE与特征ID IE有关。
该SMS应用层消息用于允许MS以接收有关它的SMS应用特征状态的信息。
下表提供在SMS应用层上规定的IE的全部表格。
消息类型指示符是一个3比特字段,它位于每个SMS应用消息MTI的第一八位位组的比特1,2和3中。MTI被编码如下:
延迟发送时间是一个任选的IE,它包括在SMS SUBMIT之中,以允许信息中心在一个较迟时间发送消息。Delay Send Time is an optional IE included in SMS SUBMIT to allow the message center to send the message at a later time.
延迟发送时间字段是用整个或半个八位位组表示的。在第一种情况中,延迟发送时间包括两个八位位组,给出的相对的发送时间,从信息中心接收SMS SUBMIT时算出。在第二种情况中,延迟发送时间包括8个八位位组,给出的用于提供被发送的短消息的绝对时间组成。
特征组信息单元目录
特征ID字段用于识别与SMS FEAT XTRL REQ和SMSFEAT STATUS信息中给定情况的特征状态和特征参数相关的特征。特征ID字段编码如下:比特4 3 2 10 0 0 0 SMS 所有其它值被保留。The Feature ID field is used to identify the Feature associated with the Feature Status and Feature Parameters for a given case in the SMS FEAT XTRL REQ and SMSFEAT STATUS messages. The Feature ID field is coded as follows:
特征参数字段被用在SMS FEAT CTRL STATUS和SMSFEAT XTRL REQU中以识别与给定的特征ID相关的特征参数。如果特征ID表示SMS,则该特征参数规定如下:比特6 5 40 0 0 接收所有信息0 0 1 存贮所有信息0 1 0 接收所选择的信息所有的其它值被保留。The feature parameter field is used in SMS FEAT CTRL STATUS and SMSFEAT XTRL REQU to identify the feature parameter associated with a given feature ID. If the feature ID indicates SMS, the feature parameter is defined as follows:
特征状态是2比特字段,用于表示状态(在SMS FEAT CTRLSTATUS信息中)或请求的特征状态(在SMD FEAT CTRL中):比特8 70 0 特征参数“关”0 1 特征参数“开”所有其它值被保留。信息中心时间标记Feature Status is a 2-bit field used to indicate status (in SMS FEAT CTRLSTATUS message) or requested feature status (in SMD FEAT CTRL):
信息中心时间标记被可选地包括在SMS DELIVER消息中,以表示信息中心接收短信息的时间。The message center time stamp is optionally included in the SMS DELIVER message to indicate the time when the message was received by the message center.
信息中心时间标记IE是以半个八位位组形式给出的,并且以如下方法表示该时间:
消息基准(MR)IE用整数表示短消息的基准号码The message reference (MR) IE uses an integer to represent the reference number of the short message
如果MR值小于64,仅6位字段用于MR。如果MR值大于63,而小于8192,则13位字段用于MR。If the MR value is less than 64, only the 6-bit field is used for MR. If the MR value is greater than 63 but less than 8192, a 13-bit field is used for MR.
在端接SMS的MS中,MR用于将用户确认信息与先前发送的由“用户确认”的SMS DELIER信息相联接,在SMS USER ACK信息中发送的MR与被用户确认的在SMS DELIVER信息中的完全相同。特征组的号码In an SMS-terminated MS, MR is used to link the user confirmation message with the previously sent SMS DELIER message "confirmed by the user". exactly the same. number of feature groups
特征组的号码积别表示在SMS FEAT-CTRL-REQU或SMS-CTRL-STATUS信息中特征组IE的范例的号码。位8 7 60 0 0 保留0 1 0 1特征组0 1 0 2特征组1 1 0 6特征组1 1 1 7特征组保密指示符The feature group number product indicates the number of instances of the feature group IE in the SMS FEAT-CTRL-REQU or SMS-CTRL-STATUS message.
保密指示符用在SMS DEVIVER和SMS SUBMIT信息中,以允许发送用户去设置被发送信息的保密级别。The privacy indicator is used in SMS DEVIVER and SMS SUBMIT messages to allow the sending user to set the privacy level of the sent message.
根据保密级别(例如,通过使用由读出输入SMS DELIVER信息的移动用户输入的不同密码加以保护),接收SMS DELIVER的移动站可以不同地处理信息。位6 50 0 不受限制(保密级别0)0 1 受限制(保密级别1)1 0 加密(保密级别2)1 0 保密(保密级别3)应答选择Depending on the level of security (protected, for example, by using a different password entered by the mobile user who reads the incoming SMS DELIVER message), the mobile station receiving the SMS DELIVER may process the information differently.
应答选择IE在SMS DELIVER信息中必须遵循一位字段,表示是否要求用户确认。这个位被设置在SMS-DELIVER信息的第二个八位位组的0位。0 不需要用户确认1 需要用户确认响应码The response selection IE must follow a field in the SMS DELIVER message, indicating whether to ask the user to confirm. This bit is set in
响应码用于携带对于先前接收的短信息的MS用户响应。The response code is used to carry the MS user response to the previously received short message.
响应码是4位长度,必须遵循在SMS USER ACK信息中使用的IE。该响应码值是信息中心专用的。紧急指示符The response code is 4 bits long and must follow the IE used in the SMS USER ACK message. This response code value is specific to the message center. emergency indicator
紧急指示符IE用于允许短信息的发送者去提供短信息的紧急程度,例如,该MS能够使用UI去提供不同用户通知。该UI必须遵循包括在SMS DELIVER和SMS SUBMIT信息中的2位IE。UI的编码如下:位7 60 0 大多数0 1 正常1 0 紧急1 0 很紧急用户数据单元The urgency indicator IE is used to allow the sender of the short message to provide the urgency of the short message, for example, the MS can use the UI to provide different user notifications. The UI must follow the 2-digit IE included in the SMS DELIVER and SMS SUBMIT messages. The UI is coded as follows:
用户数据单元IE用于携带用户正文信息。
用户目的地址信息单元的用途是识别MS始发短信息(即SMSSUBMIT信息)的用户目的地址。The purpose of the user destination address information element is to identify the user destination address of the short message (ie SMSSUBMIT message) sent by the MS.
这个信息单元的最大长度与网络有关。用户目的信息单元(TBCD编码)
1.对于“国际、国内和用户号码”的定义,见CCITT介绍1.330。1. For the definition of "international, national and subscriber numbers", see CCITT Introduction 1.330.
2.将不包括字首或换码数字2. will not include prefixes or escape digits
3.“网络一专用号码”的号码类型用于指示管理和专用于服务网络的业务号码。3. The number type of "network-dedicated number" is used to indicate a management and service number dedicated to the service network.
4.在美国和世界范围1区内其它国家之间对于短信息的看法(见CCITT的E.163建议对国家编码的分配),在那里编号方案识别是“ISDN/电话编号方案”,“号码的类型”编码到“国内号码”。4. Views on short messages between the United States and other countries in
5.对于包含业务接入码的编号(例如“700”、“800”、“900”),号码的类型按“国内号码”编码。5. For numbers containing service access codes (eg "700", "800", "900"), the type of number is coded as "National Number".
6.以“N11”格式的业务编码(例如:“911”、“411”)是唯一的,并且使用“用户号码”或“国内号码”码点可被发送。编码方案识别(八位位组2)编码方案(适用于号码=000,001,010,和100的类型)位4 3 2 10 0 0 0 未知0 0 0 1 ISDN/电话编号方案(CCITT建议E.164和E.163)0 0 1 1 数据编号方案(CCITT建议X.121)0 1 0 0 电传编号方案(CCITT建议F.69)1 0 0 1 专用编号方案1 1 1 1 保留扩展所有其它值被保留。号码数字(八位位组3等)这字段被编码TBCD或IA5,如用地址编码字段(八位位组2,位8)表示。如果使用TBCD,则编码如下:
当AFI=50(按BCD编码为01 010000)时,IA5字符按CCITT建议T.50的表11或ISO646的规范将第八位设置为0来编码。当AFI=51(按BCD编码为01010001)时,ASCII字符按ANST X3.4规范将第八位设置为0来编码。When AFI=50 (coded as 01 010000 according to BCD), the IA5 character is coded by setting the eighth bit to 0 according to Table 11 of CCITT Recommendation T.50 or the specification of ISO646. When AFI=51 (01010001 according to BCD encoding), ASCII characters are encoded by setting the eighth bit to 0 according to the ANST X3.4 specification.
对于用户-专用子地址,在20个八位位组的最大长度的条件下,根据用户规定来编码字段。当与CCITT建议X.25网络互相配合时,应用TBCD编码。用户始发地址用户始发地址单元的用户是识别短消息的始发地址。这个信息单元的最大长度与网络有关。用户始发地址信息单元(TBDC编码)
1.对于“国际、国内和用户号码”的定义,见CCITT建议1.330。1. For the definition of "international, national and subscriber numbers", see CCITT Recommendation 1.330.
2.将不包括字首或换码数字。2. Will not include prefixes or escape digits.
3.“网络-专用号码”的号码类型用于指示管理和专用于服务网络的业务号码。3. The number type of "network-dedicated number" is used to indicate a management and service number dedicated to the service network.
4.在美国和世界范围1区内其它各国家之间SMS事务(见CCITT建议国家编码的分配),在那里编号方案识别是“ISDN/电话编码方案”,“号码的类型”被编码到“国内号码”。4. SMS transactions between the United States and other countries in
5.对于包含业务接入码的编号(例如“700”、“800”、“900”),“号码的类型”按“国内号码”编码。5. For numbers containing service access codes (such as "700", "800", "900"), the "type of number" is coded according to "domestic number".
6.以“N11”格式的业务编码(例如“911”、“411”)是唯一的,并且可用“用户号码”或“国内号码”码点发送。编码方案识别(八位位组3)编码方案(适用于号码=000,001,010和100的类型)位4 3 2 10 0 0 0 未知0 0 0 1 ISDN/电话编号方案(CCITT建议E.164和E.163)0 0 1 1 数据编号方案(CCITT建议x.121.)0 1 0 0 电传编号方案(CCITT建议F.69)1 0 0 1 专用编号方案1 1 1 1 保留扩展所有其它值被保留。数字(八位位组3,等)这个字段编码TBCD如下:
对于用户-规定的子地址,在20个八位位组的最大长度条件下,根据用户规定来编码字段。当与CCITT建议X.25网络相互配合时,TBCD编码被应用。有效周期For user-specified subaddresses, the fields are coded according to user specifications, subject to a maximum length of 20 octets. When interoperating with CCITT Recommendation X.25 networks, TBCD encoding is applied. Valid period
有效周期IE在MS始发短消息中使用,如果消息没有传送到指定收信用户,用以指示在消息被删除后的信息中心的时间。The effective period IE is used in the short message originating from the MS. If the message is not delivered to the designated recipient user, it is used to indicate the time of the information center after the message is deleted.
有效周期字段给予或者整数或者半个八位位组的表示。在第一种情况,有效周期包括两个八位位组,给出由信息中心接收的SMS-SUBMIT时算出的有效周期的长度。在第二种情况,有效周期包括8个八位位组,给出有效周期终端的绝对时间。有效周期格式IE表示用于编码有效周期的格式。有效周期信息单元内容,两个八位位组格式
绝对有效周期按信息中心时间标记IE编码。识别[[移动站识别(MSID)这个移动站可使用4种不同编号方法被识别:1.34-bit IS-54B MIN2.24-bit IS-54B MINI3.IMSI4.TMSI34-Bit IS-54B MINThe absolute validity period is coded according to the information center time stamp IE. Identification [[Mobile Station Identification (MSID) This mobile station can be identified using 4 different numbering methods: 1. 34-bit IS-54B MIN2. 24-bit IS-54B MINI3. IMSI4. TMSI34-Bit IS-54B MIN
[[见IS-54B。24-Bit IS-54B MIN1[[See IS-54B. 24-Bit IS-54B MIN1
见IS-54B。IMSISee IS-54B. IMSI
[[定义[[Definition
国际移动用户识别(IMSI)是具有15个十进制数字的最大长度的一个号码,按如下构成,(D=一个十进制数字)[[结合在图Pg.159中]]MCC移动通信国家编码MNC移动网络编码MSIN移动站识别号码NMSI国内移动站识别IMSI国际移动站识别The International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) is a number with a maximum length of 15 decimal digits, constructed as follows, (D=one decimal digit) [[incorporated in Figure Pg.159]] MCC Mobile Communications Country Code MNC Mobile Network Code MSIN Mobile Station Identification Number NMSI National Mobile Station Identification IMSI International Mobile Station Identification
MCC是在E.212的附录A中规定的,MCC唯一地识别MS的信宅的国家。所有MCC都是3个数字长度。美国和加拿大属于附录的地区3。加拿大保留编码302;美国保留编码310-316。The MCC is specified in Appendix A of E.212, and the MCC uniquely identifies the country of the MS. All MCCs are 3 digits long. The United States and Canada are included in
MNC唯一地用于识别MS的本地公众地面移动网络(PLMN)。PLMN称为由一个HLR供给的移动网络。MCC和MNC是MS的HLR的全局地址。The MNC is uniquely used to identify the MS's local Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN). PLMN is called a mobile network served by an HLR. MCC and MNC are the global addresses of the MS's HLR.
IMSI不用作拨号号码;并且典型地每个NAM仅有一个IMSI。与MIN的反向兼容性The IMSI is not used as a dial number; and typically there is only one IMSI per NAM. Backward compatibility with MIN
存在与MIN的IS-54B类型反向兼容的需要,如果以下条件实现的话使用IS-54B MIN操作的系统可得到支持:There is a need for backward compatibility with the IS-54B type of MIN, and systems operating with IS-54B MIN are supported if the following conditions are fulfilled:
MCC指示来自字区3(美国和加拿大)的用户,和MCC indicates users from subzone 3 (US and Canada), and
网络编码的前面两个(十进制)数字是00,然后剩余的数字能假设为普通的10个数字的MIN,和对于网络编址所加的适当转换。IMSI编码The first two (decimal) digits of the network code are 00, then the remaining digits can be assumed to be the normal 10-digit MIN, with the appropriate translations added for network addressing. IMSI code
IMSI按50-bit固定长度字段编码。 The IMSI is encoded in a 50-bit fixed-length field.
MSIN表示用于驱动34-比特IS-54B MIN所用的10个十进行制数字。MSIN represents the 10 decimal digits used to drive the 34-bit IS-54B MIN.
15个十进制数字被分成5组,每组3个数字。然后,所得的5个十进制数字组的每一个表示为:使用一般十进制到二进制变换(0到999),在10个二进制位编码的相应的十进制数(0<=didjdk<=999,i=j+1,j=k+1,k=1、4、7、10、13)。TMSI临时的移动站识别(TMST)可以是20位MSID,被网络动态地分配到移动站。通过网络,TMSI可以用于寻呼或传送一个消息到SPACH上的一个移动站。移动ESNThe 15 decimal digits are divided into 5 groups of 3 digits each. Each of the resulting groups of 5 decimal digits is then represented as: using the general decimal-to-binary transformation (0 to 999), the corresponding decimal number encoded in 10 binary bits (0<=d i d j d k <= 999, i=j+1, j=k+1, k=1, 4, 7, 10, 13). TMSI Temporary Mobile Station Identity (TMST) may be a 20-bit MSID, which is dynamically assigned to a mobile station by the network. Through the network, TMSI can be used for paging or sending a message to a mobile station on the SPACH. Mobile ESN
按照IS-54B系统识别 According to the IS-54B system identification
基站可广播指示它们识别的值,即关于:国家、SID、网络类型、和,如果它们不是公众的,专用系统ID。Base stations may broadcast values indicating their identity, ie with respect to: country, SID, network type, and, if they are not public, private system ID.
它们可任选地广播它们的系统话务员码和厂商代码BS。这些任选的值可以任意通过专门查询或这些值的可能广播。这些任选值将仅在特殊专用信号被请求时需要,其BS能够传送,或用于存取本地专用网络。They may optionally broadcast their system operator code and vendor code BS. These optional values are optional via ad-hoc queries or possible broadcasts of these values. These optional values will only be needed when special private signals are requested, which the BS can transmit, or for accessing the local private network.
识别结构将支持全国专用系统识别以及本地专用系统识别。编号系统的监视对于本地和全国识别配置将作不同的处理。The identification structure will support national private system identification as well as local private system identification. Monitoring of numbering systems will be handled differently for local and national identification configurations.
国家代码可以支持允许国际规定使用和国际漫游。
两个比特可被用于识别网络类型,网络类型的例子是:公用的、专用的、半专用的和家用的。Two bits can be used to identify the type of network, examples of which are: public, private, semi-private and home.
专用系统仅可以为规定移动站接入。Private systems can only be accessed by specified mobile stations.
半专用系统可以传送专用的识别号码(PSID),但是公众可公开使用。这允许专用用户作为专用的网孔,同时也允许公众使用。A semi-private system may transmit a private identification number (PSID), but be openly available to the public. This allows private users to act as a private cell while also allowing public use.
家用系统可以是一个“家用基站”例如,一部无绳电话。
在E.212中描述的国家代码可在DCC上广播。专用系统IDCountry codes described in E.212 can be broadcast on DCC. Dedicated System ID
专用系统ID可用于使MS驻留在它们尚未接入的专用系统。当MS检测一个专用系统ID不在其专用系统ID表中,该MS将不试图驻留或寄存在该专用系统中。Private system IDs can be used to allow MSs to camp on private systems that they do not already have access to. When an MS detects that a private system ID is not in its private system ID table, the MS will not attempt to camp or register on that private system.
如果一个网孔被标记为公用的,该网孔可以广播“O”的PSID或根本不广播PSID。PSID匹配If a cell is marked as public, the cell may broadcast a PSID of "O" or not broadcast a PSID at all. PSID match
PSID将由系统话务员分配到特定专用系统。将同-PSID分配到不同SID区域中的同一专用网络是话务员的责任。A PSID will be assigned by the system operator to a specific private system. It is the operator's responsibility to assign a same-PSID to the same private network in a different SID zone.
PSID范围的一部分保留全国通用。这些分配仅被用于在由不同话务员处理的一个特定专用网的情况下。Part of the PSID range is reserved for national use. These assignments are only used in the case of a specific private network handled by different operators.
如果PSID是在全国范围内,该移动站可不必检查用于匹配的SOC组合,并且能够使用正确的PDID和国家代码。这应是这种情况,即多个运算符用于给出一个专用系统的全国有效范围。If the PSID is nationwide, the mobile station may not have to check for a matching SOC combination and can use the correct PDID and country code. This should be the case where multiple operators are used to give a nationwide coverage of a dedicated system.
PSID、国家代码和SOC组合可被移动站使用而校验对BMI的全面存取。The PSID, country code and SOC combination can be used by the mobile station to verify full access to the BMI.
通过扩展或增强现有记录/验证的过程,BMI可随意地校验一个特定的移动站已接入到一个特定的网络。
多于一个专用系统服务的基站可以广播正在服务的每个专用系统的PSID。正被广播的PSID的号码被PSID字段的号码识别。
为了使MS捕获由专用系统运算符或专用卖主的基站提供的业务,SOC和BSMC可以被MS校验。The SOC and BSMC may be verified by the MS in order for the MS to acquire services provided by a private system operator or a private vendor's base station.
SOC也可被移动站使用去唯一地识别一个本地专用系统。一个SMS消息传送的例子(BMI/E MS)范围 这个例子仅为了说明起见才提供的。它提供一个终结SMS的MS而没有用户确认的简单例子。一个63个八位位组字符的消息传送SOC can also be used by mobile stations to uniquely identify a local private system. An Example of SMS Messaging (BMI/EMS) Scope This example is provided for illustration purposes only. It provides a simple example of MS terminating SMS without user acknowledgment. A 63-octet character message transfer
设被发送到MS的正文信息如下:“Votre rendez-Vous de cet apres-midi est Cancelle!!.Solut,Eric”这条消息长63个字符。由信息中心发送的SMS应用层SMSDELIVER消息将如下:SMS DELIVER消息格式的例子
因此,77八位位组层3消息通过空中接口将被传送到MS。初始发送器正文信息是63个八位位组,并且加上7个八位位组以识别始发者(共70个八位位组)。因此,8个八位位组作为附加的出现:1个八位位组用于R-DATA消息类型。1个八位位组用于R-事务识别符。2个八位位组附加在R-Data单元(1个用于长度指示符,1个用于较高层协议积别符。2个八位位组在SMS传送消息的头部。2个八位位组在用户数据单元IE(长度指示符和编码识别符)的头部。Thus, a 77-
假设MS已接收和接受R-DATA消息。MS将层3 R-DATAACCEPT消息返回到BMI。这个消息是两个八位位组长(1个用于层3消息类型,1个用于R-事务识别符)。It is assumed that the MS has received and accepted the R-DATA message. The MS returns a Layer 3 R-DATAACCEPT message to the BMI. This message is two octets long (1 for the
这个层3确认将被BMI用于将SMS终端确认提供到消息中心。This
上述描述一般已涉及,例如,移动站和基站的通讯,没有描述这些站部本身。因此,下面描述用于提供一个根据图38的这种移动站和基站的例子。The above description has generally referred to, for example, communications between mobile stations and base stations, without describing the stations themselves. Therefore, the following description provides an example of such a mobile station and base station according to FIG. 38 .
图38表示能使用上述设备的本发明的一个实施例的典型蜂窝式移动无线电话的方框图。该系统表示一个典型的基站110和移动站120,上面描述的在基站与移动站之间的消息信令能使用这些或其它的设备执行。该基站包括一个控制和处理单元130,单元130接到MSC140,依次连接到公共交换电话网(未示出)。Figure 38 shows a block diagram of a typical cellular mobile radiotelephone capable of using an embodiment of the present invention with the apparatus described above. The system represents a
一个网孔的基站110包括由话音信道收发信机150处理的多个话音信道,话音信道收发信机150受控制和处理单元130控制。每个基站还包括一个控制信道收发信机160,它可以处理多于一个控制信道,控制信道收发信机160受控制和处理单元130控制。控制信道收发信机160通过基站的控制信道或锁到该控制信道的移动站的网孔,广播控制信息。话音信道是收发信机广播话务或话音信道,如前所述,话音信道可包括数字控制信道位置信息。The
当移动站120首先进入空闲模式,它周期地扫描类似基站110的基站的控制信道,以确定哪个网孔锁定或驻留。移动站120接收在其话音和控制信道收发信机170的控制信道上广播的绝对和相对的信息。然后,处理单元180估算接收的控制信道信息,该信息包括候选网孔的特性和确定移动站应锁到哪个网络。该所接收的控制信道信息不仅包括关于与它连接的网孔的绝对信息,而且也包括关于与控制信道联结的网孔邻近的其它网络的相对信息。这些邻近网孔周期性地被扫描,监视主控制信道以确定是否有更适当的选择物。When
上述的详细描述仅表明了本发明的某些特定的实施例。然而,本领域的普通技术人员可以进行各种修改和变化,但都不脱离这里所讨论和说明的本发明的精神和范围。因此,应清楚地了解:这里描述的本发明的形式仅是典型的例子,而不应受此限制,总之,本发明的范围是按所附权利要求而确定的。The foregoing detailed description is indicative of only certain specific embodiments of the invention. However, various modifications and changes can be made by those skilled in the art without departing from the spirit and scope of the inventions discussed and illustrated herein. Therefore, it should be clearly understood that the forms of the invention described herein are typical examples only and should not be limited thereto, and the scope of the invention should be determined in accordance with the appended claims.
Claims (10)
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US08/147,254 US5603081A (en) | 1993-11-01 | 1993-11-01 | Method for communicating in a wireless communication system |
US147,254 | 1993-11-01 | ||
US147254 | 1993-11-01 |
Related Child Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
CN01116629A Division CN1350403A (en) | 1993-11-01 | 2001-04-12 | Communication method in wireless communication system |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
CN1112345A CN1112345A (en) | 1995-11-22 |
CN1073328C true CN1073328C (en) | 2001-10-17 |
Family
ID=22520857
Family Applications (6)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
CN94118667A Expired - Fee Related CN1073328C (en) | 1993-11-01 | 1994-11-01 | Method for communicating in a wireless communication system |
CN94191071A Expired - Fee Related CN1078986C (en) | 1993-11-01 | 1994-11-01 | Positioning method and device for digital control channel in wireless communication system |
CN01116629A Pending CN1350403A (en) | 1993-11-01 | 2001-04-12 | Communication method in wireless communication system |
CN01121715A Pending CN1406085A (en) | 1993-11-01 | 2001-06-29 | Positioning method of digit control channel in wire-less communication system and apparatus thereof |
CN01121598A Pending CN1392689A (en) | 1993-11-01 | 2001-06-29 | Positioning method and device of digital control channel in radio communication system |
CN01121712A Pending CN1423489A (en) | 1993-11-01 | 2001-06-29 | Positioning method and apparatus of digital control channel in radio communication system |
Family Applications After (5)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
CN94191071A Expired - Fee Related CN1078986C (en) | 1993-11-01 | 1994-11-01 | Positioning method and device for digital control channel in wireless communication system |
CN01116629A Pending CN1350403A (en) | 1993-11-01 | 2001-04-12 | Communication method in wireless communication system |
CN01121715A Pending CN1406085A (en) | 1993-11-01 | 2001-06-29 | Positioning method of digit control channel in wire-less communication system and apparatus thereof |
CN01121598A Pending CN1392689A (en) | 1993-11-01 | 2001-06-29 | Positioning method and device of digital control channel in radio communication system |
CN01121712A Pending CN1423489A (en) | 1993-11-01 | 2001-06-29 | Positioning method and apparatus of digital control channel in radio communication system |
Country Status (16)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (11) | US5603081A (en) |
EP (3) | EP0652680A3 (en) |
JP (2) | JPH08508630A (en) |
KR (8) | KR100353787B1 (en) |
CN (6) | CN1073328C (en) |
AU (2) | AU690924B2 (en) |
BR (2) | BR9405703A (en) |
CA (2) | CA2134695C (en) |
FI (2) | FI953262A7 (en) |
MX (1) | MXPA94008462A (en) |
MY (7) | MY131841A (en) |
NZ (2) | NZ264605A (en) |
SE (1) | SE9403725L (en) |
SG (3) | SG71009A1 (en) |
TW (6) | TW250614B (en) |
WO (2) | WO1995012930A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (670)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US6714983B1 (en) | 1989-04-14 | 2004-03-30 | Broadcom Corporation | Modular, portable data processing terminal for use in a communication network |
US6431451B1 (en) * | 1991-02-25 | 2002-08-13 | Intermec Ip Corp. | Hand-held data capture system with interchangeable modules |
US5768276A (en) * | 1992-10-05 | 1998-06-16 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson | Digital control channels having logical channels supporting broadcast SMS |
JP2838465B2 (en) * | 1993-03-26 | 1998-12-16 | 松下電器産業株式会社 | Communication control method for microcellular system |
US7924783B1 (en) * | 1994-05-06 | 2011-04-12 | Broadcom Corporation | Hierarchical communications system |
US8509260B2 (en) * | 1993-08-31 | 2013-08-13 | Broadcom Corporation | Modular, portable data processing terminal for use in a communication network |
US5722078A (en) * | 1993-11-01 | 1998-02-24 | Ericsson Inc. | Method and apparatus for locating a digital control channel in a downbanded cellular radiocommunication system |
US6301242B1 (en) * | 1998-07-24 | 2001-10-09 | Xircom Wireless, Inc. | Communication system with fast control traffic |
US5960344A (en) | 1993-12-20 | 1999-09-28 | Norand Corporation | Local area network having multiple channel wireless access |
DE4402903A1 (en) * | 1994-02-02 | 1995-08-03 | Deutsche Telekom Mobil | Method for packet-wise data transmission in a mobile radio network |
FI96468C (en) * | 1994-05-11 | 1996-06-25 | Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd | Controlling the handover of a mobile radio station and adjusting the transmission power in the radio communication system |
JP3450436B2 (en) * | 1994-05-30 | 2003-09-22 | キヤノン株式会社 | Facsimile machine |
US5542115A (en) * | 1994-06-24 | 1996-07-30 | Pioneer Tech Development Limited | Paging method and apparatus |
US5689503A (en) * | 1994-07-15 | 1997-11-18 | Ntt Mobile Communications Network Inc. | Random access system of a mobile communication system |
US6775531B1 (en) * | 1994-07-21 | 2004-08-10 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Subscriber terminal temperature regulation |
GB2292286B (en) * | 1994-08-06 | 1998-09-09 | Motorola Inc | Radio communications device and method |
US5953370A (en) * | 1994-09-09 | 1999-09-14 | Omnipoint Corporation | Apparatus for receiving and correlating a spread spectrum signal |
US5594776A (en) * | 1994-09-14 | 1997-01-14 | Ericsson Inc. | Efficient paging system |
GB9418750D0 (en) * | 1994-09-16 | 1994-11-02 | Ionica L3 Limited | Digital telephony |
US6334219B1 (en) * | 1994-09-26 | 2001-12-25 | Adc Telecommunications Inc. | Channel selection for a hybrid fiber coax network |
GB2294181A (en) * | 1994-10-04 | 1996-04-17 | Motorola Ltd | Handover in a multilayer cellular radio system |
US7280564B1 (en) | 1995-02-06 | 2007-10-09 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Synchronization techniques in multipoint-to-point communication using orthgonal frequency division multiplexing |
USRE42236E1 (en) | 1995-02-06 | 2011-03-22 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Multiuse subcarriers in multipoint-to-point communication using orthogonal frequency division multiplexing |
FI98675B (en) * | 1995-02-17 | 1997-04-15 | Nokia Telecommunications Oy | Allocation of time intervals in a mobile communication system |
AU5412396A (en) | 1995-04-19 | 1996-11-07 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Multiple hyperband cellular communications system and mobile station with band selection |
US6577848B1 (en) * | 1995-05-30 | 2003-06-10 | Motorola, Inc. | Dispatch system and method of assigning a shared channel to remote units |
WO1996038989A1 (en) * | 1995-05-31 | 1996-12-05 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Local control enhancement in a telecommunications system |
US5819184A (en) * | 1995-06-07 | 1998-10-06 | Pacific Communication Sciences, Inc. | Portable communications and data terminal operating to optimize receipt of both incoming CDPD and AMPS messages |
US6334062B1 (en) * | 1995-06-07 | 2001-12-25 | Cirrus Logic, Inc. | Portable communications and data terminal operating to optimize receipt of both incoming CDPD and AMPS messages |
KR0142497B1 (en) * | 1995-06-23 | 1998-08-01 | 양승택 | Pilot channel |
US5841768A (en) | 1996-06-27 | 1998-11-24 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Method of controlling initial power ramp-up in CDMA systems by using short codes |
ZA965340B (en) | 1995-06-30 | 1997-01-27 | Interdigital Tech Corp | Code division multiple access (cdma) communication system |
US5604921A (en) * | 1995-07-07 | 1997-02-18 | Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd. | Radiotelephone user interface for broadcast short message service |
US5663957A (en) * | 1995-07-12 | 1997-09-02 | Ericsson Inc. | Dual mode satellite/cellular terminal |
US5677918A (en) * | 1995-07-28 | 1997-10-14 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and device for efficient error correction in a packet-switched communication system |
SE515752C2 (en) * | 1995-08-28 | 2001-10-08 | Telia Ab | Direct access in OFDM system |
WO1997008862A1 (en) * | 1995-08-31 | 1997-03-06 | Nokia Telecommunications Oy | A data transmission method, and a cellular radio system |
US6058289A (en) * | 1995-09-26 | 2000-05-02 | Pacific Communication Sciences, Inc. | Method and apparatus for low power mobile unit for cellular communications system |
US6577618B2 (en) | 1995-10-18 | 2003-06-10 | Telefonaktiebolaget L.M. Ericsson (Publ) | Packet control channel feedback support for contention and reservation based access |
AU741011B2 (en) * | 1995-10-18 | 2001-11-22 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Simplifying decoding of codewords in a wireless communication system |
US5903552A (en) * | 1995-10-18 | 1999-05-11 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson | Discriminating between channels in wireless communication systems |
WO1997015163A1 (en) * | 1995-10-18 | 1997-04-24 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson | An enhanced channel allocation process |
US6018661A (en) * | 1995-10-18 | 2000-01-25 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson | Inhibiting and controlling signal strength measurements by a mobile station in a wireless communication system |
US6091960A (en) * | 1995-10-18 | 2000-07-18 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson | Method for paging mobile stations |
US5729531A (en) * | 1995-10-18 | 1998-03-17 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson | Bandwidth allocation |
US5751731A (en) * | 1995-10-18 | 1998-05-12 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson | Simplifying decoding of codewords in a wireless communication system |
US5910949A (en) * | 1995-10-18 | 1999-06-08 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson | Packet channel feedback |
US6046990A (en) * | 1995-11-15 | 2000-04-04 | Ericsson, Inc. | High-penetration transmission method for a radiocommunication system |
EP0778715B1 (en) * | 1995-12-04 | 2002-04-10 | Nokia Corporation | System for transferring information from a base station to a portable phone |
US7590083B2 (en) | 1995-12-07 | 2009-09-15 | Transcore Link Logistics Corp. | Wireless packet data distributed communications system |
US7457613B1 (en) * | 1995-12-12 | 2008-11-25 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Method and apparatus for indicating to a wireless network the operational mode of a wireless communicator |
JP3160516B2 (en) * | 1995-12-13 | 2001-04-25 | 松下電器産業株式会社 | Data receiving device |
US6108530A (en) | 1995-12-14 | 2000-08-22 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | System and method for transmitting a displayable message between short message entities in more than one data package |
FI101670B1 (en) * | 1995-12-15 | 1998-07-31 | Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd | A method for communicating concealment of data transfer between a mobile station network and a mobile station |
US6414945B1 (en) * | 1995-12-27 | 2002-07-02 | Ericsson Inc. | High power short message service using TDMA frames and/or broadcast control channel |
US5822310A (en) * | 1995-12-27 | 1998-10-13 | Ericsson Inc. | High power short message service using broadcast control channel |
US6314081B1 (en) | 1996-01-18 | 2001-11-06 | Ericsson Inc. | High power short message service using dedicated carrier frequency |
US5873035A (en) * | 1996-01-30 | 1999-02-16 | Motorola, Inc. | Conducting handoff of a data transmission |
DE19605223A1 (en) * | 1996-02-13 | 1997-08-14 | Sel Alcatel Ag | Method for operating a broadband connection between a mobile radio terminal and a network-side mobile radio device and a mobile radio terminal, network-side mobile radio device and mobile radio system |
US6205132B1 (en) * | 1996-02-22 | 2001-03-20 | Korea Mobile Telecommunications Corp. | Method for accessing a cell using two pilot channels in a CDMA communication system of an asynchronous or quasi-synchronous mode |
FI961075L (en) * | 1996-03-07 | 1997-09-08 | Nokia Telecommunications Oy | Method for changing communication settings of a subscriber device of a radio system |
US5930710A (en) * | 1996-03-07 | 1999-07-27 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson | Control/pilot channel reselection between cells belonging to different registration areas |
US5963869A (en) * | 1996-03-14 | 1999-10-05 | Ericsson Inc. | Method and apparatus for management of analog and digital control channels |
US6185198B1 (en) * | 1996-03-20 | 2001-02-06 | Aeris Communications, Inc. | Time division multiple access downlink personal communications system voice and data debit billing method |
FI100441B (en) * | 1996-04-09 | 1997-11-28 | Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd | Menu light formatting of short messages |
US5729539A (en) * | 1996-05-03 | 1998-03-17 | Motorola, Inc. | Method of scheduling signal quality measurements in a TDMA communication system |
FI103082B1 (en) * | 1996-05-27 | 1999-04-15 | Nokia Telecommunications Oy | Connection set up procedure and radio system |
US6678311B2 (en) | 1996-05-28 | 2004-01-13 | Qualcomm Incorporated | High data CDMA wireless communication system using variable sized channel codes |
US6697415B1 (en) | 1996-06-03 | 2004-02-24 | Broadcom Corporation | Spread spectrum transceiver module utilizing multiple mode transmission |
FI101920B1 (en) * | 1996-06-07 | 1998-09-15 | Nokia Telecommunications Oy | Channel reservation procedure for a packet network |
US5828662A (en) * | 1996-06-19 | 1998-10-27 | Northern Telecom Limited | Medium access control scheme for data transmission on code division multiple access (CDMA) wireless systems |
JP3173565B2 (en) * | 1996-06-20 | 2001-06-04 | 日本電気株式会社 | Access control device in CDMA system |
US6493561B1 (en) | 1996-06-24 | 2002-12-10 | Fujitsu Limited | Mobile communication system enabling efficient use of small-zone base stations |
US6039624A (en) * | 1996-07-29 | 2000-03-21 | At&T Wireless Services Inc. | Method for allocating a mobile station TMSI |
US5909651A (en) * | 1996-08-02 | 1999-06-01 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Broadcast short message service architecture |
US6073035A (en) * | 1996-08-09 | 2000-06-06 | Oki Telecom, Inc. | System unavailablity power reduction method with early failure and no rotation |
US6108349A (en) * | 1996-08-22 | 2000-08-22 | Tellabs Operations, Inc. | Method and apparatus for registering remote service units in a multipoint communication system |
US6771590B1 (en) | 1996-08-22 | 2004-08-03 | Tellabs Operations, Inc. | Communication system clock synchronization techniques |
US6118758A (en) * | 1996-08-22 | 2000-09-12 | Tellabs Operations, Inc. | Multi-point OFDM/DMT digital communications system including remote service unit with improved transmitter architecture |
US5790514A (en) * | 1996-08-22 | 1998-08-04 | Tellabs Operations, Inc. | Multi-point OFDM/DMT digital communications system including remote service unit with improved receiver architecture |
US6950388B2 (en) * | 1996-08-22 | 2005-09-27 | Tellabs Operations, Inc. | Apparatus and method for symbol alignment in a multi-point OFDM/DMT digital communications system |
JPH1066137A (en) * | 1996-08-23 | 1998-03-06 | Sony Corp | Communication method and communication system |
US5790951A (en) * | 1996-09-03 | 1998-08-04 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and apparatus for receiving ring alert and paging data in an interference environment |
US5752166A (en) * | 1996-09-04 | 1998-05-12 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and apparatus for controlling how a receiver responds to a message |
US6522877B1 (en) * | 1996-09-06 | 2003-02-18 | Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd. | Methods and apparatus for providing an interactive cell broadcast service |
JP3215053B2 (en) | 1996-09-11 | 2001-10-02 | 富士通株式会社 | Mobile communication device |
DE19638814A1 (en) * | 1996-09-20 | 1998-03-26 | Bosch Gmbh Robert | Method for the wireless transmission of digital data |
US5924032A (en) * | 1996-09-24 | 1999-07-13 | Nokia Mobile Phones Limited | Mobile telephone having an improved probability of receiving an incoming call |
US5982761A (en) | 1996-09-30 | 1999-11-09 | Amsc Subsidiary Corporation | Methods of communicating over time-division multiple-access (TDMA) communication systems with distinct non-time-critical and time-critical network management information transmission rates |
US6061568A (en) * | 1996-10-01 | 2000-05-09 | Ericsson Inc. | Method and apparatus for mitigating intermodulation effects in multiple-signal transmission systems |
GB9621328D0 (en) * | 1996-10-12 | 1996-11-27 | Northern Telecom Ltd | An adaptive radio communications system |
US5987019A (en) * | 1996-10-15 | 1999-11-16 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson | Multi-rate radiocommunication systems and terminals |
KR100226660B1 (en) * | 1996-11-13 | 1999-10-15 | 서평원 | Method for controlling multiple access in wireless data communication network |
US6163704A (en) * | 1996-11-15 | 2000-12-19 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Delivery of subscriber digital data messages in a dual mode cellular telephone network |
WO1998023047A1 (en) * | 1996-11-18 | 1998-05-28 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Method for reducing interference within signaling data over an air interface |
US5995501A (en) * | 1996-12-20 | 1999-11-30 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Method for reducing interference within signaling data over an air interface |
US6606309B1 (en) * | 1996-11-19 | 2003-08-12 | Ericsson Inc. | Time-multiplexed short message acknowledgement systems and methods |
US5864764A (en) * | 1996-11-25 | 1999-01-26 | Motorola, Inc. | Infrastructure transceiver and method for configuration based on location information |
US6031832A (en) * | 1996-11-27 | 2000-02-29 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Method and apparatus for improving performance of a packet communications system |
US7035232B1 (en) | 1996-12-03 | 2006-04-25 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Spread-spectrum communication method and apparatus |
JP3305217B2 (en) | 1996-12-03 | 2002-07-22 | キヤノン株式会社 | Communication method |
WO1998026567A1 (en) * | 1996-12-09 | 1998-06-18 | Motorola Inc. | System controlled asymmetrical automatic repeat request protocol method |
FR2757340B1 (en) * | 1996-12-12 | 1999-01-08 | Alsthom Cge Alcatel | SYSTEM FOR BROADCASTING MESSAGES FROM A MOBILE RADIO COMMUNICATION TERMINAL |
DE69619713T2 (en) * | 1996-12-18 | 2002-09-05 | Nokia Corp., Espoo | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETERMINING THE DAMPING BETWEEN A BASE TRANSMISSION STATION AND A MOBILE STATION IN A MOBILE RADIO NETWORK |
US6023477A (en) * | 1996-12-18 | 2000-02-08 | Ericsson Inc. | System and method of time and frequency synchronization in a radiocommunication system |
US5995834A (en) | 1996-12-24 | 1999-11-30 | At&T Wireless Services, Inc. | Method for controlling channel re-selection from a selected control channel to an alternative control channel |
JP3284177B2 (en) * | 1996-12-25 | 2002-05-20 | シャープ株式会社 | Data transmission method |
US5953665A (en) * | 1996-12-26 | 1999-09-14 | Nokia Mobile Phones Limited | Method and apparatus for digital control channel (DCCH) scanning and selection in a cellular telecommunications network |
US6026298A (en) | 1997-01-11 | 2000-02-15 | Compaq Computer Corporation | Method and apparatus for providing switch capability mediation in a mobile telephone system |
US6085083A (en) * | 1997-01-11 | 2000-07-04 | Tandem Computers, Inc. | Method and apparatus for providing fraud protection mediation in a mobile telephone system |
WO1998031161A2 (en) | 1997-01-11 | 1998-07-16 | Tandem Computers, Incorporated | Method and apparatus for automated a-key updates in a mobile telephone system |
WO1998031164A2 (en) | 1997-01-11 | 1998-07-16 | Tandem Computers, Incorporated | Method and apparatus for configuration of authentication center operations allowed by system access type in a mobile telephone system |
JPH10200937A (en) * | 1997-01-16 | 1998-07-31 | Nec Corp | Method for monitoring adjacent cell and mobile communication system of time division digital system |
US6081705A (en) * | 1997-02-06 | 2000-06-27 | Telefonaktiebolaget L/M Ericsson (Publ) | Cellular telephone network support of international mobile station identity (IMSI) |
US6101392A (en) * | 1997-02-17 | 2000-08-08 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson | Reverse communication of mobile station calling service capabilities |
US5878038A (en) * | 1997-02-28 | 1999-03-02 | Motorola, Inc. | Method in a wireless code division multiple access communication system for delivering a message to a mobile communication unit |
FI104780B (en) * | 1997-02-28 | 2000-03-31 | Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd | Cell prioritization in a cellular radio system |
US6334052B1 (en) * | 1997-03-07 | 2001-12-25 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Subscription-based mobile station idle mode cell selection |
FR2761556B1 (en) * | 1997-03-28 | 1999-04-30 | Alsthom Cge Alcatel | TDMA TRANSMISSION METHOD ON A PLURALITY OF CARRIER FREQUENCIES, CORRESPONDING SIGNAL AND RECEIVER |
CN1510945A (en) * | 1997-04-17 | 2004-07-07 | NTT�ƶ�ͨ������ʽ���� | Base station device in mobile communication system |
US6115596A (en) * | 1997-04-22 | 2000-09-05 | Ericsson Inc. | Systems and methods for handling emergency calls in hierarchical cell structures |
US5920814A (en) * | 1997-04-30 | 1999-07-06 | Telefonaktiebolaget | System and method of managing temporary mobile station identity (TMSI) parameters in a radio telecommunications network |
IL120789A (en) * | 1997-05-06 | 2001-03-19 | Dspc Tech Ltd | Superframe phase field validator |
FI107982B (en) * | 1997-05-06 | 2001-10-31 | Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd | Cell selection due to use profile in a cellular radio system |
US6072990A (en) * | 1997-05-08 | 2000-06-06 | Lucent Technologies, Inc. | Transmitter-receiver pair for wireless network power-code operating point is determined based on error rate |
US6052593A (en) * | 1997-05-08 | 2000-04-18 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson | Method for frequency mode validation for, frequency assignment for, and evaluating the network effect of a frequency plan revision within a dual mode cellular telephone system |
US6009122A (en) * | 1997-05-12 | 1999-12-28 | Amati Communciations Corporation | Method and apparatus for superframe bit allocation |
AU7376898A (en) | 1997-05-12 | 1998-12-08 | Amati Communications Corporation | Method and apparatus for superframe bit allocation |
US5940760A (en) * | 1997-05-16 | 1999-08-17 | Nokia Mobile Phones Limited | Method and apparatus to reduce non-public mode search time in a mobile station |
DE19722219A1 (en) * | 1997-05-28 | 1998-12-03 | Alsthom Cge Alcatel | Radio communication system with a fixed and a movable radio device |
DK0985325T3 (en) * | 1997-05-30 | 2007-09-03 | Qualcomm Inc | Method and apparatus for paging a wireless terminal in a wireless telecommunication system |
US5867510A (en) * | 1997-05-30 | 1999-02-02 | Motorola, Inc. | Method of and apparatus for decoding and processing messages |
US6631274B1 (en) * | 1997-05-31 | 2003-10-07 | Intel Corporation | Mechanism for better utilization of traffic channel capacity in GSM system |
US5903839A (en) * | 1997-06-02 | 1999-05-11 | Nokia Mobile Phones Limited | Method and apparatus to provide manual reselection on a digital control channel |
US6075779A (en) * | 1997-06-09 | 2000-06-13 | Lucent Technologies, Inc. | Random access channel congestion control for broadcast teleservice acknowledgment messages |
FR2764468A1 (en) * | 1997-06-10 | 1998-12-11 | Philips Electronics Nv | WIRELESS TELEPHONE DEVICE |
US6101465A (en) * | 1997-06-12 | 2000-08-08 | Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. | System and method for bit interleaving of full-rate speech data |
SE9702271D0 (en) * | 1997-06-13 | 1997-06-13 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | Reuse of physical control channel in a distributed cellular radio communication system |
US6542481B2 (en) | 1998-06-01 | 2003-04-01 | Tantivy Communications, Inc. | Dynamic bandwidth allocation for multiple access communication using session queues |
US6081536A (en) * | 1997-06-20 | 2000-06-27 | Tantivy Communications, Inc. | Dynamic bandwidth allocation to transmit a wireless protocol across a code division multiple access (CDMA) radio link |
US6151332A (en) | 1997-06-20 | 2000-11-21 | Tantivy Communications, Inc. | Protocol conversion and bandwidth reduction technique providing multiple nB+D ISDN basic rate interface links over a wireless code division multiple access communication system |
US6064692A (en) | 1997-06-20 | 2000-05-16 | Amati Communications Corporation | Protocol for transceiver initialization |
US5991330A (en) * | 1997-06-27 | 1999-11-23 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Pub1) | Mobile Station synchronization within a spread spectrum communication systems |
US6097939A (en) * | 1997-07-11 | 2000-08-01 | Compaq Computer Corporation | Method and apparatus for event data maintenance per MIN/ESN pair in a mobile telephone system |
US5982757A (en) * | 1997-07-14 | 1999-11-09 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and apparatus for registering a remote unit in a communication system |
JP2914444B2 (en) * | 1997-07-22 | 1999-06-28 | 日本電気株式会社 | CDMA transceiver |
DE69839790D1 (en) * | 1997-07-29 | 2008-09-11 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | Telephone device with a base station and at least one mobile station and method for transmitting messages |
US6052580A (en) * | 1997-07-31 | 2000-04-18 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Upper medium access control processor architecture |
US6725068B2 (en) | 1997-08-05 | 2004-04-20 | Tokyo Digital Phone Co., Ltd. | Digital wireless telephone system |
US6134231A (en) * | 1997-08-08 | 2000-10-17 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Uplink channel puncturing for reduced interference within a wireless data communications network |
US6282419B1 (en) * | 1997-08-20 | 2001-08-28 | Ericsson Inc | Apparatus and method for mobile terminal rescans during roaming |
US6078570A (en) * | 1997-08-21 | 2000-06-20 | Nokia Mobile Phones Limited | Mobile assisted hard hand-off for a code division multiple access (CDMA) system |
US6163694A (en) * | 1997-08-22 | 2000-12-19 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Method and apparatus for standby state cell selection in a cellular telephone system |
AU8895498A (en) * | 1997-08-26 | 1999-03-16 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Wireless communications systems and methods utilizing group frame acknowledgment |
US5909469A (en) * | 1997-08-29 | 1999-06-01 | Telefonaktoebolaget Lm Ericsson | Link adaptation method for links using modulation schemes that have different symbol rates |
US5930366A (en) * | 1997-08-29 | 1999-07-27 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson | Synchronization to a base station and code acquisition within a spread spectrum communication system |
US6052562A (en) * | 1997-08-29 | 2000-04-18 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and apparatus for coordinating an operating channel selection |
KR100446515B1 (en) * | 1997-09-13 | 2004-11-12 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Connection method of wireless communication system |
US6377809B1 (en) | 1997-09-16 | 2002-04-23 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Channel structure for communication systems |
US6557134B2 (en) * | 1997-09-30 | 2003-04-29 | Glenayre Electronics, Inc. | ARQ method for wireless communication |
US5903851A (en) * | 1997-10-03 | 1999-05-11 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson | Radio link short hold mode for mobile circuit data applications |
US6011801A (en) * | 1997-10-09 | 2000-01-04 | Timeplex, Inc. | Rate control of channels on a time division multiplex bus |
CA2218321C (en) * | 1997-10-10 | 2003-01-28 | Chandra Sekhar Bontu | Detection of access bursts in tdma communications sytems |
KR100256693B1 (en) * | 1997-10-13 | 2000-05-15 | 정선종 | Method of sharing the associated control channel of mobile station on the mobile communication system |
US6038223A (en) * | 1997-10-22 | 2000-03-14 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Access scheme for packet data in a digital cellular communication system |
US6075981A (en) * | 1997-10-29 | 2000-06-13 | Ericsson, Inc. | Method for responding to DCCH pointers |
US6044069A (en) * | 1997-10-29 | 2000-03-28 | Conexant Systems, Inc. | Power management system for a mobile station |
US6101175A (en) * | 1997-10-31 | 2000-08-08 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and apparatus for handoff within a communication system |
US6137772A (en) * | 1997-11-14 | 2000-10-24 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Method of updating a list of digital control channels (DCCH) in a mobile station in a radio telecommunications network |
FI104769B (en) | 1997-12-01 | 2000-03-31 | Nokia Networks Oy | Method and apparatus for identifying a logical channel |
US6493552B1 (en) * | 1997-12-04 | 2002-12-10 | Ericsson Inc. | Method for recovering service after registration failure in a cellular system |
US20040160910A1 (en) * | 1997-12-17 | 2004-08-19 | Tantivy Communications, Inc. | Dynamic bandwidth allocation to transmit a wireless protocol across a code division multiple access (CDMA) radio link |
FI105985B (en) * | 1997-12-18 | 2000-10-31 | Nokia Networks Oy | Method for identifying the protocol data unit in an air interface network layer in a cellular radio network |
KR100300846B1 (en) * | 1997-12-30 | 2001-09-03 | 박종섭 | Method for processing level 2 of no.7 in mobile communication exchanger |
DE69722228T2 (en) * | 1997-12-31 | 2003-11-27 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | Transmission of channel information in a radio transmission system |
KR100236600B1 (en) * | 1997-12-31 | 2000-01-15 | 서평원 | Joint use of mobile switching centers |
FI109861B (en) * | 1998-01-05 | 2002-10-15 | Nokia Corp | Method for efficiently utilizing the general transmission capacity of a cell |
FI106831B (en) * | 1998-01-14 | 2001-04-12 | Nokia Networks Oy | Access control procedure for a mobile telephone system |
JP3270926B2 (en) * | 1998-02-02 | 2002-04-02 | 富士通株式会社 | Mobile communication system and mobile communication device |
US6400948B1 (en) * | 1998-02-19 | 2002-06-04 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation | Systems and methods for acquiring a control channel |
US6285873B1 (en) * | 1998-03-09 | 2001-09-04 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method for generating a broadcast challenge value |
BR9901010A (en) * | 1998-03-16 | 2000-01-18 | Ericsson Inc | Process for registering a mobile station in a digital radio communication system and for determining whether or not to transmit a periodic registration signal from a mobile station to a base station, and a mobile communications device. |
EP0944275B1 (en) * | 1998-03-19 | 2005-09-14 | Hitachi, Ltd. | Broadcast information delivering system |
KR100294702B1 (en) * | 1998-03-25 | 2001-07-12 | 서평원 | Method for trasporting Broadcast Message in Mobile Communication Service |
CN1196366C (en) * | 1998-03-26 | 2005-04-06 | 皇家菲利浦电子有限公司 | Communication network with improved access protocol |
US6289211B1 (en) * | 1998-03-26 | 2001-09-11 | Erksson Inc | Method for determining the position of a mobile station |
CN100352167C (en) * | 1998-03-31 | 2007-11-28 | 三星电子株式会社 | Turbo encoding/decoding device and method for processing frame data according to qos |
US7440498B2 (en) | 2002-12-17 | 2008-10-21 | Tellabs Operations, Inc. | Time domain equalization for discrete multi-tone systems |
DK1068704T3 (en) | 1998-04-03 | 2012-09-17 | Tellabs Operations Inc | Impulse response shortening filter, with additional spectral constraints, for multi-wave transfer |
US6631175B2 (en) * | 1998-04-03 | 2003-10-07 | Tellabs Operations, Inc. | Spectrally constrained impulse shortening filter for a discrete multi-tone receiver |
KR19990082885A (en) * | 1998-04-09 | 1999-11-25 | 다니엘 태그리아페리, 라이조 캐르키, 모링 헬레나 | Apparatus and method for using two-dimensional data compression over an air interface |
ATE468719T1 (en) * | 1998-04-23 | 2010-06-15 | Mitsubishi Electric Corp | RECEIVER FOR MONITORING A CONTROL CHANNEL OF ANOTHER SYSTEM DURING A SLEEP PERIOD IN A CDMA CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM |
FI107365B (en) | 1998-04-27 | 2001-07-13 | Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd | Method and arrangement for indicating transformative data processing in a telecommunications connection |
FI106331B (en) | 1998-04-30 | 2001-01-15 | Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd | Method and apparatus for controlling the use of idle frames |
US6175743B1 (en) * | 1998-05-01 | 2001-01-16 | Ericsson Inc. | System and method for delivery of short message service messages to a restricted group of subscribers |
USD419160S (en) * | 1998-05-14 | 2000-01-18 | Northrop Grumman Corporation | Personal communications unit docking station |
US6223062B1 (en) | 1998-05-15 | 2001-04-24 | Northrop Grumann Corporation | Communications interface adapter |
USD421002S (en) * | 1998-05-15 | 2000-02-22 | Northrop Grumman Corporation | Personal communications unit handset |
US6141426A (en) * | 1998-05-15 | 2000-10-31 | Northrop Grumman Corporation | Voice operated switch for use in high noise environments |
US6169730B1 (en) | 1998-05-15 | 2001-01-02 | Northrop Grumman Corporation | Wireless communications protocol |
US6243573B1 (en) | 1998-05-15 | 2001-06-05 | Northrop Grumman Corporation | Personal communications system |
US6041243A (en) * | 1998-05-15 | 2000-03-21 | Northrop Grumman Corporation | Personal communications unit |
US6304559B1 (en) | 1998-05-15 | 2001-10-16 | Northrop Grumman Corporation | Wireless communications protocol |
US6643275B1 (en) | 1998-05-15 | 2003-11-04 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Random access in a mobile telecommunications system |
US6611515B1 (en) * | 1998-05-17 | 2003-08-26 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | System and method for link and media access control layer transaction completion procedures |
US6625133B1 (en) * | 1998-05-17 | 2003-09-23 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | System and method for link and media access control layer transaction initiation procedures |
US6385460B1 (en) * | 1998-05-26 | 2002-05-07 | Conexant Systems, Inc. | Power management system for a mobile unit by reduced neighbor cell scanning |
US6381235B1 (en) | 1998-05-29 | 2002-04-30 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Wireless CDMA system having a unique forward configuration control channel |
JP3249471B2 (en) * | 1998-06-15 | 2002-01-21 | 沖電気工業株式会社 | Mobile communication method |
US6185422B1 (en) * | 1998-06-19 | 2001-02-06 | Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd | Method and apparatus for transitioning between control channels in a cellular system |
US6393273B1 (en) * | 1998-06-23 | 2002-05-21 | Ericsson Inc. | Method of and system for determining ARQ capability of a base station |
US6295450B1 (en) * | 1998-06-23 | 2001-09-25 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and apparatus for transferring communication within a communication system |
US6711709B1 (en) * | 1998-06-24 | 2004-03-23 | Unisys Corporation | Integrated block checking system for rapid file transfer of compressed data |
GB2338866B (en) * | 1998-06-26 | 2003-05-28 | Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd | Radio telephones and methods of operation |
JP3077675B2 (en) * | 1998-07-07 | 2000-08-14 | 日本電気株式会社 | Broadcasting method of mobile communication system |
US7876729B1 (en) * | 1998-07-20 | 2011-01-25 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Intersystem base station handover |
US6154651A (en) * | 1998-07-28 | 2000-11-28 | Ericsson Inc. | Periodic reexamination of DCCH pointer channel while camped on an ACC |
US6339713B1 (en) | 1998-08-11 | 2002-01-15 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson | Decreasing battery consumption of mobile terminals by decreasing monitoring of the multiple access channel downlinks |
KR100454930B1 (en) * | 1998-08-17 | 2005-01-13 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method for multiplexing physical channel in cdma communication system |
US6223047B1 (en) | 1998-08-26 | 2001-04-24 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Extended sleep mode method and apparatus |
US6411644B1 (en) * | 1998-09-29 | 2002-06-25 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Frequency hop pilot technique for a control system that reduces distortion produced by electrical circuits |
US6374103B1 (en) * | 1998-09-30 | 2002-04-16 | Lucent Technologies, Inc. | Method and system for overhead message updates |
US6418313B1 (en) * | 1998-09-30 | 2002-07-09 | Ericsson Inc. | Systems and methods for tracking of a private communication system subject to retuning |
CA2285168A1 (en) * | 1998-10-09 | 2000-04-09 | Chris Frank Howard | Channel allocation method and apparatus |
US6690652B1 (en) | 1998-10-26 | 2004-02-10 | International Business Machines Corporation | Adaptive power control in wideband CDMA cellular systems (WCDMA) and methods of operation |
US7596378B1 (en) * | 1999-09-30 | 2009-09-29 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Idle mode handling in a hybrid GSM/CDMA network |
US6327468B1 (en) * | 1998-11-10 | 2001-12-04 | Ericsson Inc. | Method and apparatus for relocating a beacon in a wireless system |
US6795425B1 (en) | 1998-11-12 | 2004-09-21 | Ericsson Inc. | Wireless communications methods and apparatus employing paging attribute descriptors |
WO2000030394A1 (en) * | 1998-11-12 | 2000-05-25 | Ericsson, Inc. | Wireless communications methods and apparatus employing paging attribute descriptors |
GB2343778B (en) * | 1998-11-13 | 2003-03-05 | Motorola Ltd | Processing received data in a distributed speech recognition process |
US6597680B1 (en) | 1998-11-16 | 2003-07-22 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Packet traffic channel reassignment |
US20020065072A1 (en) * | 1998-11-19 | 2002-05-30 | Annika Lindh | Method and apparatus for resuming re-transmission after interruption |
US6493550B1 (en) | 1998-11-20 | 2002-12-10 | Ericsson Inc. | System proximity detection by mobile stations |
US6205334B1 (en) * | 1998-11-24 | 2001-03-20 | Ericsson Inc. | Accelerated scanning of cellular channels by cellular radiotelephones |
US8151295B1 (en) | 2000-08-31 | 2012-04-03 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Queue based advertisement scheduling and sales |
US7185353B2 (en) | 2000-08-31 | 2007-02-27 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | System and method for delivering statistically scheduled advertisements |
US7653923B2 (en) | 2000-02-18 | 2010-01-26 | Prime Research Alliance E, Inc. | Scheduling and presenting IPG ads in conjunction with programming ads in a television environment |
US20020144263A1 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2002-10-03 | Eldering Charles A. | Grouping of advertisements on an advertising channel in a targeted advertisement system |
US20020083439A1 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2002-06-27 | Eldering Charles A. | System for rescheduling and inserting advertisements |
US7328448B2 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2008-02-05 | Prime Research Alliance E, Inc. | Advertisement distribution system for distributing targeted advertisements in television systems |
US8180675B2 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2012-05-15 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | System and method for automatically managing avail inventory data and avail pricing |
US7039932B2 (en) | 2000-08-31 | 2006-05-02 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Queue-based head-end advertisement scheduling method and apparatus |
US20020083445A1 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2002-06-27 | Flickinger Gregory C. | Delivering targeted advertisements to the set-top-box |
US20020083441A1 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2002-06-27 | Flickinger Gregory C. | Advertisement filtering and storage for targeted advertisement systems |
US7228555B2 (en) * | 2000-08-31 | 2007-06-05 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | System and method for delivering targeted advertisements using multiple presentation streams |
DE19856441C5 (en) * | 1998-12-08 | 2004-11-18 | Robert Bosch Gmbh | Procedure for the transmission of short messages |
DE19856440C2 (en) * | 1998-12-08 | 2002-04-04 | Bosch Gmbh Robert | Transmission frame and radio unit with transmission frame |
US6236852B1 (en) * | 1998-12-11 | 2001-05-22 | Nortel Networks Limited | Authentication failure trigger method and apparatus |
US6343368B1 (en) | 1998-12-18 | 2002-01-29 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Method and system for fast maximum a posteriori decoding |
US6463054B1 (en) | 1998-12-31 | 2002-10-08 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson | Retrieving cell information in an overlaid circuit switched and packet switched wireless telecommunication network |
US6147601A (en) * | 1999-01-09 | 2000-11-14 | Heat - Timer Corp. | Electronic message delivery system utilizable in the monitoring of remote equipment and method of same |
US6160477A (en) * | 1999-01-09 | 2000-12-12 | Heat-Timer Corp. | Electronic message delivery system utilizable in the monitoring of remote equipment and method of same |
US6211782B1 (en) | 1999-01-09 | 2001-04-03 | Heat-Timer Corporation | Electronic message delivery system utilizable in the monitoring of remote equipment and method of same |
US20040095237A1 (en) * | 1999-01-09 | 2004-05-20 | Chen Kimball C. | Electronic message delivery system utilizable in the monitoring and control of remote equipment and method of same |
US6437691B1 (en) | 1999-01-09 | 2002-08-20 | Heat-Timer Corporation | Electronic message delivery system utilizable in the monitoring of remote equipment and method of same |
US6389298B1 (en) * | 1999-01-11 | 2002-05-14 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Signaling to support wireless service redirection |
DE60023604T2 (en) * | 1999-01-13 | 2006-08-10 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | WIRELESS LOCAL NETWORK (LAN) AND METHOD OF OPERATION THEREOF |
US6498936B1 (en) | 1999-01-22 | 2002-12-24 | Ericsson Inc. | Methods and systems for coding of broadcast messages |
US6483826B1 (en) | 1999-02-19 | 2002-11-19 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Utilization of plural multiple access types for mobile telecommunications |
US6873647B1 (en) | 1999-02-26 | 2005-03-29 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and system for reducing synchronization time in a CDMA wireless communication system |
US6944146B1 (en) | 1999-03-01 | 2005-09-13 | Nortel Networks Limited | Communications of signaling in a mobile communications system with reduced interference |
WO2000052943A1 (en) * | 1999-03-01 | 2000-09-08 | Nortel Networks Limited | Locating control signals in a mobile communications system |
US6584084B1 (en) | 1999-03-01 | 2003-06-24 | Nortel Networks Ltd. | Expanded carrier capacity in a mobile communications system |
US6497599B1 (en) | 1999-03-01 | 2002-12-24 | Nortel Networks Limited | Channel reuse patterns in a mobile communications system |
US6594252B1 (en) * | 1999-03-01 | 2003-07-15 | Nortel Networks Limited | Locating control signals in a mobile communications system |
US6438375B1 (en) | 1999-03-04 | 2002-08-20 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Coordinating different types of messages sent to mobile radios in a mobile communications system |
USRE47895E1 (en) | 1999-03-08 | 2020-03-03 | Ipcom Gmbh & Co. Kg | Method of allocating access rights to a telecommunications channel to subscriber stations of a telecommunications network and subscriber station |
US6477163B1 (en) * | 1999-03-10 | 2002-11-05 | Rockwell Collins, Inc. | HF radio system with concurrent and quicker channel search capabilities |
KR100296049B1 (en) * | 1999-03-19 | 2001-07-28 | 윤종용 | User data transfering apparatus by using of short messageservice fuction in digital portable terminal and methodthereof |
US6807163B1 (en) * | 1999-04-01 | 2004-10-19 | Ericsson Inc. | Adaptive rate channel scanning method for TDMA wireless communications |
CN100490402C (en) * | 1999-04-07 | 2009-05-20 | 艾利森电话股份有限公司 | Ordering of long and short transport channels |
GB2348778A (en) * | 1999-04-08 | 2000-10-11 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | Authentication in mobile internet access |
US6330429B1 (en) * | 1999-04-14 | 2001-12-11 | Lucent Technologies, Inc. | Channel grouping system and method for a wireless communications system |
DE19919177A1 (en) * | 1999-04-28 | 2000-11-02 | Philips Corp Intellectual Pty | Network with multiple network clusters for the wireless transmission of packets |
CA2334898C (en) * | 1999-04-29 | 2007-06-05 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Apparatus and method for synchronizing channels in a w-cdma communication system |
US6947469B2 (en) | 1999-05-07 | 2005-09-20 | Intel Corporation | Method and Apparatus for wireless spread spectrum communication with preamble processing period |
US7500258B1 (en) | 1999-05-10 | 2009-03-03 | Prime Research Alliance E., Inc. | Advertisement subgroups for digital streams |
US6603755B1 (en) * | 1999-05-14 | 2003-08-05 | Ericsson Inc. | Mobile terminals, methods, and computer program products that can facilitate the selection of a communication service provider in a multiple communications mode environment |
US6577614B1 (en) * | 1999-05-27 | 2003-06-10 | Qwest Communications International Inc. | System and method for OTA over CDMA data channel |
WO2000074274A1 (en) * | 1999-05-28 | 2000-12-07 | Motorola Inc. | Method and apparatus for providing simultaneous voice and data communication in a communication system |
US6490297B1 (en) * | 1999-06-04 | 2002-12-03 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | System and method for automatic signaling channel identification |
US6452946B1 (en) | 1999-06-04 | 2002-09-17 | Siemens Information And Communications Network, Inc. | Apparatus and method for improving performance in master and slave communications systems |
US6853651B1 (en) * | 1999-06-17 | 2005-02-08 | Cingular Wireless Ii, Inc. | System and method for outbox-capable wireless transmission |
US6519469B1 (en) | 1999-07-02 | 2003-02-11 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Uplink detection of schedule mobiles for avoiding access delays |
GB9915593D0 (en) * | 1999-07-02 | 1999-09-01 | Nokia Telecommunications Oy | Data acknowledgement |
US6665307B1 (en) | 1999-07-02 | 2003-12-16 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Variable fast page mode |
RU2216107C2 (en) * | 1999-07-10 | 2003-11-10 | Самсунг Электроникс Ко., Лтд. | Method and device for assigning common-user backward channel for dedicated communications in mobile communication system |
JP3690717B2 (en) * | 1999-07-14 | 2005-08-31 | 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ | Cell search control method, mobile station, and mobile communication system |
KR100308152B1 (en) * | 1999-07-31 | 2001-09-29 | 서평원 | Cell Broadcasting method for Short Message Service |
GB9918349D0 (en) | 1999-08-05 | 1999-10-06 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | Radio communication system |
US6621808B1 (en) | 1999-08-13 | 2003-09-16 | International Business Machines Corporation | Adaptive power control based on a rake receiver configuration in wideband CDMA cellular systems (WCDMA) and methods of operation |
US6539230B2 (en) | 1999-08-19 | 2003-03-25 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Dynamic maintenance of location dependent operating parameters in a wireless terminal |
EP1081979A1 (en) | 1999-08-31 | 2001-03-07 | TELEFONAKTIEBOLAGET L M ERICSSON (publ) | Subscriber station, network control means and method for carrying out inter-frequency measurements in a mobile communication system |
US6249678B1 (en) * | 1999-09-03 | 2001-06-19 | Motorola, Inc. | Communication unit and method for performing neighbor site measurements in a communication system |
US6256486B1 (en) | 1999-09-09 | 2001-07-03 | Nortel Networks Limited | Method and apparatus for measuring co-channel interference |
US6526034B1 (en) * | 1999-09-21 | 2003-02-25 | Tantivy Communications, Inc. | Dual mode subscriber unit for short range, high rate and long range, lower rate data communications |
US6600917B1 (en) | 1999-10-04 | 2003-07-29 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Telecommunications network broadcasting of service capabilities |
US20050009528A1 (en) * | 1999-10-21 | 2005-01-13 | Mikio Iwamura | Channel identifier assigning method and mobile communications system |
JP3764612B2 (en) * | 1999-10-21 | 2006-04-12 | 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ | Channel identifier assigning method and mobile communication system |
US6516200B1 (en) * | 1999-10-28 | 2003-02-04 | Ericsson Inc. | Controlling communications terminal response to group call page based on group call characteristics |
DE19957288C1 (en) * | 1999-11-29 | 2001-05-10 | Siemens Ag | Channel structure signalling in radio communications system |
US8073477B2 (en) | 2000-04-11 | 2011-12-06 | Telecommunication Systems, Inc. | Short message distribution center |
US6611695B1 (en) * | 1999-12-20 | 2003-08-26 | Nortel Networks Limited | Method and apparatus for assigning frequency channels to a beam in a multi-beam cellular communications system |
US6480712B1 (en) * | 1999-12-21 | 2002-11-12 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | System and method for enhanced text message tracking in a wireless communication network |
EP1111862A1 (en) * | 1999-12-23 | 2001-06-27 | TELEFONAKTIEBOLAGET LM ERICSSON (publ) | Method and devices to provide a defined quality of service in a packet switched communication network |
US7739407B1 (en) * | 1999-12-29 | 2010-06-15 | Nokia Siemens Networks Oy | Systems for customizing behaviors and interfaces in service invocations |
US6654384B1 (en) * | 1999-12-30 | 2003-11-25 | Aperto Networks, Inc. | Integrated self-optimizing multi-parameter and multi-variable point to multipoint communication system |
US7024199B1 (en) | 1999-12-30 | 2006-04-04 | Motient Communications Inc. | System and method of querying a device, checking device roaming history and/or obtaining device modem statistics when device is within a home network and/or complementary network |
US7068992B1 (en) | 1999-12-30 | 2006-06-27 | Motient Communications Inc. | System and method of polling wireless devices having a substantially fixed and/or predesignated geographic location |
US7162238B1 (en) | 1999-12-30 | 2007-01-09 | Massie Rodney E | System and method of querying a device, checking device roaming history and/or obtaining device modem statistics when device is within a home network and/or a complementary network |
US7366133B1 (en) * | 1999-12-30 | 2008-04-29 | Aperto Networks, Inc. | Integrated, self-optimizing, multi-parameter/multi-variable point-to-multipoint communication system [II] |
US7230944B1 (en) | 1999-12-30 | 2007-06-12 | Geologic Solutions, Inc. | System and method of host routing when host computer is within a home network and/or a complementary network |
GB2358550A (en) * | 2000-01-18 | 2001-07-25 | Motorola Israel Ltd | Battery saving strategy in cellular systems based on a mobile assisted handover process |
JP2001231062A (en) * | 2000-02-17 | 2001-08-24 | Nec Shizuoka Ltd | Mobile phone system and its hand-over method |
US6975941B1 (en) | 2002-04-24 | 2005-12-13 | Chung Lau | Method and apparatus for intelligent acquisition of position information |
US7366522B2 (en) | 2000-02-28 | 2008-04-29 | Thomas C Douglass | Method and system for location tracking |
US7218938B1 (en) | 2002-04-24 | 2007-05-15 | Chung Lau | Methods and apparatus to analyze and present location information |
US7212829B1 (en) * | 2000-02-28 | 2007-05-01 | Chung Lau | Method and system for providing shipment tracking and notifications |
US7321774B1 (en) | 2002-04-24 | 2008-01-22 | Ipventure, Inc. | Inexpensive position sensing device |
US7905832B1 (en) | 2002-04-24 | 2011-03-15 | Ipventure, Inc. | Method and system for personalized medical monitoring and notifications therefor |
US20060072520A1 (en) * | 2000-03-23 | 2006-04-06 | Chitrapu Prabhakar R | Time synchronized standby state to the GPRS medium access control protocol with applications to mobile satellite systems |
US6529868B1 (en) * | 2000-03-28 | 2003-03-04 | Tellabs Operations, Inc. | Communication system noise cancellation power signal calculation techniques |
US7522911B2 (en) | 2000-04-11 | 2009-04-21 | Telecommunication Systems, Inc. | Wireless chat automatic status tracking |
WO2001078422A1 (en) * | 2000-04-11 | 2001-10-18 | Telecommunication Systems, Inc. | Intelligent delivery agent for short message distribution center |
US7949773B2 (en) | 2000-04-12 | 2011-05-24 | Telecommunication Systems, Inc. | Wireless internet gateway |
US6934275B1 (en) * | 2000-04-17 | 2005-08-23 | Motorola, Inc. | Apparatus and method for providing separate forward dedicated and shared control channels in a communications system |
US6891811B1 (en) | 2000-04-18 | 2005-05-10 | Telecommunication Systems Inc. | Short messaging service center mobile-originated to HTTP internet communications |
US7478403B1 (en) | 2000-04-21 | 2009-01-13 | Sun Microsystems, Inc. | Secure access to managed network objects using a configurable platform-independent gateway providing individual object-level access control |
US6958990B1 (en) * | 2000-05-05 | 2005-10-25 | Motorola, Inc. | Controlling transmit duty cycle by position of cover |
US7245594B1 (en) * | 2000-05-12 | 2007-07-17 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for fast closed-loop rate adaptation in a high rate packet data transmission |
EP1156609A1 (en) * | 2000-05-15 | 2001-11-21 | TELEFONAKTIEBOLAGET LM ERICSSON (publ) | Transmission quality measurement in a communication network |
DE20023933U1 (en) * | 2000-05-17 | 2007-09-27 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co. Ltd. | Hybrid ARQ transceiver |
DE60039546D1 (en) | 2000-05-17 | 2008-08-28 | Symstream Technology Holdings | Method and device for transmitting data communication in speech frames by means of octave pulse data coding / decoding |
WO2001091499A1 (en) * | 2000-05-22 | 2001-11-29 | Siemens Aktiengesellschaft | Modification of an access radio block in a radio communications system in accordance with the geran standard |
FR2809901B1 (en) * | 2000-06-05 | 2002-11-22 | Sekoya | METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A MESSAGE BETWEEN TWO CONNECTED COMPUTERS AND CORRESPONDING MESSAGING SYSTEMS |
KR100667739B1 (en) * | 2000-06-09 | 2007-01-12 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Wireless data transceiver and method |
AU2000252051A1 (en) * | 2000-06-09 | 2001-12-17 | Linkair Communications. Inc. | A method of channel estimation and the system employing the method |
US7065060B2 (en) | 2000-06-21 | 2006-06-20 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Apparatus and method for gating transmission of a data rate control channel in an HDR mobile communication system |
US6628953B1 (en) * | 2000-07-10 | 2003-09-30 | Motorola, Inc. | Method of forwarding channel assignments for one or more traffic channels |
SE516658C2 (en) * | 2000-07-21 | 2002-02-12 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | Procedure and Device for Enhanced Short Message Services |
US7126939B2 (en) | 2000-07-24 | 2006-10-24 | Nortel Networks Limited | Packet-based calls in a wireless network |
US6360097B1 (en) * | 2000-08-14 | 2002-03-19 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and apparatus in a wireless communication unit for controlling a rate of background scanning |
JP3596446B2 (en) * | 2000-08-29 | 2004-12-02 | 日本電気株式会社 | ATM switch |
US6856807B1 (en) * | 2000-09-07 | 2005-02-15 | Ericsson Inc. | Method to control the update frequency of a positioning device by a mobile terminal |
US7746953B1 (en) * | 2000-09-12 | 2010-06-29 | Alcatel-Lucent Usa Inc. | Method and apparatus for asynchronous incremental redundancy transmission in a communication system |
US7295509B2 (en) | 2000-09-13 | 2007-11-13 | Qualcomm, Incorporated | Signaling method in an OFDM multiple access system |
US9130810B2 (en) | 2000-09-13 | 2015-09-08 | Qualcomm Incorporated | OFDM communications methods and apparatus |
CN1128559C (en) * | 2000-09-26 | 2003-11-19 | 深圳市中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Stand-by hand set detecting and controlling method |
DE60138530D1 (en) * | 2000-10-11 | 2009-06-10 | Mitsubishi Electric Corp | METHOD OF RELEASING / PURCHASING POSITION-LINKED INFORMATION, COMMUNICATION COMPUTER SYSTEM AND MOBILE DEVICE |
US6636488B1 (en) * | 2000-10-11 | 2003-10-21 | Aperto Networks, Inc. | Automatic retransmission and error recovery for packet oriented point-to-multipoint communication |
US6804528B1 (en) * | 2000-11-03 | 2004-10-12 | Lucent Technologies, Inc. | Apparatus and method for use in the multicast of traffic data in wireless multiple access communications systems |
KR100847187B1 (en) * | 2000-11-16 | 2008-07-17 | 소니 가부시끼 가이샤 | Information processing device and communication device |
US7519654B1 (en) | 2000-11-22 | 2009-04-14 | Telecommunication Systems, Inc. | Web gateway multi-carrier support |
US20020123359A1 (en) * | 2000-12-01 | 2002-09-05 | Multiscience System Pte Limited | Network for information transfer for mobile stations |
FR2818485B1 (en) * | 2000-12-18 | 2003-03-28 | Eads Defence & Security Ntwk | RADIO RESOURCE ALLOCATION METHOD, BASE STATION FOR IMPLEMENTING SAME AND SYSTEM INCORPORATING SAME |
US6597921B2 (en) * | 2000-12-22 | 2003-07-22 | Sbc Properties, Lp | Method and system for protocol feature communication |
US7331057B2 (en) * | 2000-12-28 | 2008-02-12 | Prime Research Alliance E, Inc. | Grouping advertisement subavails |
EP1223776A1 (en) * | 2001-01-12 | 2002-07-17 | Siemens Information and Communication Networks S.p.A. | A collision free access scheduling in cellular TDMA-CDMA networks |
CN1303206A (en) * | 2001-01-16 | 2001-07-11 | 英业达集团(南京)电子技术有限公司 | Method for receiving too-long e-mail by electronic communication equipment |
US6937562B2 (en) * | 2001-02-05 | 2005-08-30 | Ipr Licensing, Inc. | Application specific traffic optimization in a wireless link |
DE60214981T2 (en) * | 2001-02-06 | 2007-05-03 | Harris Corp., Melbourne | MANAGEMENT OF BURST PROFILE PROPERTIES IN TDM SYSTEMS |
US6813478B2 (en) * | 2001-02-12 | 2004-11-02 | Qualcomm Inc | Method and apparatus for searching a gated pilot |
US7640031B2 (en) | 2006-06-22 | 2009-12-29 | Telecommunication Systems, Inc. | Mobile originated interactive menus via short messaging services |
US7088734B2 (en) * | 2001-03-27 | 2006-08-08 | Motorola, Inc. | Slot format and method for increasing random access opportunities in a wireless communication system |
US8121296B2 (en) | 2001-03-28 | 2012-02-21 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for security in a data processing system |
US7693508B2 (en) * | 2001-03-28 | 2010-04-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for broadcast signaling in a wireless communication system |
US9100457B2 (en) | 2001-03-28 | 2015-08-04 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for transmission framing in a wireless communication system |
US8077679B2 (en) | 2001-03-28 | 2011-12-13 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for providing protocol options in a wireless communication system |
US7181218B2 (en) * | 2001-04-10 | 2007-02-20 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Commanding handover between differing radio access technologies |
US6697810B2 (en) | 2001-04-19 | 2004-02-24 | Vigilance, Inc. | Security system for event monitoring, detection and notification system |
US6617969B2 (en) * | 2001-04-19 | 2003-09-09 | Vigilance, Inc. | Event notification system |
US20020157017A1 (en) * | 2001-04-19 | 2002-10-24 | Vigilance, Inc. | Event monitoring, detection and notification system having security functions |
US6697809B2 (en) | 2001-04-19 | 2004-02-24 | Vigilance, Inc. | Data retrieval and transmission system |
GB0110125D0 (en) * | 2001-04-25 | 2001-06-20 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | Radio communication system |
DE60129108T2 (en) * | 2001-05-04 | 2008-02-28 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Radio telecommunication system and method for asymmetric data transmission |
US7206840B2 (en) * | 2001-05-11 | 2007-04-17 | Koninklike Philips Electronics N.V. | Dynamic frequency selection scheme for IEEE 802.11 WLANs |
US6810236B2 (en) | 2001-05-14 | 2004-10-26 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Dynamic channel quality measurement procedure for adaptive modulation and coding techniques |
US6996082B2 (en) * | 2001-05-14 | 2006-02-07 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Method and apparatus for minimizing the amount of data necessary to signal code and timeslot assignments |
US6973064B2 (en) * | 2001-05-14 | 2005-12-06 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Method and apparatus for minimizing the amount of data necessary to signal code and timeslot assignments |
US20020188656A1 (en) * | 2001-05-15 | 2002-12-12 | Charles Patton | Combining specialized, spatially distinguished, point to point communications with other wireless networking communications to provide networking configuration in classroom-like settings |
US20030018643A1 (en) * | 2001-06-19 | 2003-01-23 | Peiwei Mi | VIGIP006 - collaborative resolution and tracking of detected events |
KR100396778B1 (en) * | 2001-06-25 | 2003-09-02 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Power controlling method for mobile communication device |
DE10132273A1 (en) * | 2001-07-04 | 2003-01-23 | Siemens Ag | Method for transmitting multicast messages in a radio system, and a correspondingly designed radio system and a correspondingly designed transmitter and receiver |
EP1283648A1 (en) * | 2001-08-07 | 2003-02-12 | Siemens Aktiengesellschaft | Method, Terminal and radiocommunications system for transmission of group messages |
US6658260B2 (en) | 2001-09-05 | 2003-12-02 | Telecommunication Systems, Inc. | Inter-carrier short messaging service providing phone number only experience |
US7352868B2 (en) | 2001-10-09 | 2008-04-01 | Philip Hawkes | Method and apparatus for security in a data processing system |
US7649829B2 (en) | 2001-10-12 | 2010-01-19 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and system for reduction of decoding complexity in a communication system |
GB0126129D0 (en) * | 2001-10-31 | 2002-01-02 | Nokia Corp | IP multimedia functionality identification |
US7477876B2 (en) * | 2001-11-02 | 2009-01-13 | Alcatel-Lucent Usa Inc. | Variable rate channel quality feedback in a wireless communication system |
US7573942B2 (en) * | 2001-11-16 | 2009-08-11 | Alcatel-Lucent Usa Inc. | Method for encoding and decoding control information in a wireless communications system |
US7426393B2 (en) * | 2001-11-19 | 2008-09-16 | Nokia Corporation | Method and system of identifying network services |
US20030099196A1 (en) * | 2001-11-23 | 2003-05-29 | Benoist Sebire | Radio bearer service for IMS services |
US6982987B2 (en) * | 2002-01-10 | 2006-01-03 | Harris Corporation | Wireless communication network including data prioritization and packet reception error determination features and related methods |
SE0200106D0 (en) * | 2002-01-14 | 2002-01-14 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | A method and arrangement for paging in a mobile telecommunication system |
US7394794B2 (en) * | 2002-01-17 | 2008-07-01 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | Traffic identifier field usage in a polling frame in a packet-based wireless network |
JP3848244B2 (en) * | 2002-02-18 | 2006-11-22 | 株式会社リコー | COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT METHOD |
US8590013B2 (en) | 2002-02-25 | 2013-11-19 | C. S. Lee Crawford | Method of managing and communicating data pertaining to software applications for processor-based devices comprising wireless communication circuitry |
US7197301B2 (en) | 2002-03-04 | 2007-03-27 | Telespree Communications | Method and apparatus for secure immediate wireless access in a telecommunications network |
US8046581B2 (en) | 2002-03-04 | 2011-10-25 | Telespree Communications | Method and apparatus for secure immediate wireless access in a telecommunications network |
US20050013996A1 (en) * | 2002-03-08 | 2005-01-20 | Hatfield Stephen F. | Hot melt pressure sensitive adhesives for disposable articles |
CA2478903A1 (en) * | 2002-03-11 | 2003-09-25 | Xtremespectrum, Inc. | Method of using sub-rate slots in an ultrawide bandwidth system |
US20030217157A1 (en) * | 2002-03-28 | 2003-11-20 | Tung Sharon W. | Method and apparatus to reduce wireless data transfer delay |
JP4002204B2 (en) * | 2002-04-09 | 2007-10-31 | 三星電子株式会社 | Control information transmission apparatus and method for multimedia broadcast / multicast service in mobile communication system |
US7023821B2 (en) * | 2002-04-12 | 2006-04-04 | Symnbol Technologies, Inc. | Voice over IP portable transreceiver |
US6715085B2 (en) * | 2002-04-18 | 2004-03-30 | International Business Machines Corporation | Initializing, maintaining, updating and recovering secure operation within an integrated system employing a data access control function |
US7089419B2 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2006-08-08 | International Business Machines Corporation | Control function with multiple security states for facilitating secure operation of an integrated system |
US6851056B2 (en) | 2002-04-18 | 2005-02-01 | International Business Machines Corporation | Control function employing a requesting master id and a data address to qualify data access within an integrated system |
US7266842B2 (en) * | 2002-04-18 | 2007-09-04 | International Business Machines Corporation | Control function implementing selective transparent data authentication within an integrated system |
CN1288872C (en) * | 2002-04-24 | 2006-12-06 | 三星电子株式会社 | Device and method for supporting automatic repeat request in high-speed wireless packet data communication system |
US9182238B2 (en) | 2002-04-24 | 2015-11-10 | Ipventure, Inc. | Method and apparatus for intelligent acquisition of position information |
US9049571B2 (en) | 2002-04-24 | 2015-06-02 | Ipventure, Inc. | Method and system for enhanced messaging |
US20030235180A1 (en) * | 2002-04-26 | 2003-12-25 | Valentin Oprescu-Surcobe | Method and apparatus for efficient channel assignment |
US20030202487A1 (en) * | 2002-04-26 | 2003-10-30 | Harris John M. | Method and apparatus for reducing call setup time |
US7876726B2 (en) * | 2002-04-29 | 2011-01-25 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | Adaptive allocation of communications link channels to I- or Q-subchannel |
US6950684B2 (en) | 2002-05-01 | 2005-09-27 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Method and system for optimizing power resources in wireless devices |
KR101007954B1 (en) | 2002-05-06 | 2011-01-14 | 인터디지탈 테크날러지 코포레이션 | Synchronization for extending battery life |
US7054630B2 (en) * | 2002-05-13 | 2006-05-30 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Selective processing of the common control channel |
KR100537499B1 (en) * | 2002-07-26 | 2005-12-19 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method of generating transmission control parameter and selective retranmission method according to the packet characteristics. |
ATE467328T1 (en) | 2002-08-01 | 2010-05-15 | Interdigital Tech Corp | METHOD FOR COORDINATING RADIO CALLING EVENTS ON A COMMON RADIO CALLING CHANNEL |
US7810380B2 (en) * | 2003-03-25 | 2010-10-12 | Tearlab Research, Inc. | Systems and methods for collecting tear film and measuring tear film osmolarity |
ES2374176T3 (en) | 2002-08-13 | 2012-02-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | ARQ SYSTEM WITH STATUS ACKNOWLEDGMENT AND PACKAGE. |
KR100827137B1 (en) * | 2002-08-16 | 2008-05-02 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method for Providing Multicast Multimedia Broadcasting Service in Mobile Communication System |
US7376126B1 (en) * | 2002-09-06 | 2008-05-20 | At&T Delaware Intellectual Property, Inc. | Systems and methods for messaging using a broadband connection |
US6879828B2 (en) * | 2002-09-09 | 2005-04-12 | Nokia Corporation | Unbroken primary connection switching between communications services |
US7503001B1 (en) * | 2002-10-28 | 2009-03-10 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Text abbreviation methods and apparatus and systems using same |
US7304971B2 (en) * | 2002-11-01 | 2007-12-04 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Flexible transmission method for wireless communications |
GB2395398B (en) * | 2002-11-07 | 2007-05-23 | Motorola Inc | A communication unit and method of communicating measurement reports therefor |
US20070165664A1 (en) * | 2002-12-10 | 2007-07-19 | Data Flow Systems, Inc. | Chime-In Protocol For Channel Access |
WO2004056138A2 (en) * | 2002-12-13 | 2004-07-01 | Research In Motion Limited | Methods and apparatus for providing consistency in sms message timestamp formatting for mobile communication devices |
KR100470401B1 (en) | 2002-12-24 | 2005-02-05 | 한국전자통신연구원 | A wireless communication system and method using grouping Maximum Lilelihood Detection |
US20040125759A1 (en) * | 2002-12-27 | 2004-07-01 | Yochem Donald M. | Method and mobile station for operating in accordance with a discontinuous transmission mode |
KR100539778B1 (en) * | 2002-12-31 | 2006-01-11 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | How to change function control parameter of mobile communication terminal |
US7599655B2 (en) | 2003-01-02 | 2009-10-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for broadcast services in a communication system |
US7522629B2 (en) * | 2003-01-16 | 2009-04-21 | Alcatel-Lucent Usa Inc. | Sending signaling messages to CDMA cellular mobile stations |
US7096024B2 (en) | 2003-01-31 | 2006-08-22 | Qualcomm, Incorporated | Method and apparatus to initiate point-to-point call during shared-channel delivery of broadcast content in a wireless telephone network |
US6965564B2 (en) * | 2003-02-14 | 2005-11-15 | America Online, Inc. | Wireless datagram transaction protocol system |
SE0300582D0 (en) * | 2003-03-04 | 2003-03-04 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | Method and system of resource management |
BRPI0408393A (en) * | 2003-03-18 | 2006-03-21 | Qualcomm Inc | authentication between a cdma network and a gsm network |
US20040192386A1 (en) * | 2003-03-26 | 2004-09-30 | Naveen Aerrabotu | Method and apparatus for multiple subscriber identities in a mobile communication device |
US7292550B2 (en) * | 2003-03-27 | 2007-11-06 | Kyocera Wireless Corp. | System and method for minimizing voice packet loss during a wireless communications device candidate frequency search (CFS) |
EP1618692A4 (en) * | 2003-04-02 | 2008-10-29 | Qualcomm Inc | Ciphering between a cdma network and a gsm network |
US7420984B2 (en) * | 2003-05-09 | 2008-09-02 | Arraycomm Llc | Method and apparatus for multi-phase wireless handshaking |
KR101022066B1 (en) * | 2003-05-17 | 2011-03-17 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Downlink Control Channel Structure in Mobile Communication System and Time-Code Allocation Method Using the Same |
DE10324470A1 (en) * | 2003-05-30 | 2005-03-10 | Deutsche Telekom Ag | Method and apparatus for controlling data connections in a data network having a plurality of data network nodes |
US7580720B2 (en) * | 2003-06-02 | 2009-08-25 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and system for protocol feature communication |
US7398550B2 (en) * | 2003-06-18 | 2008-07-08 | Microsoft Corporation | Enhanced shared secret provisioning protocol |
DE10329878B4 (en) * | 2003-07-02 | 2005-05-25 | Siemens Ag | Method for transmitting packet data in a radio telecommunication system |
US8098818B2 (en) | 2003-07-07 | 2012-01-17 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Secure registration for a multicast-broadcast-multimedia system (MBMS) |
US8718279B2 (en) | 2003-07-08 | 2014-05-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Apparatus and method for a secure broadcast system |
US7769414B2 (en) * | 2003-07-18 | 2010-08-03 | Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute | System and method for controlling power saving mode in wireless portable network system |
KR100976475B1 (en) * | 2003-08-19 | 2010-08-18 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Quality of Service (QoS) measurement report transmission method and reception method |
US8724803B2 (en) | 2003-09-02 | 2014-05-13 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for providing authenticated challenges for broadcast-multicast communications in a communication system |
US7590124B2 (en) * | 2003-09-30 | 2009-09-15 | Intel Corporation | Encapsulation technique |
DE10348255A1 (en) * | 2003-10-16 | 2005-05-12 | Bosch Gmbh Robert | Method and device for converting a first mode of a control device into a second mode via a data bus |
US7103371B1 (en) | 2003-10-22 | 2006-09-05 | Itt Manufacturing Enterprises, Inc. | Method and apparatus for dynamic voice reservation within wireless networks |
US7437135B2 (en) * | 2003-10-30 | 2008-10-14 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Joint channel equalizer interference canceller advanced receiver |
US8699508B2 (en) * | 2003-12-18 | 2014-04-15 | Intel Corporation | Response scheduling for multiple receivers |
KR100595645B1 (en) * | 2004-01-09 | 2006-07-03 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Control Information Transmission Method in Mobile Communication System |
US7400692B2 (en) * | 2004-01-14 | 2008-07-15 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Telescoping window based equalization |
US20050169261A1 (en) * | 2004-02-03 | 2005-08-04 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | Method of signaling the length of OFDM WLAN packets |
JP4682520B2 (en) * | 2004-02-25 | 2011-05-11 | ソニー株式会社 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and computer program |
KR100842579B1 (en) * | 2004-03-05 | 2008-07-01 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Handover System and Method for Minimizing Service Delay due to Ping Pong |
PL1715709T3 (en) * | 2004-03-09 | 2017-10-31 | Optis Wireless Technology Llc | Random access method and radio communication terminal device |
JP4470557B2 (en) * | 2004-03-31 | 2010-06-02 | 日本電気株式会社 | Mobile phone |
US7548758B2 (en) * | 2004-04-02 | 2009-06-16 | Nortel Networks Limited | System and method for peer-to-peer communication in cellular systems |
GB2416269A (en) * | 2004-04-16 | 2006-01-18 | Nokia Corp | Cell selection and re-selection |
US20050279445A1 (en) * | 2004-05-03 | 2005-12-22 | Paula Shemanski | Thermal applique text |
US8195205B2 (en) | 2004-05-06 | 2012-06-05 | Telecommunication Systems, Inc. | Gateway application to support use of a single internet address domain for routing messages to multiple multimedia message service centers |
US7991411B2 (en) | 2004-05-06 | 2011-08-02 | Telecommunication Systems, Inc. | Method to qualify multimedia message content to enable use of a single internet address domain to send messages to both short message service centers and multimedia message service centers |
KR101166765B1 (en) * | 2004-05-07 | 2012-07-27 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | IP ADDRESSING TO SUPPORT IPv4 AND IPv6 |
KR20060047692A (en) * | 2004-05-07 | 2006-05-18 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Sleep mode execution and control method applied to broadband wireless access system |
KR101119372B1 (en) * | 2004-05-10 | 2012-06-12 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for ip connectivity establishment procedures |
GB2415323B (en) * | 2004-06-15 | 2006-06-28 | Motorola Inc | Cellular communications system |
US7277703B2 (en) * | 2004-06-30 | 2007-10-02 | Nokia Corporation | Apparatus, and an associated method, for facilitating network selection utilizing modified scan list |
KR100895165B1 (en) * | 2004-07-10 | 2009-05-04 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Dynamic Resource Allocation Method for Orthogonal Division Multiple Access System |
JP4762619B2 (en) * | 2004-07-14 | 2011-08-31 | パナソニック株式会社 | Communication terminal device and wireless communication method |
US7461268B2 (en) * | 2004-07-15 | 2008-12-02 | International Business Machines Corporation | E-fuses for storing security version data |
US9137822B2 (en) | 2004-07-21 | 2015-09-15 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Efficient signaling over access channel |
US9148256B2 (en) | 2004-07-21 | 2015-09-29 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Performance based rank prediction for MIMO design |
US7796547B2 (en) * | 2004-08-06 | 2010-09-14 | Nextel Communications Inc. | Method and apparatus for providing information to mobile stations in inactive states |
US7475323B2 (en) * | 2004-08-20 | 2009-01-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for receiving a control channel in a wireless communication system |
CN1747588A (en) * | 2004-09-08 | 2006-03-15 | 展讯通信(上海)有限公司 | Village locking method of mobile communication terminal |
JP4411166B2 (en) * | 2004-09-21 | 2010-02-10 | 株式会社ケンウッド | Wireless communication system, wireless communication control device, wireless communication device, and wireless communication method |
US20060088003A1 (en) * | 2004-10-21 | 2006-04-27 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and computer program for selecting an inactivity timeout interval based on last data direction |
US7881905B2 (en) * | 2004-11-17 | 2011-02-01 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method for ambiguity resolution in location determination |
US7885658B2 (en) * | 2004-12-16 | 2011-02-08 | Alcatel-Lucent Usa Inc. | Method for detecting reverse link collisions on an air interface |
EP2364046A3 (en) * | 2004-12-30 | 2012-02-22 | Lg Electronics Inc. | A method of updating channel information by a mobile station that is in power saving mode |
KR100636216B1 (en) * | 2005-01-07 | 2006-10-19 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method of providing the same broadcast service and apparatus for receiving broadcast therefor |
US8073469B2 (en) * | 2005-01-31 | 2011-12-06 | Jasper Wireless, Inc. | Paging for non-real-time communications wireless networks |
US8073470B1 (en) | 2005-01-31 | 2011-12-06 | Jasper Wireless, Inc | Paging windows for power conservation in wireless networks |
US7529178B1 (en) * | 2005-02-14 | 2009-05-05 | Marvell International Ltd. | Automatic gain control for OFDM receivers for transmission of bursts of data in LAN systems |
US8135362B2 (en) | 2005-03-07 | 2012-03-13 | Symstream Technology Holdings Pty Ltd | Symbol stream virtual radio organism method and apparatus |
US9246560B2 (en) | 2005-03-10 | 2016-01-26 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Systems and methods for beamforming and rate control in a multi-input multi-output communication systems |
US9154211B2 (en) | 2005-03-11 | 2015-10-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Systems and methods for beamforming feedback in multi antenna communication systems |
US8446892B2 (en) | 2005-03-16 | 2013-05-21 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Channel structures for a quasi-orthogonal multiple-access communication system |
US9461859B2 (en) | 2005-03-17 | 2016-10-04 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Pilot signal transmission for an orthogonal frequency division wireless communication system |
US9143305B2 (en) | 2005-03-17 | 2015-09-22 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Pilot signal transmission for an orthogonal frequency division wireless communication system |
US9520972B2 (en) | 2005-03-17 | 2016-12-13 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Pilot signal transmission for an orthogonal frequency division wireless communication system |
KR100742359B1 (en) * | 2005-03-22 | 2007-07-25 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method and apparatus for sending short message reservation |
US8494531B2 (en) | 2005-03-25 | 2013-07-23 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method for creating a wireless picocell |
US8660561B2 (en) * | 2005-03-30 | 2014-02-25 | Nokia Corporation | MBMS feedback and neighboring cell measurement reporting |
US9184870B2 (en) | 2005-04-01 | 2015-11-10 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Systems and methods for control channel signaling |
US7219292B2 (en) * | 2005-04-14 | 2007-05-15 | Industrial Technology Research Institute | Cyclic redundancy check modification for length detection of message with convolutional protection |
US9408220B2 (en) | 2005-04-19 | 2016-08-02 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Channel quality reporting for adaptive sectorization |
US9036538B2 (en) | 2005-04-19 | 2015-05-19 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Frequency hopping design for single carrier FDMA systems |
US7430425B2 (en) | 2005-05-17 | 2008-09-30 | Telecommunication Systems, Inc. | Inter-carrier digital message with user data payload service providing phone number only experience |
US8565194B2 (en) | 2005-10-27 | 2013-10-22 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Puncturing signaling channel for a wireless communication system |
US8879511B2 (en) | 2005-10-27 | 2014-11-04 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Assignment acknowledgement for a wireless communication system |
US8611284B2 (en) | 2005-05-31 | 2013-12-17 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Use of supplemental assignments to decrement resources |
US8462859B2 (en) | 2005-06-01 | 2013-06-11 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Sphere decoding apparatus |
US20060280141A1 (en) * | 2005-06-08 | 2006-12-14 | Mcbeath Sean M | Apparatus and method for sharing a unique identifier among a plurality of receivers |
US8599945B2 (en) | 2005-06-16 | 2013-12-03 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Robust rank prediction for a MIMO system |
US9179319B2 (en) | 2005-06-16 | 2015-11-03 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Adaptive sectorization in cellular systems |
JP4718254B2 (en) * | 2005-06-17 | 2011-07-06 | 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ | Channel assignment apparatus and channel assignment method |
US8885628B2 (en) | 2005-08-08 | 2014-11-11 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Code division multiplexing in a single-carrier frequency division multiple access system |
EP1915831A1 (en) * | 2005-08-19 | 2008-04-30 | Mitsubishi Electric Research Laboratories, Inc. | Optimal signaling and selection verification for transmit antenna selection with erroneous feedback |
US20070041457A1 (en) | 2005-08-22 | 2007-02-22 | Tamer Kadous | Method and apparatus for providing antenna diversity in a wireless communication system |
US9209956B2 (en) | 2005-08-22 | 2015-12-08 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Segment sensitive scheduling |
US8644292B2 (en) * | 2005-08-24 | 2014-02-04 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Varied transmission time intervals for wireless communication system |
US9136974B2 (en) | 2005-08-30 | 2015-09-15 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Precoding and SDMA support |
US8156128B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2012-04-10 | Jumptap, Inc. | Contextual mobile content placement on a mobile communication facility |
US8989718B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-03-24 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Idle screen advertising |
US9703892B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2017-07-11 | Millennial Media Llc | Predictive text completion for a mobile communication facility |
US8666376B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2014-03-04 | Millennial Media | Location based mobile shopping affinity program |
US8819659B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2014-08-26 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Mobile search service instant activation |
US10038756B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2018-07-31 | Millenial Media LLC | Managing sponsored content based on device characteristics |
US8812526B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2014-08-19 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Mobile content cross-inventory yield optimization |
US7660581B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2010-02-09 | Jumptap, Inc. | Managing sponsored content based on usage history |
US7577665B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2009-08-18 | Jumptap, Inc. | User characteristic influenced search results |
US8615719B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2013-12-24 | Jumptap, Inc. | Managing sponsored content for delivery to mobile communication facilities |
US8364521B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2013-01-29 | Jumptap, Inc. | Rendering targeted advertisement on mobile communication facilities |
US7752209B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2010-07-06 | Jumptap, Inc. | Presenting sponsored content on a mobile communication facility |
US8805339B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2014-08-12 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Categorization of a mobile user profile based on browse and viewing behavior |
US7603360B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2009-10-13 | Jumptap, Inc. | Location influenced search results |
US8503995B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2013-08-06 | Jumptap, Inc. | Mobile dynamic advertisement creation and placement |
US8103545B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2012-01-24 | Jumptap, Inc. | Managing payment for sponsored content presented to mobile communication facilities |
US7702318B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2010-04-20 | Jumptap, Inc. | Presentation of sponsored content based on mobile transaction event |
US8131271B2 (en) | 2005-11-05 | 2012-03-06 | Jumptap, Inc. | Categorization of a mobile user profile based on browse behavior |
US7769764B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2010-08-03 | Jumptap, Inc. | Mobile advertisement syndication |
US8195133B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2012-06-05 | Jumptap, Inc. | Mobile dynamic advertisement creation and placement |
US7676394B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2010-03-09 | Jumptap, Inc. | Dynamic bidding and expected value |
US8364540B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2013-01-29 | Jumptap, Inc. | Contextual targeting of content using a monetization platform |
US8302030B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2012-10-30 | Jumptap, Inc. | Management of multiple advertising inventories using a monetization platform |
US10592930B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2020-03-17 | Millenial Media, LLC | Syndication of a behavioral profile using a monetization platform |
US9471925B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2016-10-18 | Millennial Media Llc | Increasing mobile interactivity |
US8832100B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2014-09-09 | Millennial Media, Inc. | User transaction history influenced search results |
US20110313853A1 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2011-12-22 | Jorey Ramer | System for targeting advertising content to a plurality of mobile communication facilities |
US9058406B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-06-16 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Management of multiple advertising inventories using a monetization platform |
US8660891B2 (en) | 2005-11-01 | 2014-02-25 | Millennial Media | Interactive mobile advertisement banners |
US8229914B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2012-07-24 | Jumptap, Inc. | Mobile content spidering and compatibility determination |
US9076175B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-07-07 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Mobile comparison shopping |
US8027879B2 (en) | 2005-11-05 | 2011-09-27 | Jumptap, Inc. | Exclusivity bidding for mobile sponsored content |
US10911894B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2021-02-02 | Verizon Media Inc. | Use of dynamic content generation parameters based on previous performance of those parameters |
US8238888B2 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2012-08-07 | Jumptap, Inc. | Methods and systems for mobile coupon placement |
US8209344B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2012-06-26 | Jumptap, Inc. | Embedding sponsored content in mobile applications |
US9201979B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2015-12-01 | Millennial Media, Inc. | Syndication of a behavioral profile associated with an availability condition using a monetization platform |
US7912458B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2011-03-22 | Jumptap, Inc. | Interaction analysis and prioritization of mobile content |
US7860871B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2010-12-28 | Jumptap, Inc. | User history influenced search results |
US8290810B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2012-10-16 | Jumptap, Inc. | Realtime surveying within mobile sponsored content |
US8688671B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2014-04-01 | Millennial Media | Managing sponsored content based on geographic region |
US8463249B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2013-06-11 | Jumptap, Inc. | System for targeting advertising content to a plurality of mobile communication facilities |
US20070061335A1 (en) * | 2005-09-14 | 2007-03-15 | Jorey Ramer | Multimodal search query processing |
US8311888B2 (en) | 2005-09-14 | 2012-11-13 | Jumptap, Inc. | Revenue models associated with syndication of a behavioral profile using a monetization platform |
US7450975B2 (en) * | 2005-09-28 | 2008-11-11 | Motorola, Inc. | System and method for improving battery life of a mobile station |
CN104853446B (en) * | 2005-10-21 | 2020-03-17 | 艾利森电话股份有限公司 | Techniques for performing random access procedures over a radio interface |
US9225416B2 (en) | 2005-10-27 | 2015-12-29 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Varied signaling channels for a reverse link in a wireless communication system |
US9088384B2 (en) | 2005-10-27 | 2015-07-21 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Pilot symbol transmission in wireless communication systems |
US8045512B2 (en) | 2005-10-27 | 2011-10-25 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Scalable frequency band operation in wireless communication systems |
US9144060B2 (en) | 2005-10-27 | 2015-09-22 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Resource allocation for shared signaling channels |
US9210651B2 (en) * | 2005-10-27 | 2015-12-08 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for bootstraping information in a communication system |
US9172453B2 (en) | 2005-10-27 | 2015-10-27 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for pre-coding frequency division duplexing system |
EP1780910A1 (en) * | 2005-10-27 | 2007-05-02 | Motorola, Inc. | Method of identifying repeating messages, and corresponding wireless communication arrangement |
US9225488B2 (en) | 2005-10-27 | 2015-12-29 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Shared signaling channel |
US8477684B2 (en) | 2005-10-27 | 2013-07-02 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Acknowledgement of control messages in a wireless communication system |
US8693405B2 (en) | 2005-10-27 | 2014-04-08 | Qualcomm Incorporated | SDMA resource management |
US8582509B2 (en) | 2005-10-27 | 2013-11-12 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Scalable frequency band operation in wireless communication systems |
US8175585B2 (en) | 2005-11-05 | 2012-05-08 | Jumptap, Inc. | System for targeting advertising content to a plurality of mobile communication facilities |
EP1947878B1 (en) * | 2005-11-11 | 2013-07-03 | NTT DoCoMo, Inc. | Mobile communication system, mobile station, base station, and control channel allocation method |
US8571999B2 (en) | 2005-11-14 | 2013-10-29 | C. S. Lee Crawford | Method of conducting operations for a social network application including activity list generation |
US8582548B2 (en) | 2005-11-18 | 2013-11-12 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Frequency division multiple access schemes for wireless communication |
US8060098B2 (en) * | 2006-01-13 | 2011-11-15 | Research In Motion Limited | Handover methods and apparatus for mobile communication devices |
EP1809063B1 (en) | 2006-01-13 | 2010-04-28 | Research In Motion Limited | Method and apparatus for performing handoff in a mobile communication device |
US8229398B2 (en) * | 2006-01-30 | 2012-07-24 | Qualcomm Incorporated | GSM authentication in a CDMA network |
KR101066288B1 (en) * | 2006-02-17 | 2011-09-20 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for increasing terminal's waiting time through efficient processing of allocated slot in mobile communication system |
US20110201325A1 (en) * | 2006-03-13 | 2011-08-18 | Noise Free Wireless, Inc | System, device, database and method for increasing the capacity and call volume of a communications network |
US20110312318A1 (en) * | 2006-03-13 | 2011-12-22 | Niose Free Wireless, Inc | System, device, database and method for increasing the capacity and call volume of a communications network |
US7555319B2 (en) * | 2006-03-21 | 2009-06-30 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Adaptive power efficient radio environment measurements |
US7684799B2 (en) * | 2006-03-28 | 2010-03-23 | Motorola, Inc. | Method for data transfer with a mobile station while in discontinuous reception state |
JP4992272B2 (en) * | 2006-03-30 | 2012-08-08 | 富士通株式会社 | Call control server |
KR100838375B1 (en) * | 2006-04-28 | 2008-06-13 | 주식회사 하이닉스반도체 | Semiconductor memory device |
US8520645B2 (en) * | 2006-06-30 | 2013-08-27 | Core Wireless Licensing S.A.R.L. | Method of controlling a mobile terminal, and an associated mobile terminal |
US8149799B2 (en) * | 2006-09-29 | 2012-04-03 | Broadcom Corporation | Method and system for interfacing to a plurality of antennas |
US20080113627A1 (en) * | 2006-11-10 | 2008-05-15 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | Regulating Signal Monitoring |
US8526979B2 (en) * | 2006-12-19 | 2013-09-03 | Alcatel Lucent | Method and apparatus for parent-controlled short message service |
US20080160985A1 (en) * | 2007-01-03 | 2008-07-03 | Variyath Girish S | Location based dialing over wireless media |
US8023973B2 (en) * | 2007-01-03 | 2011-09-20 | Motorola Solutions, Inc. | Expandable text messaging service protocol for use with a two-way radio transceiver |
US8892108B2 (en) * | 2007-01-30 | 2014-11-18 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Control channel constraints in wireless communications |
US8743774B2 (en) * | 2007-01-30 | 2014-06-03 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Resource requests for a wireless communication system |
US8599884B2 (en) * | 2007-03-15 | 2013-12-03 | Nokia Corporation | System and method for implementing optimized multiplexing and power saving in a broadcast network |
KR101292889B1 (en) * | 2007-03-16 | 2013-08-02 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method for transmitting/receiving controll channel in mobile communication system |
US8351380B2 (en) | 2007-05-09 | 2013-01-08 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd | Method and apparatus for layer 2 ARQ for packets |
US7898983B2 (en) * | 2007-07-05 | 2011-03-01 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods and apparatus supporting traffic signaling in peer to peer communications |
US8385316B2 (en) * | 2007-07-06 | 2013-02-26 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods and apparatus related to peer to peer communications timing structure |
US8385317B2 (en) * | 2007-07-06 | 2013-02-26 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods and apparatus supporting multiple timing synchronizations corresponding to different communications peers |
US8601156B2 (en) * | 2007-07-06 | 2013-12-03 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods and apparatus related to peer discovery and/or paging in peer to peer wireless communications |
US8599823B2 (en) * | 2007-07-06 | 2013-12-03 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Communications methods and apparatus related to synchronization with respect to a peer to peer timing structure |
EP2206269A2 (en) * | 2007-10-30 | 2010-07-14 | Nokia Corporation | Providing improved connection failure detection |
US8902867B2 (en) * | 2007-11-16 | 2014-12-02 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Favoring access points in wireless communications |
US20090137228A1 (en) * | 2007-11-16 | 2009-05-28 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Utilizing restriction codes in wireless access point connection attempts |
US8848656B2 (en) | 2007-11-16 | 2014-09-30 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Utilizing broadcast signals to convey restricted association information |
US8737295B2 (en) * | 2007-11-16 | 2014-05-27 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Sector identification using sector parameters signatures |
US9603062B2 (en) * | 2007-11-16 | 2017-03-21 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Classifying access points using pilot identifiers |
US20090191902A1 (en) * | 2008-01-25 | 2009-07-30 | John Osborne | Text Scripting |
US9246541B2 (en) * | 2008-02-01 | 2016-01-26 | Qualcomm Incorporated | UTRAN enhancements for the support of inter-cell interference cancellation |
US8208433B2 (en) * | 2008-02-19 | 2012-06-26 | Broadcom Corporation | Method and apparatus for allocating resources in wireless communication system |
JP5109707B2 (en) * | 2008-02-19 | 2012-12-26 | コニカミノルタビジネステクノロジーズ株式会社 | Fixing apparatus and image forming apparatus |
JP5412426B2 (en) * | 2008-04-28 | 2014-02-12 | 富士通株式会社 | Connection processing method, radio base station, and radio terminal in radio communication system |
US8380531B2 (en) * | 2008-07-25 | 2013-02-19 | Invivodata, Inc. | Clinical trial endpoint development process |
US20100027510A1 (en) * | 2008-08-04 | 2010-02-04 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Enhanced idle handoff to support femto cells |
US8588773B2 (en) * | 2008-08-04 | 2013-11-19 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method for cell search and selection in a wireless communication system |
BRPI0912458A2 (en) * | 2008-08-12 | 2019-08-27 | Interdigital Patent Holdings Inc | method and apparatus for geran control channel allocation using the concept of orthogonal subchannels. |
US8165092B2 (en) * | 2008-12-08 | 2012-04-24 | Xg Technology, Inc. | System and method for adaptive proactive scanning to support fast handoffs in mobile networks |
KR101104249B1 (en) | 2008-12-11 | 2012-01-11 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Carrier selection method of terminal and call connection method thereof |
JP5472883B2 (en) | 2008-12-16 | 2014-04-16 | 中▲興▼通▲訊▼股▲フン▼有限公司 | Terminal and scanning method thereof |
GB2466452A (en) * | 2008-12-18 | 2010-06-23 | Ubiquisys Ltd | A base station, for a cellular communication network |
US8712453B2 (en) | 2008-12-23 | 2014-04-29 | Telecommunication Systems, Inc. | Login security with short messaging |
KR101022578B1 (en) | 2009-01-06 | 2011-03-16 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | How to perform paging message transmission process in wireless communication system |
US9402193B2 (en) * | 2009-03-19 | 2016-07-26 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Systems, apparatus and methods for interference management in wireless networks |
US8299920B2 (en) | 2009-09-25 | 2012-10-30 | Fedex Corporate Services, Inc. | Sensor based logistics system |
US8239169B2 (en) | 2009-09-25 | 2012-08-07 | Gregory Timothy L | Portable computing device and method for asset management in a logistics system |
US9633327B2 (en) | 2009-09-25 | 2017-04-25 | Fedex Corporate Services, Inc. | Sensor zone management |
US8243750B2 (en) * | 2009-10-30 | 2012-08-14 | Motorola Solutions, Inc. | Method of control signaling in a wireless communication system |
JP5684276B2 (en) * | 2009-10-30 | 2015-03-11 | テレフオンアクチーボラゲット エル エム エリクソン(パブル) | Method for contacting a terminal group in a communication network, apparatus and terminal in a communication network |
US8451784B2 (en) * | 2009-11-06 | 2013-05-28 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Virtual neighbor objects for managing idle mode mobility in a wireless network |
US10251146B2 (en) * | 2009-12-11 | 2019-04-02 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Apparatus and method for network-initiated attachment and registration-less paging |
WO2011080833A1 (en) | 2009-12-28 | 2011-07-07 | 富士通株式会社 | Communication system, base station, relay station, mobile station, and communication method |
US20110194630A1 (en) * | 2010-02-10 | 2011-08-11 | Yang Hua-Lung | Systems and methods for reporting radio link failure |
CN102754500B (en) * | 2010-02-10 | 2017-06-13 | 瑞典爱立信有限公司 | Method and apparatus in telecommunication system |
KR101646521B1 (en) * | 2010-03-12 | 2016-08-08 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method for multiple paging in broadband wireless communication system |
KR101661161B1 (en) * | 2010-04-07 | 2016-10-10 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method for filtering ip packet in mobile communication terminal |
US9369962B2 (en) * | 2010-05-17 | 2016-06-14 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Reducing idle mode power consumption for monitoring neighboring base stations |
US20110296511A1 (en) * | 2010-05-28 | 2011-12-01 | Xerox Corporation | Secure Fax with Passcode and Recipient Notification |
US8781838B2 (en) * | 2010-08-09 | 2014-07-15 | General Motors, Llc | In-vehicle text messaging experience engine |
US8917705B2 (en) * | 2011-09-29 | 2014-12-23 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Collision reduction mechanisms for wireless communication networks |
US8825056B2 (en) * | 2011-10-04 | 2014-09-02 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method to select MS in overload control triggered base station initiated handover in WiMAX systems |
US8929854B2 (en) | 2011-10-27 | 2015-01-06 | Telecommunication Systems, Inc. | Emergency text messaging |
KR101667634B1 (en) * | 2012-01-19 | 2016-10-19 | 엘에스산전 주식회사 | Track circuit apparatus for train |
US9198120B2 (en) * | 2012-04-27 | 2015-11-24 | Marvell World Trade Ltd. | Method and apparatus for scanning multiple channels in a wireless network |
US8953482B2 (en) * | 2012-05-11 | 2015-02-10 | Intel Corporation | Methods and apparatuses to improve on-time throughput for integrated multi-rat heterogeneous networks |
US9066279B2 (en) * | 2013-02-27 | 2015-06-23 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System acquisition at a mobile device |
EP3036950A2 (en) * | 2013-08-21 | 2016-06-29 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | Paging in coverage extension mode |
EP4021045B1 (en) | 2014-02-05 | 2024-03-20 | Apple Inc. | Uniform communication protocols for communication between controllers and accessories |
US9655036B2 (en) * | 2014-05-12 | 2017-05-16 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | System and method for utilizing stored higher layer information |
US9904645B2 (en) * | 2014-10-31 | 2018-02-27 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | Multicore bus architecture with non-blocking high performance transaction credit system |
WO2016077802A1 (en) * | 2014-11-13 | 2016-05-19 | Loopd, Inc. | Systems and methods for network data transfer |
US10219198B2 (en) | 2016-05-24 | 2019-02-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for short message delivery in a mobility network |
CN108093453B (en) * | 2016-11-21 | 2020-03-03 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | Cell reselection method and device |
US10935604B2 (en) | 2017-02-22 | 2021-03-02 | Abb Schweiz Ag | Power distribution systems and methods of testing responses to electrical conditions using a communication network |
US10673226B2 (en) | 2017-02-22 | 2020-06-02 | Abb Schweiz Ag | Power distribution systems and methods of operating power distribution systems with a communication network |
US10797479B2 (en) | 2017-02-22 | 2020-10-06 | Abb Schweiz Ag | Power distribution systems and methods of performing ground fault detection in power distribution systems with a communication network |
US10644498B2 (en) | 2017-02-22 | 2020-05-05 | Aab Schweiz Ag | Power distribution systems and methods of performing zone selective interlocking in power distribution systems with a communication network |
JP6884600B2 (en) * | 2017-03-02 | 2021-06-09 | 任天堂株式会社 | Wireless communication system, communication method, information processing device, and information processing program |
JP6979740B2 (en) | 2017-03-02 | 2021-12-15 | 任天堂株式会社 | Wireless communication system, communication method, information processing device, and information processing program |
JP6895273B2 (en) | 2017-03-02 | 2021-06-30 | 任天堂株式会社 | Information processing equipment, information processing programs, wireless communication systems, and communication methods |
US11184788B2 (en) * | 2017-04-12 | 2021-11-23 | Htc Corporation | Device and method of handling a measurement gap in a wireless communication system |
US10496508B2 (en) * | 2017-06-02 | 2019-12-03 | Apple Inc. | Accessory communication control |
TWI657688B (en) * | 2017-11-22 | 2019-04-21 | 群登科技股份有限公司 | Time division multiplexing channel structure and time division multiplexing communication method using the same |
US11805009B2 (en) | 2018-06-03 | 2023-10-31 | Apple Inc. | Configuring accessory network connections |
EP3906716B1 (en) | 2019-01-04 | 2023-12-13 | FG Innovation Company Limited | Method and apparatus for plmn selection and cell (re) selection |
CN113330673B (en) * | 2019-01-24 | 2024-02-20 | 麦格纳国际公司 | Method and system for balancing a multiphase LLC power converter with controllable switched capacitors |
Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP0445887A2 (en) * | 1990-03-09 | 1991-09-11 | Philips Electronics Uk Limited | Method of optimising the transmission of idle beacon messages in a communications system and a communications system operable in accordance with the method |
WO1992014308A1 (en) * | 1991-01-31 | 1992-08-20 | Motorola, Inc. | Method for providing service access information in a communication system |
EP0505106A2 (en) * | 1991-03-22 | 1992-09-23 | Vodafone Limited | Split service in cellular telecommunications networks and methods therefore |
Family Cites Families (104)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US3772475A (en) * | 1972-08-28 | 1973-11-13 | Communications Satellite Corp | Satellite communications system with super frame format and frame segmented signalling |
JPS52122027A (en) * | 1975-12-10 | 1977-10-13 | Nec Corp | Burst synchronizing method and unit of time-sharing pluralistic connec tion communication system |
JPS5313803A (en) * | 1976-07-24 | 1978-02-07 | Nippon Telegr & Teleph Corp <Ntt> | Mobile communication system |
GB2063011B (en) * | 1979-11-09 | 1983-10-12 | Philips Electronic Associated | Information transmission system |
DE3200965A1 (en) * | 1982-01-14 | 1983-07-21 | Siemens AG, 1000 Berlin und 8000 München | NEARBY RADIO CELL ORGANIZATION CHANNEL REFERENCE SYSTEM |
US4509170A (en) * | 1982-02-22 | 1985-04-02 | Hydroacoustics Inc. | Time division multiplex transmission of submultiplex sequences of signals from sections of a chain of data acquisition units |
DE3246741C1 (en) * | 1982-12-17 | 1984-07-05 | Philips Kommunikations Industrie AG, 8500 Nürnberg | Method for selecting an organizational channel in a mobile radio station of a radio transmission system |
DE3246743C1 (en) * | 1982-12-17 | 1984-07-05 | Philips Kommunikations Industrie AG, 8500 Nürnberg | Method for distributing the volume of traffic to various organizational channels of a radio transmission system |
JPS59181732A (en) * | 1983-03-31 | 1984-10-16 | Toshiba Corp | Diversity receiving system in portable radio equipment |
GB2144310A (en) * | 1983-08-01 | 1985-02-27 | Philips Electronic Associated | Multiple-access communications system |
US4639937A (en) * | 1983-12-07 | 1987-01-27 | Harris Corporation | HF avalanche relay communication technique |
US4667193A (en) * | 1983-12-13 | 1987-05-19 | Honeywell, Inc. | Addressing system for simultaneously polling plural remote stations |
JPS60152144A (en) * | 1984-01-20 | 1985-08-10 | Hitachi Ltd | Wireless multiple access method |
JPS60248039A (en) * | 1984-05-23 | 1985-12-07 | Nec Corp | Digital communication system |
JPS619039A (en) * | 1984-06-25 | 1986-01-16 | Sony Corp | Multi-channel access radio system |
GB2165127B (en) * | 1984-09-26 | 1988-04-07 | Philips Electronic Associated | Multiple access communications system |
US4649538A (en) * | 1984-09-28 | 1987-03-10 | Motorola, Inc. | Radio paging device with improved test modes |
JPS61212930A (en) * | 1985-03-19 | 1986-09-20 | Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd | Mobile set in broad band mobile communication system |
US4755999A (en) * | 1985-03-25 | 1988-07-05 | Macken John A | Laser apparatus utilizing a magnetically enhanced electrical discharge |
KR880700603A (en) * | 1985-08-08 | 1988-03-15 | 원본미기재 | Scanning Receiver for National Wireless Paging System |
US4736371A (en) * | 1985-12-30 | 1988-04-05 | Nec Corporation | Satellite communications system with random multiple access and time slot reservation |
US4731814A (en) * | 1986-02-21 | 1988-03-15 | AT&T Information Systems Inc. American Telephone & Telegraph Company | Computer-controlled cordless telephone |
DE3611301C2 (en) * | 1986-04-04 | 1997-09-25 | Philips Patentverwaltung | Mobile radio system with communication channel and organization channel |
GB2195513B (en) * | 1986-09-18 | 1990-12-19 | Philips Electronic Associated | Radio system |
US4775999A (en) * | 1986-10-31 | 1988-10-04 | Motorola, Inc. | Registration of radiotelephones in networked cellular radiotelephone systems |
US4718081A (en) * | 1986-11-13 | 1988-01-05 | General Electric Company | Method and apparatus for reducing handoff errors in a cellular radio telephone communications system |
GB8628821D0 (en) * | 1986-12-02 | 1987-01-07 | Plessey Co Plc | Data transmission systems |
US4797654A (en) * | 1987-05-01 | 1989-01-10 | Gte Communication Systems Corporation | Data format conversion circuit |
JP2582369B2 (en) * | 1987-05-13 | 1997-02-19 | 日本電気株式会社 | Roaming registration / cancellation method |
US4845491A (en) * | 1987-05-15 | 1989-07-04 | Newspager Corporation Of America | Pager based information system |
US4905234A (en) * | 1987-06-03 | 1990-02-27 | General Electric Company | Apparatus and method for transmitting digital data over a radio communications channel |
US5168574A (en) * | 1987-08-03 | 1992-12-01 | Orion Industries, Inc. | System and method for switching between antennas in a radio frequency booster |
DE3854465T2 (en) * | 1987-11-27 | 1996-05-02 | Nippon Electric Co | Switching method in a digital cellular mobile communication system and mobile unit. |
US4891813A (en) * | 1988-01-29 | 1990-01-02 | Racal Data Communications Inc. | Passive bus communication using alternate CRC |
US5060227A (en) * | 1988-02-29 | 1991-10-22 | Motorola, Inc. | Digital telephone switch with simultaneous dual PCM format compatibility |
SE460449B (en) * | 1988-02-29 | 1989-10-09 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | CELL DIVIDED DIGITAL MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM AND PROCEDURE TO TRANSFER INFORMATION IN A DIGITAL CELL DIVIDED MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM |
US4860281A (en) * | 1988-02-29 | 1989-08-22 | Motorola, Inc. | Individual subchannel loopback in the PCM interfaces of a digital telephone exchange with control of the outbound path |
US4992783A (en) * | 1988-04-04 | 1991-02-12 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and apparatus for controlling access to a communication system |
US5101500A (en) * | 1988-05-30 | 1992-03-31 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Radio telecommunication apparatus |
US5012469A (en) * | 1988-07-29 | 1991-04-30 | Karamvir Sardana | Adaptive hybrid multiple access protocols |
US4940974A (en) * | 1988-11-01 | 1990-07-10 | Norand Corporation | Multiterminal communication system and method |
US5008822A (en) * | 1988-11-25 | 1991-04-16 | Picker International, Inc. | Combined high speed backprojection and forward projection processor for CT systems |
US4977589A (en) * | 1988-11-25 | 1990-12-11 | Motorola, Inc. | Signalling and control protocol for a communication system |
US5245616A (en) * | 1989-02-24 | 1993-09-14 | Rosemount Inc. | Technique for acknowledging packets |
US5128938A (en) * | 1989-03-03 | 1992-07-07 | Motorola, Inc. | Energy saving protocol for a communication system |
US5257401A (en) * | 1989-04-17 | 1993-10-26 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson | Method of maintaining an established connection in a mobile radio system comprising both analog and digital radio channels |
KR950013303B1 (en) * | 1989-04-17 | 1995-11-02 | 테레포오낙티이에보라겟트 엘 엠 앨리크썬 | Method of maintaining an established connection in a mobile radio system conprising both analog and digital radio |
IL93444A (en) * | 1989-04-27 | 1994-05-30 | Motorola Inc | Method and unit for communicating with communications systems having different operating characteristics |
US5172375A (en) * | 1989-06-22 | 1992-12-15 | Nec Corporation | Multiple access satellite communication system for mini-earth station networks |
US5200957A (en) * | 1989-06-26 | 1993-04-06 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson | Mobile assisted handoff |
US5162790A (en) * | 1989-07-10 | 1992-11-10 | Motorola, Inc. | Multiple transmitter paging system |
JP2545466B2 (en) * | 1989-08-24 | 1996-10-16 | 日本電信電話株式会社 | Mobile communication location registration method |
SE464438B (en) * | 1989-08-25 | 1991-04-22 | Eritel Ab | PROCEDURES TO ADAPT RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH BASE STATION AND MULTIPLE MOBILE STATIONS FOR TRAFFIC AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS |
JPH0822100B2 (en) * | 1989-09-19 | 1996-03-04 | 日本電信電話株式会社 | Mobile communication radio control channel configuration method |
US5093926A (en) * | 1989-09-29 | 1992-03-03 | Motorola, Inc. | Trunked communication system scanning method and apparatus |
US5214789A (en) * | 1989-11-17 | 1993-05-25 | Uniden America Corporation | Radio channel allocation based on location of mobile users |
JP2549928B2 (en) * | 1989-11-28 | 1996-10-30 | 日本電信電話株式会社 | Incoming control channel selection method |
US5020091A (en) * | 1989-12-26 | 1991-05-28 | Motorola Inc. | Automatic new radiotelephone system registration notification |
US5005171A (en) * | 1990-01-09 | 1991-04-02 | At&T Bell Laboratories | Telecommunication transmission format suited for network-independent timing environments |
GB2243976B (en) * | 1990-02-20 | 1994-09-07 | Nec Corp | Location registration and paging procedure for mobile communication |
US5182753A (en) * | 1990-03-20 | 1993-01-26 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson | Method of transmitting signaling messages in a mobile radio communication system |
US5418839A (en) * | 1990-04-13 | 1995-05-23 | Phonemate, Inc. | Environmental adaptive mechanism for channel utilization in cordless telephones |
US5119397A (en) * | 1990-04-26 | 1992-06-02 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson | Combined analog and digital cellular telephone system having a secondary set of control channels |
US5153902A (en) * | 1990-04-27 | 1992-10-06 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson | Multi-exchange paging system for locating a mobile telephone in a wide area telephone network |
US5166929A (en) * | 1990-06-18 | 1992-11-24 | Northern Telecom Limited | Multiple access protocol |
US5103459B1 (en) * | 1990-06-25 | 1999-07-06 | Qualcomm Inc | System and method for generating signal waveforms in a cdma cellular telephone system |
US5111454A (en) * | 1990-08-16 | 1992-05-05 | Motorola, Inc. | Digital cellular tdm system employing 6:1 packing of transcoded information |
US5230082A (en) * | 1990-08-16 | 1993-07-20 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson | Method and apparatus for enhancing signalling reliability in a cellular mobile radio telephone system |
JP2927920B2 (en) * | 1990-09-14 | 1999-07-28 | 日本電信電話株式会社 | Location registration control method |
US5153903A (en) * | 1990-11-05 | 1992-10-06 | Motorola, Inc. | Integrated paging and radiotelephone system having improved paging reliability |
CA2096832C (en) * | 1990-11-26 | 1996-08-20 | Daniel R. Tayloe | Method and apparatus for paging in a communication system |
GB2250892A (en) * | 1990-12-14 | 1992-06-17 | Philips Electronic Associated | A method of operating a radio communications system |
US5297144A (en) * | 1991-01-22 | 1994-03-22 | Spectrix Corporation | Reservation-based polling protocol for a wireless data communications network |
JP3070110B2 (en) * | 1991-02-27 | 2000-07-24 | 日本電気株式会社 | Video signal transmission system |
SE468031B (en) * | 1991-02-28 | 1992-10-19 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | PROCEDURES TO RECEIVE FROM A MOBILE STATION TO A RURAL MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM |
CA2064646A1 (en) * | 1991-04-02 | 1992-10-03 | Kipling W. Fyfe | Automatic number assignment module selection for mobile telephone |
SE468734B (en) * | 1991-07-04 | 1993-03-08 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | PUT IN FRAMEWORK TO PACK CONTINUOUS DATA INFORMATION TOGETHER WITH DATA IN PACKAGE FORM AND USE OF SET FOR DATA TRANSMISSION TO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM |
JPH05102898A (en) * | 1991-08-07 | 1993-04-23 | Shiyoudenriyoku Kosoku Tsushin Kenkyusho:Kk | Higher harmonic wave communication system |
US5235592A (en) * | 1991-08-13 | 1993-08-10 | International Business Machines Corporation | Dynamic switch protocols on a shared medium network |
SE469051B (en) * | 1991-09-10 | 1993-05-03 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | METHOD OF DETECTING THE CHANNEL ACCESS TO A NUMBER OF CHANNELS IN A MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM |
JP3269577B2 (en) * | 1991-10-02 | 2002-03-25 | モトローラ・インコーポレイテッド | Bit error rate detection method |
US5226040A (en) * | 1991-10-03 | 1993-07-06 | Compaq Computer Corporation | Data concentration interface for configuration of multiple TTY devices |
US5233643A (en) * | 1991-10-08 | 1993-08-03 | Network Access Corporation | Method and system network for providing an area with limited bandwidth bi-direction burst personnel telecommunications |
US5222061A (en) * | 1991-10-31 | 1993-06-22 | At&T Bell Laboratories | Data services retransmission procedure |
US5243419A (en) * | 1991-10-31 | 1993-09-07 | At&T Bell Laboratories | Soft coding for HDTV |
JPH05130019A (en) * | 1991-11-08 | 1993-05-25 | Hitachi Ltd | Position registration system |
US5307400A (en) * | 1991-11-25 | 1994-04-26 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M. Ericsson | Call routing in mobile telephone systems |
US5325088A (en) * | 1991-12-02 | 1994-06-28 | Motorola, Inc. | Synchronous selective signalling system |
JP2796464B2 (en) * | 1991-12-27 | 1998-09-10 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Wireless communication system and wireless communication method |
JPH05207023A (en) * | 1992-01-24 | 1993-08-13 | Hitachi Ltd | Mass data transmission method |
DE4211815A1 (en) * | 1992-04-08 | 1993-10-14 | Ascom Teletron Gmbh | Operating radio network for mobile communications - receiving mobile station transmission at different central stations for respective communication cells, to initiate communication switching between different cells |
US5377193A (en) * | 1992-04-30 | 1994-12-27 | Motorola, Inc. | Trunking system access method |
US5287374A (en) * | 1992-04-30 | 1994-02-15 | Hughes Aircraft Company | Identification of encoder type through observation of data received |
WO1994005128A1 (en) * | 1992-08-11 | 1994-03-03 | Fujitsu Limited | Position registration system of mobile communication terminals |
US5353332A (en) * | 1992-09-16 | 1994-10-04 | Ericsson Ge Mobile Communications Inc. | Method and apparatus for communication control in a radiotelephone system |
MX9305503A (en) * | 1992-09-16 | 1994-05-31 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION IN A RADIO TELEPHONE SYSTEM. |
US5404355A (en) * | 1992-10-05 | 1995-04-04 | Ericsson Ge Mobile Communications, Inc. | Method for transmitting broadcast information in a digital control channel |
SE500565C2 (en) * | 1992-10-26 | 1994-07-18 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | Method of providing random access in a mobile radio system |
US5513185A (en) * | 1992-11-23 | 1996-04-30 | At&T Corp. | Method and apparatus for transmission link error rate monitoring |
JP2838465B2 (en) * | 1993-03-26 | 1998-12-16 | 松下電器産業株式会社 | Communication control method for microcellular system |
US5509020A (en) * | 1993-05-27 | 1996-04-16 | Sony Corporation | Viterbi decoding apparatus and methods |
US5751739A (en) * | 1994-04-29 | 1998-05-12 | Lucent Technologies, Inc. | Methods of and devices for enhancing communications that use spread spectrum technology |
US5546420A (en) * | 1994-04-29 | 1996-08-13 | At&T Corp. | Methods of and devices for enhancing communications that use spread spectrum technology by using variable code techniques |
US5442625A (en) * | 1994-05-13 | 1995-08-15 | At&T Ipm Corp | Code division multiple access system providing variable data rate access to a user |
-
1993
- 1993-11-01 US US08/147,254 patent/US5603081A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
1994
- 1994-10-04 NZ NZ264605A patent/NZ264605A/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1994-10-29 TW TW083110008A patent/TW250614B/zh active
- 1994-10-29 TW TW083110005A patent/TW252246B/zh active
- 1994-10-29 TW TW083110004A patent/TW250612B/zh active
- 1994-10-29 TW TW083110009A patent/TW252243B/zh active
- 1994-10-29 TW TW083110007A patent/TW257920B/zh not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1994-10-29 TW TW086215903U patent/TW352204U/en unknown
- 1994-10-31 MY MYPI94002892A patent/MY131841A/en unknown
- 1994-10-31 US US08/331,816 patent/US5734645A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1994-10-31 CA CA002134695A patent/CA2134695C/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1994-10-31 SE SE9403725A patent/SE9403725L/en not_active Application Discontinuation
- 1994-10-31 MX MXPA94008462A patent/MXPA94008462A/en active IP Right Grant
- 1994-10-31 MY MYPI94002890A patent/MY113292A/en unknown
- 1994-10-31 MY MYPI94002893A patent/MY131701A/en unknown
- 1994-10-31 MY MYPI94002891A patent/MY111910A/en unknown
- 1994-10-31 MY MYPI94002889A patent/MY112576A/en unknown
- 1994-10-31 MY MYPI94002884A patent/MY111807A/en unknown
- 1994-10-31 AU AU77570/94A patent/AU690924B2/en not_active Ceased
- 1994-10-31 US US08/331,711 patent/US6058108A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1994-10-31 MY MYPI94002885A patent/MY113978A/en unknown
- 1994-10-31 US US08/332,114 patent/US5633874A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1994-10-31 US US08/331,951 patent/US5539748A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1994-11-01 KR KR1020027004242A patent/KR100353787B1/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1994-11-01 EP EP94308026A patent/EP0652680A3/en not_active Withdrawn
- 1994-11-01 SG SG1996012114A patent/SG71009A1/en unknown
- 1994-11-01 NZ NZ276575A patent/NZ276575A/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1994-11-01 BR BR9405703A patent/BR9405703A/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1994-11-01 AU AU10876/95A patent/AU685885B2/en not_active Ceased
- 1994-11-01 KR KR1020027004243A patent/KR100341070B1/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1994-11-01 FI FI953262A patent/FI953262A7/en unknown
- 1994-11-01 WO PCT/US1994/012631 patent/WO1995012930A1/en active Application Filing
- 1994-11-01 KR KR1019940028817A patent/KR950016039A/en not_active Ceased
- 1994-11-01 KR KR1019950702729A patent/KR100353127B1/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1994-11-01 CA CA002152944A patent/CA2152944C/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1994-11-01 BR BR9404316A patent/BR9404316A/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 1994-11-01 EP EP95901759A patent/EP0677224A4/en not_active Withdrawn
- 1994-11-01 CN CN94118667A patent/CN1073328C/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1994-11-01 KR KR1019950702730A patent/KR960700591A/en not_active Abandoned
- 1994-11-01 CN CN94191071A patent/CN1078986C/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1994-11-01 WO PCT/US1994/012648 patent/WO1995012936A1/en not_active Application Discontinuation
- 1994-11-01 SG SG1996008132A patent/SG45433A1/en unknown
- 1994-11-01 JP JP7513405A patent/JPH08508630A/en not_active Ceased
- 1994-11-01 KR KR1020027004244A patent/KR100353786B1/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 1994-11-01 KR KR1019950702768A patent/KR100356892B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1994-11-01 JP JP7513413A patent/JPH08508631A/en not_active Withdrawn
- 1994-11-01 EP EP01122549A patent/EP1191733B1/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1994-11-01 SG SG1996012115A patent/SG48506A1/en unknown
- 1994-11-01 KR KR1019950702770A patent/KR960700593A/en not_active Abandoned
-
1995
- 1995-06-07 US US08/481,865 patent/US5970057A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1995-06-07 US US08/473,583 patent/US5570467A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1995-06-07 US US08/478,735 patent/US5778316A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
- 1995-06-30 FI FI953266A patent/FI953266A7/en unknown
-
1997
- 1997-06-27 US US08/884,385 patent/US5923649A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
1998
- 1998-06-10 US US09/095,104 patent/US6144653A/en not_active Expired - Lifetime
-
1999
- 1999-07-19 US US09/357,158 patent/US6496489B1/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2001
- 2001-04-12 CN CN01116629A patent/CN1350403A/en active Pending
- 2001-06-29 CN CN01121715A patent/CN1406085A/en active Pending
- 2001-06-29 CN CN01121598A patent/CN1392689A/en active Pending
- 2001-06-29 CN CN01121712A patent/CN1423489A/en active Pending
Patent Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
EP0445887A2 (en) * | 1990-03-09 | 1991-09-11 | Philips Electronics Uk Limited | Method of optimising the transmission of idle beacon messages in a communications system and a communications system operable in accordance with the method |
WO1992014308A1 (en) * | 1991-01-31 | 1992-08-20 | Motorola, Inc. | Method for providing service access information in a communication system |
EP0505106A2 (en) * | 1991-03-22 | 1992-09-23 | Vodafone Limited | Split service in cellular telecommunications networks and methods therefore |
Also Published As
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
CN1073328C (en) | Method for communicating in a wireless communication system | |
CN1061495C (en) | Message sending system and method and wireless communication system | |
CN1253680A (en) | Mobile communication method and mobile communication system | |
CN1184749C (en) | Method of down-chain power control in packet switching cellular system | |
CN1117335A (en) | Apparatuses and mobile stations for providing packet data communication in digital TDMA cellular systems | |
CN1065697C (en) | Digital control channels having logical channels for multiple access radiocommunication | |
CN1104177C (en) | Packet channel feedback | |
CN1230035C (en) | CDMA terminal for providing roaming service to GSM service subscriber in CDMA service area | |
CN1129507A (en) | Method of providing service and negotiation in a mobile communication mobi | |
CN101053184A (en) | Enhanced radio link control error handling | |
CN1116888A (en) | Layer 2 Protocols in Cellular Communication Systems | |
CN1252911A (en) | CDMA communication method | |
CN1333961A (en) | Methods and systems for coding of broadcast messages | |
CN101043658A (en) | Method and apparatus for conveying reports for sms messages in wireless communication systems | |
CN101053170A (en) | Method and system for power controlling in multiple frequency band mobile station | |
CN1863405A (en) | Communication system,and a mobile radio-subscriber device,server unit, and method | |
HK1012818A (en) | Method for communicating in a wireless communication system | |
CA2303751A1 (en) | Method for communicating in a wireless communication system | |
CA2497670A1 (en) | Method for communicating in a wireless communication system | |
Rai | GPRS and 3G Wireless Systems | |
HK1093387A (en) | Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving mbms packet data and control information | |
HK1080663A (en) | Method and apparatus for conveying reports for sms messages in wireless communication systems | |
HK1094496A (en) | Method and apparatus for selecting a serving sector in a data communication system | |
HK1066964B (en) | Method and apparatus for selecting a serving sector in a data communication system | |
HK1066964A (en) | Method and apparatus for selecting a serving sector in a data communication system |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
C06 | Publication | ||
PB01 | Publication | ||
C10 | Entry into substantive examination | ||
SE01 | Entry into force of request for substantive examination | ||
C14 | Grant of patent or utility model | ||
GR01 | Patent grant | ||
C19 | Lapse of patent right due to non-payment of the annual fee | ||
CF01 | Termination of patent right due to non-payment of annual fee |